Instructional Videos
https://s.brother/cvdae/
Operation Manual
Sewing and Embroidery Machine
Product Code: 882-W40/W42
Be sure to read this document before using the machine.
We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.
The latest manuals are available at Brother support website ( https://s.brother/cpdae/ ).
1
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
Before using this machine, carefully read the
“IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS”, and
then study this manual for the correct operation
of the various functions. In addition, after you
have finished reading this manual, keep it where
it can quickly be accessed for future reference.
Please read these safety instructions before
attempting to use the machine.
DANGER
- To reduce the risk of electric shock
1Always unplug the machine from the electrical
outlet immediately after using, when cleaning,
making any user servicing adjustments mentioned
in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine
unattended.
WARNING
- To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electrical shock, or
injury to persons.
2Always unplug the machine from the electrical
outlet when making any adjustments mentioned in
the instruction manual.
• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the
symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the
plug and pull it out of the electrical outlet. Do not
pull on the cord.
• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
Do not use an extension cord.
• Always unplug your machine if there is a power
failure.
3Electrical Hazards:
• This machine should be connected to an AC power
source within the range indicated on the rating
label. Do not connect it to a DC power source or
inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power
source you have, contact a qualified electrician.
• This machine is approved for use in the country of
purchase only.
4Fire Hazards:
Do not use flammable substances, any type of
spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing
alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside
of the product. Doing so could cause a fire.
5Never operate this machine if it has a damaged
cord or plug, is not working properly, has been
stepped on, has been dropped or damaged, or if
water has been spilled on it or its accessories.
Consult the nearest authorized Brother dealer for
examination, repair, electrical or mechanical
adjustment.
• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice
anything unusual, such as an odor, heat,
discoloration or deformation, stop using the
machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
• When transporting the machine, be sure to carry it
by its handle. Lifting the machine by any other part
may damage the machine or result in the machine
falling, which could cause injuries.
• When lifting the machine, be careful not to make
any sudden or careless movements, which may
cause a personal injury.
6Always keep your work area clear:
• Do not install or use in areas where explosive or
electrically conductive dusts are generated.
• Never operate the machine with any air openings
blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the machine
and foot controller free from the build up of lint,
dust, and loose cloth.
• Do not store objects on the foot controller.
•
Never drop or insert foreign object into any opening.
• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are
being used or where oxygen is being administered.
• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such
as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power
cord or garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in
fire or an electric shock.
• Do not place this machine on an unstable surface,
such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise
the machine may fall, resulting in injuries.
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
2
7Special care is required when sewing:
• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not
use bent or damaged needles.
• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special
care is required around the machine needle.
• Switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to
turn it off when making any adjustments in the
needle area.
• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as
it could cause the needle to break.
•
Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and follow
careful instruction when free motion stitching so that
you do not deflect the needle and cause it to break.
8This machine is not a toy:
• Your close attention is necessary when the
machine is used by or near children.
• This product contains small parts. Keep the
product out of the reach of children to prevent
accidental ingestion of small parts.
• The plastic bag that this machine was supplied in
should be kept out of the reach of children or
disposed of. Never allow children to play with the
bag due to the danger of suffocation.
• Do not use the seam ripper in any other way than
how it is intended.
• Do not use outdoors.
9For a longer service life:
• When using and storing this machine, avoid direct
sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or
store the machine near a space heater, iron,
halogen lamp, or other hot objects.
• Do not use cleansers or organic solvents, such as
thinner, petroleum ether or alcohol, to clean the
machine. Otherwise, the finish may peel off or
become scratched.
• Always consult the Operation Manual when
replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser
feet, needle, or other parts to assure correct
installation.
10For repair or adjustment:
• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by
an authorized Brother dealer.
• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is
required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the
back of the Operation Manual to inspect and adjust
the machine yourself. If the problem persists,
please consult your local authorized Brother
dealer.
Use this machine only for its intended use as
described in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the
manufacturer as contained in this manual.
The contents of this manual and specifications of
this product are subject to change without notice.
SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
This machine is intended
for household use.
3
FOR USERS IN COUNTRIES
EXCEPT EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
This appliance is not intended for use
by persons (including children) with
reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities, or lack of experience and
knowledge, unless they have been
given supervision or instruction
concerning use of the appliance by a
person responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to
ensure that they do not play with the
appliance.
FOR USERS IN EUROPEAN
COUNTRIES
This appliance can be used by
children aged from 8 years and above
and persons with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capabilities or lack
of experience and knowledge if they
have been given supervision or
instruction concerning use of the
appliance in a safe way and
understand the hazards involved.
Children shall not play with the
appliance. Cleaning and user
maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
FOR USERS IN THE UK,
EIRE, MALTA AND
CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse
approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the
mark, rating as marked on plug.
• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs
with the fuse cover omitted.
• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for
the plug supplied with this equipment, you should
contact your authorized Brother dealer to obtain
the correct lead.
4
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC)
Supplier's Declaration of
Conformity (For U.S.A.
Only)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the authorized Brother dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operated
in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Important
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment
should be installed and operated keeping the radiator
at least 20cm or more away from person’s body.
For Users in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt
RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
This equipment should be installed and operated keeping
the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body.
For Users in Mexico
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and
(2) this equipment or device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencias perjudiciales y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
Declaration of
Conformity (Europe and
Turkey only)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that this product is in
conformity with the essential requirements of all relevant
directives and regulations applied within the European
Community.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother support website.
Visit support.brother.com
Responsible Party: Brother International
Corporation
200 Crossing Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911
U.S.A.
TEL : (908) 704-1700
declares that the product
Product Name: Brother Sewing Machine
Model Number: EV1, EV1-LE
5
Declaration of
Conformity for RE
Directive 2014/53/EU
(Europe and Turkey only)
(Applicable to models
with radio interfaces)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the provisions of the RE Directive 2014/53/
EU.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother support website. Visit support.brother.com
Wireless LAN (Models
with Wireless LAN
function only)
This machine supports wireless interface.
Frequency band(s): 2400-2483.5 MHz
Maximum radio-frequency power transmitted in the
frequency band(s): Less than 20 dBm(e.i.r.p)
UK Declaration of
Conformity (Great Britain
only)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the relevant UK legislation.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother support website. Visit support.brother.com
UK Declaration of
Conformity for Radio
Equipment Regulation
2017 (Great Britain only)
(Applicable to models
with radio interfaces)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the provisions of the Radio Equipment
Regulation 2017.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother support website. Visit support.brother.com
UK Statements of
Compliance for the
Product Security and
Telecommunications
Infrastructure (Security
Requirements for
Relevant Connectable
Products) Regulations
2023 (Great Britain only)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561, Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the provisions of the Product Security and
Telecommunications Infrastructure (Security Requirements
for Relevant Connectable Products) Regulations 2023.
A copy of the Statements of Compliance can be downloaded
from Brother support website. Visit support.brother.com
For Users in Norway
* This subsection does not apply for the geographical area
within a radius of 20 km from the centre of Ny-Alesund on
Svalbard.
* Dette underavsnittet gjelder ikke for det geografiske
området innenfor en radius av 20 km fra sentrum av Ny-
Ålesund på Svalbard.
6
Laser Notices (For U.S.A.
only)
Laser Safety
This sewing machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the
Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This
means that the sewing machine does not produce
hazardous laser radiation.
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC
60825-1:2014 specification.
The invisible laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in
this stitch regulator is restricted to an output at a safe level.
The stitch regulator contains 0.6-milliwatt, 840-860
nanometer wavelength, 1.5 mrad divergence angle, pulse
duration 26 µs, pulse frequency 10 kHz, laser module.
However, eye damage may result from disassembling or
altering this stitch regulator.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any
possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
FDA Regulations
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured on and after
August 2, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products
marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back
of the sewing machine indicates compliance with the FDA
regulations and must be attached to laser products
marketed in the United States.
Laser Notices (For
European countries)
EN 60825-1:2014+A11:2021 and EN
50689:2021 Specification
This machine is Class 1 consumer laser product in EN
60825-1:2014+A11:2021 and EN 50689:2021
specifications.
This laser measures the direction and amount of movement
of the cloth.
Laser Notices (For
countries except U.S.A.
and European countries)
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC
60825-1:2014 specification.
For countries except
U.S.A.
The invisible laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in
this stitch regulator is restricted to an output at a safe level.
The stitch regulator contains 0.6-milliwatt, 840-860
nanometer wavelength, 1.5 mrad divergence angle, pulse
duration 26 µs, pulse frequency 10 kHz, laser module.
However, eye damage may result from disassembling or
altering this stitch regulator.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any
possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Brother Industries, Ltd.
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561,
JAPAN
This product complies with FDA performance standards
for laser products except for conformance with IEC
60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56,
dated May 8, 2019.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of
procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION
• This machine has a Laser module in the stitch regulator.
The stitch regulator should not be opened under any
circumstances.
• Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of
procedures other than those specified in this manual
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CLASS 1 CONSUMER
LASER PRODUCT
EN 50689:2021
7
Legal limitations for
copying
(United States/Canada)
Observe all copyright laws when using this product.
Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal
and may result in either criminal or civil liability. This
memorandum is intended to be a guide rather than a
complete listing of every possible prohibition. In case
of doubt, we suggest that you check with counsel as to
any particular questionable documents.
The following documents issued by the United States/
Canadian Government or any of its Agencies may not
be copied:
• Money
• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
• Certificates of Deposit
• Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
• Selective Service or draft papers
• Passports
• United States/Canadian Postage Stamps
(canceled or uncanceled)
• Food Stamps
• Immigration Papers
• Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies
• Identifying badges or insignias
Copyrighted works cannot be copied. Sections of a
copyrighted work can be copied for ‘fair use’.
Multiple copies would indicate improper use.
Works of art should be considered the equivalent of
copyrighted works.
Unlawful Use of
Scanning Equipment
(Other countries except
United States/Canada)
It is an offence to make reproductions of certain items
or documents with the intent to commit fraud. The
following is a non-exhaustive list of documents which
it may be unlawful to produce copies of. We suggest
you check with your legal adviser and/or the relevant
legal authorities if in doubt about a particular item or
document:
•Currency
• Bonds or other certificates of debt
• Certificates of Deposit
• Armed forces service or draft papers
• Passports
• Postage stamps (cancelled or uncancelled)
• Immigration papers
• Welfare documents
• Cheques or drafts drawn by governmental
agencies
• Identifying badges or insignias
Copyrighted works cannot be copied lawfully, subject
to the “fair dealing” exception relating to sections of a
copyrighted work. Multiple copies would indicate
improper use. Works of art should be considered the
equivalent of copyrighted works.
8
Spool Stand
The warning label is attached to the bottom.
This product contains magnets.
a Be careful not to pinch your fingers or any objects
between the spool stand and the upper cover of
the machine.
b Be sure to keep the magnets away from precision
electronics, computer disks, credit cards with a
magnetic stripe, etc.
c Do not use the spool stand if you have a
pacemaker.
Stitch Regulator
The following caution sign pertains to the stitch
regulator.
a Laser emitting window
WPA™, WPA2™ and WPA3™ are trademarks of
Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO
WAVE INCORPORATED.
Any trade names and product names of
companies appearing on Brother products,
related documents and any other materials are
all trademarks or registered trademarks of those
respective companies.
Make sure you use a router or firewall when
connecting your machine to the Internet to
protect it against unauthorized access from the
Internet.
WARNING SIGN
CAUTION
• An invisible laser is emitted from the window indicated
by the arrow. Although this product complies with Class
1 laser product regulations to ensure safety, do not look
into the laser emitting window since that may be harmful
to your eyes.
TRADEMARKS
PRECAUTION FOR
WIRELESS
CONNECTION
9
Stitch Regulator
The stitch regulator allows free-motion quilting and
free-motion basting with a set stitch length.
(page 114)
Picture Play Embroidery Function
A photo can be converted into embroidery data.
(page 177)
Editing the Embroidery Pattern
Projected Onto Fabric
You can project the embroidery pattern onto the
fabric, then edit it. (page 154)
Projecting the Guidelines with the
Projector
With the guideline function, sewing can easily be
done by following the lines and marks projected
onto the fabric. (page 65)
Instructional Videos
The instructional videos are available online and
can be viewed on any mobile device or computer.
You can also access them using the QR code that
appears in the screen. (page 29)
Embroidery Frames and Support
Table
Embroidery frame (465 mm × 297 mm (approx. 18-
1/4 inches × 11-5/8 inches) ) can be used.
(page 128)
Using the support table to support the embroidery
frame and fabric allows you to maintain stitching
quality. (page 126)
Other Functions
• Filtering the embroidery patterns (page 135)
• Voice Guidance (page 28)
Outstanding Features
https://s.brother/cvdae/
CONTENTS
10
Chapter 1 Getting Ready 13
Names of Machine Parts.................................. 13
Included Accessories ...................................... 14
Using the Accessory Case .................................................. 14
Using the Flat Bed Attachment............................................ 15
Using the Multi-purpose Screwdriver .................................. 15
Using the Dual Purpose Stylus............................................ 15
Turning the Machine On/Off............................ 16
LCD Screen....................................................... 17
Tooltips................................................................................ 17
Using a USB Mouse (Commercially Available) ................... 17
Home Page Screen ............................................................. 18
Sewing Screens .................................................................. 19
Settings Screen................................................................... 22
Machine Help Screen.......................................................... 29
Wireless Network Connection Functions ...... 31
Available Operations ........................................................... 31
Set Up the Wireless Network Connection ........................... 32
Preparing the Needle and Thread................... 34
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations................................... 34
How to Use the Spool Cap and Spool Net .......................... 35
Changing the Needle ....................................... 36
Winding/Installing the Bobbin ........................ 37
Winding the Bobbin ............................................................. 37
Setting the Bobbin ............................................................... 40
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread ............................................. 41
Upper Threading .............................................. 42
Upper Threading ................................................................. 42
Using the Spool Stand......................................................... 45
Changing the Presser Foot ............................. 48
Replacing the Presser Foot................................................. 48
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter ........ 48
Using the Compact Dual Feed Foot .................................... 49
Chapter 2 Sewing Basics 51
Sewing............................................................... 51
Stitch Types......................................................................... 51
Basic Sewing....................................................................... 51
Using Advanced Multi-Function Foot Controller.................. 53
Sewing Reverse/Reinforcement Stitches ............................ 55
Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement Stitching....................... 56
Automatic Thread Cutting.................................................... 58
Automatic Presser Foot Lift Function .................................. 58
Automatic Presser Foot Raising Function ........................... 59
Returning to the Beginning of the Stitch Pattern ................. 59
Editing Character/Decorative Stitches................................. 59
Stitch Settings.................................................. 61
Setting the Stitch Width/Stitch Length/“L/R Shift”................ 61
Setting the Thread Tension................................................. 62
Saving the Utility Stitch Settings.......................................... 63
Using the Memory Function (Sewing)............ 64
Saving Character/Decorative Stitch Patterns ...................... 64
Retrieving Stitch Patterns.................................................... 64
Projecting the Guidelines onto the Fabric..... 65
Specify the Guidelines......................................................... 65
Piecing Using Guidelines .................................................... 67
Buttonhole Guidelines ......................................................... 68
Using the Projector with the Dual Purpose
Stylus ................................................................ 70
Operating the Projector with the Dual Purpose Stylus ........ 70
Projecting/Editing the Stitch Pattern with the Projector ....... 70
Useful Functions.............................................. 72
Pivoting................................................................................ 72
Using the Knee Lifter........................................................... 72
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure)............................................................................. 73
Changing the Stitch Width During Sewing.......................... 73
Checking the Needle Location in the Screen...................... 74
Needle Position - Stitch Placement .................................... 75
Specifying the Sewing End Point........................................ 75
Useful Sewing Tips.......................................... 78
Sewing Tips ........................................................................ 78
Sewing Various Fabrics...................................................... 78
Sewing Character/Decorative Stitches ............................... 80
Chapter 3 Various Stitches 81
Utility Stitches.................................................. 81
Straight Stitches.................................................................. 81
Zigzag Stitches ................................................................... 83
Overcasting......................................................................... 84
Blind Hem Stitches ............................................................. 85
One-Step Buttonholes ........................................................ 87
Four-Step Buttonholes........................................................ 91
Button Sewing..................................................................... 92
Bar Tacks............................................................................ 93
Darning ............................................................................... 93
Eyelet.................................................................................. 94
Basting................................................................................ 95
Zipper Insertion................................................................... 95
Stitch Tapering Function..................................................... 98
Couching........................................................................... 101
Multi-directional Sewing.................................................... 103
Making Step Stitch Patterns ............................................. 104
Making Adjustments ......................................................... 105
Sewing with a Twin Needle............................................... 106
Sewing Technique ............................................................ 107
Quilting ........................................................... 110
Piecing.............................................................................. 110
Quilting with the Compact Dual Feed Foot ....................... 111
Free Motion Quilting ......................................................... 111
Free-Motion Quilting/Basting with the Stitch Regulator .... 114
Hand-look Quilting ............................................................ 119
MY CUSTOM STITCH..................................... 120
Designing a Stitch............................................................. 120
Entering Stitch Data.......................................................... 121
Using the Memory Function (MY CUSTOM STITCH) ...... 123
Chapter 4 Basic Embroidery 125
Embroidering Preparation ............................ 125
Embroidery Step by Step.................................................. 125
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W” ........................................ 125
Attaching the Embroidery Unit.......................................... 126
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame................... 127
Attaching the Embroidery Frame ...................................... 131
Embroidering Attractive Finishes ...................................... 132
Embroidering Patterns.................................. 134
Embroidery Pattern Categories ........................................ 134
Selecting Embroidery Patterns ......................................... 134
Filtering the Embroidery Patterns ..................................... 135
Selecting Frame Patterns ................................................. 136
Selecting Buttonhole/Eyelet Patterns ............................... 136
Selecting Alphabet Character Patterns............................. 137
Confirming the Pattern Position........................................ 139
Embroidering Patterns ...................................................... 140
Key Functions (Embroidery) ........................ 142
Embroidery Edit Screen.................................................... 142
Character Pattern Editing Screen..................................... 144
Embroidery Screen........................................................... 145
Editing Patterns ............................................. 146
Changing the Size of the Pattern...................................... 146
Combining Patterns .......................................................... 147
Selecting Multiple Patterns at the Same Time.................. 148
Grouping Multiple Selected Patterns ................................ 149
Aligning the Embroidery Patterns ..................................... 149
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Designing Repeated Patterns ........................................... 150
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly ............................... 152
Previewing the Pattern...................................................... 153
Checking/Editing the Embroidery Pattern
Projected Onto Fabric ................................... 154
Checking the Embroidery Pattern with the Projector ........ 154
Using the Dual Purpose Stylus To Edit the Embroidery Pattern
Projected Onto Fabric (Projector Edit with Stylus)............ 155
Align the Embroidering Position .................. 157
Display the Fabric on the Screen...................................... 157
Using the Embroidery Positioning Sticker......................... 159
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle ................................. 160
Using the Camera View Window ...................................... 161
Adjustments during the Embroidery
Process ........................................................... 162
If the Bobbin Runs out of Thread ...................................... 162
If the Thread Breaks during Embroidering ........................ 163
If It is Difficult to Thread the Needle or Remove the
Embroidery Frame ............................................................ 164
Resuming Embroidery after Turning Off the Power .......... 164
Adjusting Thread Tension............................. 165
Adjusting the Tension of the Upper Thread ...................... 165
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case (with No Color on the
Adjusting Screw) ............................................................... 166
Using the Memory Function
(Embroidery)................................................... 167
Saving Embroidery Patterns ............................................. 167
Retrieving Embroidery Patterns ........................................ 168
Chapter 5 Advanced Embroidery 169
Editing Colors ................................................ 169
Changing the Thread Color............................................... 169
Find New Color Schemes with the Color Shuffling
Function ............................................................................ 169
Thread Color Sorting......................................................... 170
Uninterrupted Embroidering (Using a Single Color).......... 171
Various Embroidering Functions ................. 171
No Sew Setting ................................................................. 171
Changing the Embroidering Order of Combined
Patterns............................................................................. 172
Basting Embroidery........................................................... 173
Embroidering Linked Characters ...................................... 174
Print and Stitch Function................................................... 175
Picture Play Embroidery Function ............... 177
Adjusting the Imported Image ........................................... 177
Selecting the Conversion Method ..................................... 181
Selecting Appropriate Thread Colors and Density............ 183
Appliqué and Couching................................. 184
Creating an Appliqué Piece .............................................. 184
Embroidering the Appliqué Patterns ................................. 187
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an Appliqué .................... 189
Embroidering Couching Patterns ...................................... 191
Embroidering Quilting ................................... 194
Creating Quilting Patterns around a Design ..................... 194
Embroidering a Quilting Pattern Across the Entire Fabric
(Edge-to-Edge Quilt Function) .......................................... 195
Embroidering Quilting Border Patterns (Auto Split
Quilt Sash) ........................................................................ 201
Embroidering Quilting Border Patterns (Semi-Auto Split
Quilt Sash) ........................................................................ 203
Hexagonal Quilting Borders .............................................. 208
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns ....... 212
Embroidering Split Embroidery Patterns........................... 212
Aligning Pattern Edges ..................................................... 217
Using a Mobile App........................................ 225
My Stitch Monitor App....................................................... 225
Artspira App ...................................................................... 225
My Design Snap App ........................................................ 225
Chapter 6 My Design Center 227
About My Design Center............................... 227
Before Creating Designs............................... 227
Create a Stippling Design with the Basic
Procedure....................................................... 227
Key Functions (My Design Center).............. 230
Pattern Drawing Screen .................................................... 230
Using the Stamp Key......................................................... 231
Drawing Lines.................................................................... 232
Drawing Regions ............................................................... 232
Setting the Line Types, Stitch Types and Colors .............. 233
Setting the Brush Types, Fill Stitch Types and Fill
Colors ................................................................................ 234
Using the Select Key ......................................................... 235
Using the Erase Key.......................................................... 235
Using the Size Key ............................................................ 236
Importing Motif Stitch Pattern Data or Decorative Fill
Pattern Data ...................................................................... 236
Stitch Settings Screen .................................. 238
Specifying Individual Stitch Settings.................................. 238
Line and Region Settings .................................................. 239
Specifying Global Stitch Settings ...................................... 241
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images
or Image Data Files........................................ 241
Using the Scanning Frame ................................................ 241
Scanning the Background Image ...................................... 243
Importing the Background Image ...................................... 244
Create a Pattern with Line Conversion.............................. 245
Create a Pattern with Illustration Conversion .................... 247
Various Embroidering with My Design
Center ............................................................. 249
Decorative Stitching Around a Pattern .............................. 249
When Embroidering with Batting Sandwiched Between
Two Layers of Fabric......................................................... 251
Decorative Stitching Around a Couching Patterns ............ 252
Chapter 7 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting 255
Care and Maintenance .................................. 255
Restrictions on Oiling ........................................................ 255
Precautions on Storing the Machine ................................. 255
Cleaning ............................................................................ 255
Needle Calibration for Camera/Projector .......................... 257
Before Lending or Disposing of the Product...................... 258
Confirming the Machine Number/Serial Number............... 258
Updating Your Machine’s Software ............. 258
Update Procedure Using USB Media................................ 258
Update Procedure Using Wireless LAN Connection ......... 259
Troubleshooting ............................................ 260
Upper Thread Is Too Tight ................................................ 260
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric ......................... 261
Incorrect Thread Tension .................................................. 261
Fabric Is Caught in the Machine and Cannot
be Removed ...................................................................... 262
If the Thread Becomes Tangled Under the Bobbin
Winder Seat....................................................................... 263
List of Symptoms............................................................... 264
Error Messages ............................................. 269
Chapter 8 Appendix 271
Specifications ................................................ 271
Stitch Chart .................................................... 273
INDEX ............................................................. 280
CONTENTS
12
Names of Machine Parts
Getting Ready
13
1
Front View
* Camera and projector (built-in)
a Top cover
b Pretension disk (page 37)
c Thread guide for bobbin winding (page 37)
d Spool pin (page 42)
e Spool cap (page 42)
f Supplemental spool pin (page 37, page 106)
g Bobbin winder (page 37)
h Bobbin winding slider (page 37)
i Dual purpose stylus tray (page 15)
j LCD (liquid crystal display) (page 17)
k Speaker
l Knee lifter (page 72)
m Knee lifter slot (page 72)
n Operation buttons and sewing speed controller
(page 14)
o Needle plate lever (page 255)
p Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment
(page 15)
q Thread guide plate (page 42)
r Thread cutter (page 42)
Right-side/Rear View
a Connector for the presser foot (page 49)
b Handle
Carry the machine by its handle when transporting the machine.
c Presser foot lever
Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the
presser foot. You cannot use the presser foot lever after the
presser foot has been raised using (Presser foot lifter
button).
d Air vent
The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate. Do
not cover the air vent while the machine is being used.
e Main power switch (page 16)
f Power cord receptacle (page 16)
g Advanced multi-function foot controller (page 53)
h Foot controller jack (page 53)
i USB ports (page 17, page 64)
j Handwheel
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise
and lower the needle.
Needle and Presser Foot Section
a Presser foot holder screw (page 48)
b Presser foot holder (page 48)
c Presser foot
The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the
selected stitch.
d Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.
e Bobbin cover (page 40, page 83)
f Needle plate (page 82, page 255)
g Needle bar thread guide (page 42)
h Needle clamp screw (page 36)
Chapter 1
Getting Ready
Note
• Be sure to install the latest software.
Refer to “Updating Your Machine’s Software”
on page 258.
Names of Machine Parts
IMPORTANT
• Do not place any object weighing 1 kg (2.2 lb) or more
on the top cover, otherwise the cover may be damaged.
• Do not touch the camera or projector. Otherwise, it will
not display properly.
*
a
b
c
d
g
h
e
f
Included Accessories
14
Embroidery Unit
a Carriage (page 126)
b Release lever (page 127)
c Embroidery frame holder (page 131)
d Frame-securing lever (page 131)
e Embroidery unit connection (page 126)
Operation Buttons
a “Start/Stop” button
Press this button to start or stop sewing. The button changes
color according to the machine’s operation mode.
b Reverse stitch button
Press this button to sew reverse or reinforcement stitches
depending on the selected stitch pattern. (page 56)
c Reinforcement stitch button
Press this button to sew a single stitch repeatedly and tie-off.
For character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with a
full stitch instead of at a mid-point. (page 55)
In addition, use this button to sew reinforcement stitches before
cutting the thread when changing the bobbin thread in
embroidery mode. (page 162)
d Needle position button
Press this button to raise or lower the needle position. Also with
this button, you can lower and raise the needle to sew a single
stitch.
e Thread cutter button
Press this button after sewing to automatically trim the excess
thread.
f Presser foot lifter button
Press this button to lower the presser foot and apply pressure to
the fabric. Press this button again to raise the presser foot.
g Sewing Speed controller
Use this controller to adjust the sewing speed. Move the slide to
the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the slide to the right to
sew at higher speeds.
h Automatic threading button
Press this button to automatically thread the needle.
For included accessories of your machine, refer
to the additional sheet “Included Accessories”.
Slide the latches on the front of the accessory
case outward to open it.
a Latches
Green: The machine is ready or is operating.
Red: The machine is not ready.
Included Accessories
Using the Accessory Case
Memo
• Placing bobbin clips on bobbins helps prevent
the thread from unwinding from the bobbin.
• Bobbin clips can be stored inside of the
accessory case cover.
a
Included Accessories
Getting Ready
15
1
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the
accessory compartment.
The included dual purpose stylus can be used on
both sides. Use the transparent disc to operate
the screen and the light to operate the projector.
(page 70)
a Transparent disc for operating the screen
b Light for operating the projector
Touching the Screen
Touch the LCD screen with the transparent disc on
the dual purpose stylus.
Using the Flat Bed Attachment
Memo
• Three presser foot storage trays are stored in
the included accessory case.
For your convenience, a presser foot storage
tray can be stored in the accessory
compartment of the flat bed attachment.
a Presser foot storage space of the flat bed
attachment
b Presser foot storage tray
c Needle plate storage space
Using the Multi-purpose
Screwdriver
Position “1” You can install/remove the presser foot holder
or needle clamp screw.
(page 36, page 48)
Position “3” You can tighten/loosen the frame adjustment
screw.
(page 130)
Using the Dual Purpose Stylus
IMPORTANT
• Touch the LCD screen with the transparent disc on the
dual purpose stylus. Using any other part to touch the
LCD screen may cause scratches.
• Do not pull on the transparent disc, otherwise damage
may result.
Memo
• Touching the LCD screen with the dual
purpose stylus at an excessive angle may
prevent the contact position from being
correctly detected.
• You can keep the dual purpose stylus with the
machine. Open the top cover and place the
dual purpose stylus.
Turning the Machine On/Off
16
1 Insert the power supply cord into the
power cord receptacle, then insert the
plug into a wall outlet.
a Main power switch
b Power supply cord
2 Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn
on the machine.
3 When the machine is turned on, the
opening movie is played. Touch
anywhere on the screen.
4 Turn the main power switch to “O” to
turn off the machine.
Setting Your Machine for the First
Time
When you first turn on the machine, set the
language and time/date to your language and local
time/date.
1 Touch and to set your local
language, and then touch [OK].
2 Touch [OK] to read end-user license
agreements (EULA).
3 Touch [I Agree] after reading end-user
license agreements.
* Read every page. Swipe the screen with your
finger to turn the page.
Turning the Machine On/
Off
WARNING
• Use only regular household electricity for the power
source. Using other power sources may result in fire,
electric shock, or damage to the machine.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock
may result.
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly
inserted into the electrical outlet and the power cord
receptacle on the machine. Otherwise, a fire, electric
shock or malfunction may result.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the
following circumstances to avoid a fire, electric shock or
malfunction from occurring.
• When you are away from the machine
• After using the machine
• When the power fails during use
• When the machine does not operate correctly due to
a bad connection or a disconnection
• During electrical storms
CAUTION
• Use the power cord included with this machine.
Otherwise, a fire or electric shock may result.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with
many other appliances plugged in to them. Fire or
electric shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn the main
power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove it
from the outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the
cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged,
modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled. Do
not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the
cord to heat. These things may damage the cord, or
cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is
damaged, take the machine to your authorized Brother
dealer for repairs before continuing use.
• Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an
electrical outlet that is in poor condition. A fire or electric
shock may result.
• For U.S.A. only
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider
than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical shock,
this plug is intended to fit in a polarized outlet only one
way. If the plug does not fit fully in the outlet, reverse the
plug. If it still does not fit, contact a qualified electrician to
install the proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any
way.
Memo
• When the machine is turned on, the needle
and the feed dogs will make sounds when they
move; this is not a malfunction.
LCD Screen
Getting Ready
17
1
4 The message screen confirming if you
want to set time/date appears. Touch
[OK].
5 Touch or to set time/date. And
then touch [OK].
a Turn clock display on or off.
b Set the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).
c Select whether 24h or 12h setting to display.
d Set the current time.
6 The following message about a wireless
LAN connection appears. To set up a
connection, touch [OK], and then refer to
steps
5 through 8 of “Set Up the
Wireless Network Connection” on
page 32 to finish setting up a wireless
LAN connection.
7 The message screen confirming if you
want to set the voice guidance appears.
To turn on the voice guidance function,
touch [OK], and then refer to “Voice
Guidance” on page 28.
Touch the LCD screen or a key with your finger
or the included dual purpose stylus to select a
machine function. (page 15)
Some keys have a tooltip, which is a small
descriptive message that appears with a long
press of the key.
The USB mouse (commercially available) can be
connected to the USB port of the machine. The
left mouse button can be used to perform
operations such as choosing a design and
choosing menu keys.
a USB ports
b USB mouse
c Receiver for USB mouse
Memo
• The time/date you set may be cleared if you do
not turn on the machine for an extended
period of time.
b
a
c
d
LCD Screen
IMPORTANT
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the dual
purpose stylus included with the machine.
Do not use a mechanical pencil, screwdriver or any
other hard or sharp object. In addition, do not press the
screen with extreme pressure. Otherwise the screen
may be damaged.
Memo
• The screens and icons shown in the document
may differ from the actual ones.
Tooltips
Using a USB Mouse
(Commercially Available)
Memo
• Use a basic computer mouse to operate the
machine functions. Some USB mouse devices
may not be compatible with this machine.
• When the mouse is connected, the pointer
appears on the screen.
• Tooltips can be shown by moving the mouse
over the keys.
LCD Screen
18
Home Page Screen
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Select a utility stitch or character/
decorative stitch pattern.
19, 51
Sewing key
Select an embroidery pattern. 134
Embroidery
key
©Disney
Touch this key to embroider Disney
patterns.
—
Disney key
Create an original embroidery
pattern.
227
My Design
Center key
Specify the wireless LAN settings.
Also, this key shows the machine’s
wireless LAN signal strength.
If there is a new update file, the
key appears as .
32, 259
Wireless LAN
key
Touch this key to check the needle
location.
74
Camera view
key
Change the machine settings. 22
Machine
settings key
See explanations on how to use
the machine. Use the QR code that
appears in the screen to access
instructional videos for the
machine.
29
Machine help
key
b
c
a
l
e f g h i j
d
k
Touch this key before changing the
needle, the presser foot, etc. This
key locks all key and button
functions to prevent operation of
the machine.
36, 40,
48
Presser foot/
Needle
exchange key
Lock the screen. Touch this key
again to unlock the screen.
—
Screen lock
key
Cancel all operations previously
performed and return to the home
page screen.
—
Home page
screen key
Set the time/date. 16
Time/Date key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
LCD Screen
Getting Ready
19
1
Key Functions (Utility Stitch
Screen)
Sewing Screens
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Shows the approximate ratio
of the displayed size of the
selected stitch pattern
compared to its actual size.
—
Stitch pattern
display size
Shows the recommended
presser foot. Attach the
presser foot indicated in this
display before sewing.
48
Presser foot display
Shows the name and code
number of the selected stitch.
—
Selected stitch
display
Shows a preview of the
selected stitch. When shown
at 100%, the stitch appears in
the screen at nearly its actual
size. Touch to display
the stitch preview and the
camera view together to
check how the stitch will be
sewn on the actual fabric.
74
Stitch preview
Select the category, and then
touch the key of the stitch you
want to sew.
51
Stitch selection
screen
Slide the scroll bar to move
the pages of stitch selection
screen.
—
Scroll bar
a
b
d
c
e
f
Memo
• Editing function keys are found after touching
.
• Some editing functions cannot be used with
certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for
the displayed keys are available when a stitch
pattern is selected.
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Touch this key to display an
enlarged image of the selected
stitch pattern.
Touch to change the
thread color in the image.
To display the enlarged image,
touch .
To view any part of the image
that extends out of the viewable
display area, touch / /
/.
—
Preview key
Touch this key to use projector
functions.
70
Projector key
Touch this key to display or set
the guideline marker for the
sewing line.
The guideline marker makes
quilt piecing or aligning stitching
on the fabric edge easier.
65
Guideline marker
key
Touch this key to select a
straight stitch, zigzag stitch,
buttonhole, blind hem stitch, or
other stitches commonly used
in garment construction.
51
Utility stitch key
x
c
g
l
o
p
q
r
u
d e
f
i
h
k
j
st
v
w
a
y
b
m
n
LCD Screen
20
Touch this key to select
character or decorative stitch
patterns.
51
Character/
Decorative stitch
key
Touch this key to display editing
function keys on the screen.
—
Edit menu key
Touch this key to enter free
motion sewing mode.
The presser foot is raised to an
appropriate height and the feed
dogs are lowered for free
motion quilting.
111
Free motion
mode key
When sewing is stopped, touch
this key to return to the
beginning of the stitch.
59
Back to beginning
key
Touch this key to choose single
stitches or continuous stitches.
59
Single/Repeat
sewing key
Touch this key to create a
mirror image of the selected
stitch pattern.
—
Mirror image key
Touch this key to select twin
needle sewing mode. The
sewing mode changes between
single needle mode and twin
needle mode each time you
touch the key. If the key display
is light gray, the selected stitch
pattern cannot be sewn in the
twin needle mode.
106
Single needle/
twin needle key
Touch this key to manually set
the buttonhole length when a
buttonhole stitch is selected.
89
Slit length key
Touch this key to specify the
sewing end point.
75
End point setting
key
Touch this key to change the
start and end angles of the
stitch pattern.
98
Stitch tapering
key
Touch this key to retrieve a
saved stitch pattern.
63
Retrieve key
Change the stitch pattern
settings (stitch width and stitch
length, thread tension, etc.),
then save them by touching this
key.
63
Manual memory
key
Touch this key to return the
selected stitch pattern saved
settings to the default settings.
63
Reset key
Shows the automatic thread
tension setting of the currently
selected stitch pattern. You can
use and to
change the thread tension
settings.
62
Thread tension
key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Touch to shift the stitch
pattern to the right or touch
to shift the stitch
pattern to the left. This feature
is not available for all stitch
patterns. Only those applicable
will be shifted.
61
[L/R Shift] key
Shows the zigzag width and
stitch length settings of the
currently selected stitch pattern.
You can use and
to adjust the zigzag
width and stitch length settings.
61
Stitch width and
stitch length key
Touch this key to use the
automatic reinforcement
stitching (reverse stitching)
setting.
56
Automatic
reinforcement
stitch key
Touch this key to set the
automatic thread cutting
function.
58
Automatic thread
cutting key
Touch this key to select the
needle stop position to be up or
down. You can also check the
needle mode setting (single or
twin).
Single needle/down
position
Single needle/up position
Twin needle/down position
Twin needle/up position
72, 106
Needle stop
position setting
key
/
The pivot key appears when the
needle position setting key is
set to . Touch this key to
select the pivot function. When
the pivot function is selected,
stopping the machine lowers
the needle and slightly raises
the presser foot automatically.
In addition, when sewing is
restarted, the presser foot is
automatically lowered.
The auto up key appears when
the needle position setting key
is set to . Touch the auto
up key to raise the presser foot
when the machine is stopped.
59, 72
Pivot key / Auto
Up key
Touch this key to change the
thread color displayed on the
screen.
74
Thread color
change key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
LCD Screen
Getting Ready
21
1
Key Functions (Character/
Decorative Stitch Screen)
Memo
• The key displayed in 7 will vary according to
the selected stitch pattern.
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Touch this key to add a new
stitch pattern.
59
Add stitch pattern
key
Touch this key to select the
stitch pattern for editing.
60
Stitch pattern
selection key
Touch this key to switch
between selecting only the last
stitch pattern entered or all
combined stitch patterns.
—
Select all on/off
key
Touch this key to make step
stitch patterns.
104
Step effect key
After selecting the stitch
pattern, use this key to create a
vertical mirror image of the
stitch pattern.
—
Vertical mirror
image key
Delete the selected stitch
pattern.
59
Delete key
b
c
a
e
f
g
h
i
d
One of the following three keys will appear, depending on
the selected stitch pattern.
After selecting a stitch pattern
with , use this key to
change the thread density of
the stitch pattern.
: Low density
: High density
When the select all on/off key
appears as , the thread
density of all stitch patterns can
be changed.
—
Thread density
key
When a stitch pattern is
selected with , touch this
key to choose from five
automatic length settings,
without changing the zigzag
width or stitch length settings.
—
Elongation key
Touch this key to change the
spacing of character stitch
patterns. The setting is applied
to all entered characters.
—
Character
spacing key
Touch this key to maintain the
aspect ratio when enlarging or
reducing the stitch pattern.
60
Maintain aspect
ratio key
Touch this key to save stitch
pattern combinations or stitches
with modified/customized
settings.
64
Memory key
Memo
• For the other keys, refer to “Key Functions
(Utility Stitch Screen)” on page 19.
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
LCD Screen
22
Touch to change the default machine settings
(language, speaker volume, opening display,
etc.).
a Display sewing settings
b Display general settings
c Display embroidery settings
d Display wireless LAN settings
e The settings on the page containing this key will be
reverted to their defaults.
f An image of the current settings screen can be
saved on USB media. Connect the USB media to
the USB port of the machine. The image file will be
saved in a folder labeled [bPocket].
Sewing Settings
Page 1
a Select whether to use the sewing speed controller
to determine the zigzag width. (page 73)
When a straight stitch is selected, the sewing
speed controller can be used to change the needle
position. (page 81)
b Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch
patterns. (page 105)
c Adjust the presser foot height. Select the height of
the presser foot when the presser foot is raised.
d Adjust the presser foot pressure. The higher the
number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the
pressure at [3] for normal sewing.
e When set to on, the thickness of the fabric is
automatically detected by an internal sensor while
sewing. This enables the fabric to be fed smoothly.
(page 73, page 79)
Page 2
a Select whether [1-01 Straight stitch (Left)] or [1-03
Straight stitch (Middle)] is the utility stitch that is
automatically selected when the machine is turned
on.
b Change the height of the presser foot when sewing
is stopped when the pivot setting is selected.
(page 72)
Settings Screen
Memo
• Touch or to display the previous or
next page.
• is a switch for turning on or off a
function. When the switch appears as ,
the function is turned off (cannot be used).
fedca b
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
LCD Screen
Getting Ready
23
1
c Change the height of the presser foot when the
machine is set to free motion sewing mode.
(page 111)
d Adjust the amount of fabric feeding of the compact
dual feed foot. (page 50)
e Pressing the “Start/Stop” button or depressing the
foot controller automatically lowers the presser foot
(if it is raised) before starting sewing.
f Pressing (Thread cutter button) automatically
lowers the presser foot before cutting the thread.
The presser foot will be raised after the thread is
cut.
Page 3
a Select whether utility stitches ( ) or quilting
stitches ( ) are displayed first in the stitch
selection screen.
b When set to on, reinforcement stitches are sewn at
the beginning and/or end of sewing for a
reinforcement stitch pattern, even when
(Reverse stitch button) is pressed. (page 56)
c Select the functions to be performed by the multi-
function foot controller. (page 53)
d If this setting is set to on with [End Point Setting] in
the stitch edit menu, the machine will temporarily
stop so the end point sticker can be peeled off.
(page 75)
General Settings
Page 4
a Change the display language.
b Turn on/off the voice guidance function. (page 28)
c Change the language and voice of the voice
guidance. (page 28)
d Adjust the voice guidance volume.
e Change the speaker volume.
f Adjust the stitch regulator warnings volume.
(page 118)
g Change the brightness of the needle area and
work area lights.
h Adjust the brightness of the screen.
Page 5
a Select whether to display the opening screen video
when the machine is turned on.
b Select to save the machine power by setting the
[Eco Mode] or the [Shutoff Support Mode].
(page 27)
c Select the length of time until the screen saver
appears.
c
a
b
d
a
d
f
b
c
e
h
g
c
b
d
a
f
e
LCD Screen
24
d Change the image of the screen saver. (page 27)
e Select the operation of the [Needle Position - Stitch
Placement] to on or off. (page 75)
f Turn both the upper and bobbin thread sensor on
or off. If it is turned off, the machine can be used
without thread.
Page 6
a Select which background color will display when
using projector function. (page 70)
b Select whether to display outline of the stitch
pattern. (page 70)
c Select the color of the pointer. (page 139)
d Select a cross shape or a point as the shape for
the pointer. (page 139)
e Gauge the needle drop point to adjust the accuracy
of the camera display area and of the projection
area. (page 257)
Page 7
a Use to certify your machine when you use [My
Connection] function with Brother cutting machine
(sold separately). For details, visit the following
webpage and refer to the “My Connection”
Operation Manual.
b Display the service count which is a reminder to
take your machine in for regular servicing. (Contact
your authorized Brother dealer for details.)
c Display the total number of stitches sewn on this
machine.
d The [No.] is the internal machine number for the
machine.
e Display the program version.
f Display legal information.
g Erase all saved data, customized settings and
network information in the machine. (page 258)
d
c
b
a
e
https://s.brother/cmdae/
b
f
c
e
a
d
g
LCD Screen
Getting Ready
25
1
Embroidery Settings
Page 8
a Select the embroidery frame to be used.
(page 227)
b Change the center point marker or grid lines.
c Adjust the maximum embroidery speed setting.
d Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering.
(page 165)
e Select the height of the embroidery foot during
embroidering.
f Select the needle stop position for embroidering.
g When set to on, and the presser foot is raised,
pressing the “Start/Stop” button will automatically
lower the presser foot when starting embroidery.
Page 9
a Change the display units (mm/inch).
b Change the thread color display on the embroidery
screen. Select [Name of Color] or [#123] (thread
number).
c
Select the thread brand of the thread color display.
[Original] is set as a default and will retain the brand
thread used by the designer who created the
pattern.
The thread brand setting is reflected the next time a
pattern is imported.
(page 140)
d Change the color of the background for the
embroidery display area.
e Change the color of the background for the
thumbnail area.
f Touch to specify the size of pattern thumbnails.
g Adjust the distance between the pattern and the
basting stitching. (page 173)
a
d
e
f
b
c
g
d
e
a
b
f
c
g
LCD Screen
26
Page 10
a Select the quality for displaying the fabric in the
screen. (page 157)
b Erase the scanned image.
c When set to on, the built-in camera adjusts the
display of the background image according to the
thickness of the fabric. (page 158)
d Adjust the position and brightness of the
embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer (sold
separately).
Wireless LAN Settings
Page 11
a Enable/disable the wireless LAN function.
(page 32)
b Display the connected SSID.
c Set the machine to connect wireless LAN function.
(page 32)
d Display the machine name of wireless LAN
function.
e Change the machine name of wireless LAN
function.
f Check the wireless LAN status.
g Reset network settings.
h Displays the introduction to the applications.
Page 12
a If there is a new software version, download the
update file. (page 259)
b Display program information. (page 259)
Page 13
a Register the Artspira app. (page 225)
c
d
b
a
c
d
b
a
e
f
g
h
b
a
a
LCD Screen
Getting Ready
27
1
Selecting the [Eco Mode] or
[Shutoff Support Mode]
You can save the machine power by setting the
[Eco Mode] and the [Shutoff Support Mode].
If you leave the machine without using for a
specified period of time, the machine enters into
one of these modes. Touch to display [Eco
Mode] and [Shutoff Support Mode]. (page 23)
[Eco Mode];
Machine will enter a sleep mode. Touch the screen
or press the “Start/Stop” button to continue
operating.
[Shutoff Support Mode];
Machine will enter the lower power mode after set
period of time. Turn machine off and then back on
to restart operating.
Changing the Screen Saver Image
Instead of the default image, you can select your
own personal images for the screen saver of your
machine.
For details on compatible image files, refer to
“Specifications” on page 271.
1 Touch to display [Screen Saver] of the
settings screen.
2 Touch [Select], and then touch
[Customize].
3 Connect the USB media that contains
your personal image to the USB port of
the machine.
4 Touch [Change] to select the first image.
* Touch [Delete] to delete the selected image.
5 Touch the device that is connected.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
6 Touch a file name to select image. Touch
[Set] and then touch [OK].
Memo
• If you turn off the machine while the machine
is in the [Eco Mode] or the [Shutoff Support
Mode], wait for about 5 seconds before turning
on the machine again.
• For details on condition of the [Eco Mode] and
[Shutoff Support Mode], refer to
“Specifications” on page 271.
Memo
• Touch [Default] to select default images for the
screen saver.
LCD Screen
28
Voice Guidance
The guidance messages can be read out loud.
1 Connect the machine to your wireless
network to change voice option.
(page 32)
2 Touch to display [Voice Guidance] of
the settings screen and set the function
to on.
a Adjust the voice guidance volume.
3 Touch [Change] and then select the
language and voice of the voice
guidance.
* Touch to hear sample audio for the selected
setting.
4 Touch [Next].
A message appears, indicating that the machine is
checking for the voice guidance data. If the voice
guidance data must be downloaded, downloading
begins.
5 After a message appears, indicating that
voice guidance has been turned on,
touch [OK].
The guidance messages will now be read out loud.
a
Memo
• Touch in the message that was read out
loud in order to hear the message again. To
stop read out loud, touch .
LCD Screen
Getting Ready
29
1
Touch to open the machine help screen.
Functions are available from the screen shown
below.
a Manuals for this machine. (page 30)
b Explanation for how to use the machine. (page 29)
c Procedures for sewing utility stitches. (page 29)
d Explanation of the stitch selected. (page 29)
e Use the QR code that appears in the screen to
access instructional videos for the machine. The
specifications shown in the video may display
different details than the actual product.
f Displays the introduction to the applications. Touch
the key of the app whose information you want to
display.
Using the Operation Guide
Function
Touch [Operation Guide] to open the screen shown
below. Categories are displayed at the top of the
screen. Touch a key to see more information about
that category.
a Information about the main parts of the machine
and their functions
b Information about the operation buttons
c Information about threading the machine, changing
presser feet, etc.
d Information about attaching the embroidery unit,
preparing fabric for embroidering, etc.
e Information about troubleshooting
f Information about cleaning the machine, etc.
Using the Sewing Guide Function
Use this function when you are not sure which
stitch to use for your application, or to get advice
about sewing particular stitches.
1 Enter Utility Stitch category from the
home page.
2 Touch .
3 Touch [Sewing Guide].
4 Touch the key of the category whose
sewing instructions you wish to view.
5 Read the explanations and select the
appropriate stitch.
The screen displays directions for sewing the
selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the
stitch.
Using the Stitch Pattern
Explanation Function
If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch
pattern, select the stitch pattern and touch and
then [Pattern Explanation] to see an explanation of
the stitch selection.
Example: Displaying information about
1 Touch .
2 Touch .
3 Touch [Pattern Explanation].
Machine Help Screen
a
b
c
d
e
f
b
d
f
a
c
e
LCD Screen
30
Viewing the Operation Manual
(PDF File) on the Machine
1
Touch .
2 Touch [Manuals].
3 Select the document to be viewed.
4 Read the Operation Manual.
Swipe the screen with your finger to turn
the page.
* To change the direction that the pages are turned,
touch (7).
a Touch to display a thumbnail of each page.
b Touch to use the search function.
c Touch to display the first page/previous page/next
page/last page.
d Shows the current page/total number of pages. To
display a specific page, enter the page number in
the box.
e Touch to display the page enlarged/reduced.
f Select a page magnification ratio.
g Touch to display other settings.
h Touch to close the screen.
Instructional Videos
The instructional videos are available online and
can be viewed on any mobile device or computer.
You can also access them using the QR code that
appears in the screen. (page 29)
bg
h
a
fedc
https://s.brother/cvdae/
Wireless Network Connection Functions
Getting Ready
31
1
The following useful operations will be available if
the machine is connected to a wireless network.
For Updating
Directly download the update file to the machine.
(page 259)
Mobile Application
Windows application
Wireless Network
Connection Functions
Available Operations
Name Function Reference
My Stitch Monitor Conveniently check the operating
status of the machine from your
mobile device.
225
My Design Snap Transfer an image from the
mobile device to the machine to
create a design to embroider.
225
Artspira Transfer content published on the
app to the embroidery machine
and enjoy creating original works
using the functions on the app.
225
Name Function Reference
Design Database
Transfer
Wirelessly transfer an embroidery
pattern from your computer to the
machine. The application can be
downloaded to your computer
from the following URL.
https://s.brother/cadkb/
Settings must be specified in
Design Database Transfer. For
more information, refer to the
manual for Design Database
Transfer.
—
PE-DESIGN (Sold
separately)
Wirelessly transfer to the machine
an embroidery pattern edited with
embroidery editing software (PE-
DESIGN version 11 or later) on a
computer.
Also, transfer to PE-DESIGN an
embroidery pattern edited on the
machine.
Settings must be specified in PE-
DESIGN. For more information,
refer to the manual for PE-
DESIGN.
—
Wireless Network Connection Functions
32
The machine can be connected to your wireless
network. For the requirements for a wireless
network connection, refer to “Specifications” on
page 271.
1 Touch .
2 Set [Wireless LAN Enable] to on.
The machine will begin to emit the wireless
network signal.
3 In order to connect your machine to a
wireless network, the security
information (SSID and password) for
your home network will be required. The
password may also be called a network
key, security key or encryption key. First,
find your security information and note it.
a SSID
b Password (network key)
4 Touch beside [Wireless LAN
Connection].
A list of available SSIDs appears.
5 Select the SSID that was noted in step 3.
The screen for entering the password (network
key) appears.
Set Up the Wireless Network
Connection
a
b
Memo
• The wireless network connection cannot be
set up if you do not have the security
information.
• How to find the security information
- Check the manual provided with your home
network.
- The default SSID may be the manufacturer's
name or the model name.
- If you cannot find the security information,
contact the manufacturer of the router, your
network administrator or your Internet
provider.
- Some SSIDs and password (network key)
are case (upper case and lower case)
sensitive. Please properly record your
information.
Memo
• If the wireless access point/router is not
broadcasting the SSID, the SSID will not
automatically be detected. In this case, touch
[Add network], and then type in the necessary
information.
• If the machine had already been connected to
the home network, touch [Saved networks].
Select the saved SSID and then touch
[CONNECT].
Wireless Network Connection Functions
Getting Ready
33
1
6 Enter the password (network key) that
was noted, and then touch [CONNECT].
a Text input area
b Backspace key (Deletes the character at the
cursor's position.)
c Touch to hide the keyboard. Touch the text input
area to display the keyboard again.
d Space key
e Letter/number selection key
f Uppercase/lowercase selection key
7 After confirming that [Connected] is
displayed under the SSID, touch .
8 Touch [OK] to exit the setup.
a The name in the [Machine name] field will be used
with the apps described in “Available Operations”
on page 31.
Note
• If the password was entered incorrectly, touch
the SSID again, and then enter the correct
password. If the screen for entering the
password does not appear, touch its SSID
then touch in the appeared screen to
show the screen for entering password then
enter the correct password.
• If an incorrect SSID was selected, touch the
correct SSID. If an incorrect SSID was
manually entered, touch [Add network], and
then type in the necessary information.
Memo
• Touch the connected SSID to display its
detailed information. Touch in the upper-
right corner and display [Advanced options] to
specify the IP address and proxy settings.
e
d
b
a
c
f
Memo
• While connected, the signal strength is
indicated by the icon in the upper-left corner of
the display.
• Once a wireless network connection has been
set up, a wireless network connection will be
established each time the machine is turned
on. However, [Wireless LAN Enable] in the
Wireless LAN settings screen must remain set
to on.
a
Preparing the Needle and Thread
34
The machine needle and thread that should be used depends on the type and thickness of the fabric.
Refer to the following table when choosing the thread and needle appropriate for the fabric that you
wish to sew.
- The combinations shown in the table provide a general guideline. Be sure to sew trial stitches on
the actual number of layers and type of fabric to be used in your project.
- The machine needles are consumables. For safety and best results, we recommend replacing
the needle regularly. For details on when to replace the needle, refer to “Changing the Needle”
on page 36.
Transparent Nylon thread
Use a home sewing machine topstitching needle, regardless of the fabric or thread.
Needles and Threads When Sewing Character/Decorative Stitch Patterns
When sewing lightweight, medium weight or stretch fabrics, use a ball point needle (gold colored) 90/14.
When sewing heavyweight fabrics, use a home sewing machine needle 90/14.
In addition, #50 to #60 thread should be used.
Preparing the Needle and Thread
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
Fabric Type/Application
Thread
Size of needle
Stitch length
mm (inch)
Type Weight
Lightweight
fabrics
Lawn, georgette, challis, organdy,
crepe, chiffon, voile, gauze, tulle,
lining, etc.
Polyester
thread
60 - 90
65/9 - 75/11
Fine stitches
1.8-2.5
(approx.1/16-3/32)
Cotton thread,
Silk thread
50 - 80
Medium weight
fabrics
Broadcloth, taffeta, gabardine,
flannel, seersucker, double gauze,
linen, terry cloth, waffle weave,
sheeting, poplin, cotton twill, satin,
quilting cotton, etc.
Polyester
thread
60 - 90
75/11 - 90/14
Regular stitches
2.0-3.0
(approx.1/16-1/8)
Cotton thread,
Silk thread
50 - 60
Heavyweight
fabrics
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
etc.
Polyester
thread,
Cotton thread
30 100/16
Coarse stitches
2.5-4.0
(approx.3/32-3/16)
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
tweed, corduroy, velour, melton
wool, vinyl-coated fabric, etc.
Polyester
thread
60
90/14 - 100/16
Cotton thread,
Silk thread
30 - 50
Stretch fabrics
(knit fabrics, etc.)
Jersey, tricot, T-shirt fabric, fleece,
interlock, etc.
Polyester thread,
Cotton thread,
Silk thread
50
Ball point needle
75/11 - 90/14
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
For top-stitching
Polyester thread,
Cotton thread
30 90/14 - 100/16
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
50 - 60 75/11 - 90/14
Memo
• Needles that can be used with this machine: Home sewing machine needles (size 65/9 - 100/16)
- The larger the number, the larger the needle. As the numbers decrease, the needles get finer.
• Thread that can be used with this machine: 30 - 90 weight
- Never use thread of 20 weight or lower. It may cause machine to malfunction.
- The smaller the number, the heavier the thread. As the numbers increase, the thread gets finer.
• In principle, use a fine needle and thread with lightweight fabrics, and a larger needle and heavier thread
with heavyweight fabrics.
• Select a stitch appropriate for the fabric, and then adjust the stitch length. When sewing lightweight
fabrics, make the stitch length finer (shorter). When sewing heavyweight fabrics, make the stitch length
coarser (longer). (page 61)
When sewing stretch fabrics, refer to “Sewing Stretch Fabrics” on page 79.
Preparing the Needle and Thread
Getting Ready
35
1
Embroidery Needles
Use a 75/11 home sewing machine needle for
embroidery. When embroidering patterns with
short stitches, such as small letters, we
recommend using a ball point needle for
embroidery.
Check the spool to be used, and prepare the
necessary parts.
Spool Cap
Three spool cap sizes are available, allowing you
to choose a spool cap that best fits the size of
spool being used.
When using the spool as shown in the illustration,
use the thread spool insert (mini king thread
spool). Make sure that the thread spool insert is
firmly inserted. After installing it, pull out some
thread, and check that the thread unwinds without
getting caught.
a Thread spool insert (mini king thread spool)
b Hole diameter 8.0 mm to 10.5 mm (approx. 5/16
inch to 13/32 inch)
c Spool (cross-wound thread)
Spool Net
When using thread that winds off quickly, such as
transparent nylon thread or metallic thread, place
the spool net over the spool before placing the
spool of thread onto the spool pin.
If the spool net is too long, fold it to fit the size of
the spool.
a Spool net
b Thread spool
c Spool pin
d Spool cap
* When threading the spool with the spool net on,
make sure that 5-6cm (approx. 2 - 2-1/2 inches) of
thread is pulled out.
* It may be necessary to adjust the thread tension
when using the spool net.
CAUTION
• The appropriate fabric, thread and needle combinations
are shown in the preceding table. If the combination of
the fabric, thread and needle is not correct, particularly
when sewing heavy fabrics (such as denim) with thin
needles (such as 65/9 to 75/11), the needle may break
and cause injury. In addition, the stitching may be
uneven or puckered or there may be skipped stitches.
How to Use the Spool Cap and
Spool Net
Changing the Needle
36
1 Press (Needle position button) to
raise the needle.
2 Touch to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
[OK] to continue.
3 Remove the presser foot. (page 48)
4 Use the screwdriver to turn the needle
clamp screw toward the front of the
machine and loosen the screw. Remove
the needle.
5 With the flat side of the needle facing the
back, insert the new needle until it
touches the needle stopper. Use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the
needle clamp screw.
a Needle stopper
6 Attach the presser foot. (page 48)
7 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
Changing the Needle
CAUTION
• When replacing the needle, be sure to touch on the
screen to lock all keys and buttons, otherwise injuries
may occur if the “Start/Stop” button or any other button is
pressed and the machine starts.
• Use only home sewing machine needles made for home
use. Other needles may break and may cause injury.
• Never sew with a bent needle. This may cause injury.
Note
• To check the needle correctly, place the flat
side of the needle on a flat surface. Check the
needle from the top and the sides. Throw
away any bent needles.
a Parallel space
b Level surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
• The machine needles are consumables.
Replace the needle in cases such as those
described below.
- If an unusual sound is produced when the
needle enters the fabric. (The tip of the
needle may be broken or dull.)
- If stitches are skipped. (The needle may be
bent.)
- Generally, after completing one project,
such as a piece of clothing.
Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole in
the needle plate with fabric or paper to prevent
the needle from falling into the machine.
CAUTION
• Be sure to insert the needle until it touches the needle
stopper and securely tighten the needle clamp screw
with the screwdriver, otherwise the needle may break
and cause injury.
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
Getting Ready
37
1
Using the Supplemental Spool
Pin
While the main spool pin is being used for sewing,
you can wind a bobbin by using the supplemental
spool pin.
a Supplemental spool pin
1 Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
2 Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and
set the bobbin on the shaft.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
3 Place the spool of thread for the bobbin
and the spool cap onto the supplemental
spool pin.
a The thread unwinds to the front from the bottom.
b Spool cap
4 With your right hand, hold the thread
near the thread spool. With your left
hand, hold the end of the thread, and use
both hands to pass the thread through
the thread guide.
a Thread guide
5 Pass the thread around the pretension
disk making sure that the thread is under
the pretension disk.
a Pretension disk
b Check to make sure thread is securely set between
pretension disks.
Winding/Installing the
Bobbin
Winding the Bobbin
IMPORTANT
• Use the plastic bobbins that came with this machine or
bobbins of the same type: 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
plastic Class 15 (A style) bobbins, which are available
from your Brother dealer.
IMPORTANT
• If the spool or the spool cap is not installed correctly, the
thread may become tangled around the spool pin and
the machine may be damaged.
• Choose a spool cap that best fits the size of spool being
used. For more information regarding the choice of
spool caps for your thread choice, refer to “How to Use
the Spool Cap and Spool Net” on page 35.
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
38
6 Wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin 5 or 6 times, pass the thread
through the guide slit in the bobbin
winder seat, and then pull the thread to
cut it.
a Guide slit in bobbin winder seat
(with built-in cutter)
7 Set the bobbin winding switch to the left,
until it clicks into place.
a Bobbin winding switch
8 Touch [Start].
* If the bobbin thread is wound incorrectly, touch
[Stop]. Cut the thread, slide the bobbin winding
switch to the right, and then remove the bobbin.
a Touch to decrease the winding speed.
b Touch to increase the winding speed.
Bobbin winding starts. [Start] changes to [Stop]
while the bobbin is winding. The bobbin stops
rotating when bobbin winding is completed. The
bobbin winding switch will automatically return to
its original position.
9 After bobbin winding is finished, cut the
thread and remove the bobbin.
Note
• Be sure to wind the thread clockwise around
the bobbin, otherwise the thread may become
wrapped around the bobbin winder shaft.
CAUTION
• Be sure to cut the thread as described. If the bobbin is
wound without cutting the thread using the cutter built
into the guide slit in the bobbin winder seat, the thread
may become tangled in the bobbin or the needle may
break and cause injury when the bobbin thread starts to
run out.
Memo
• Use the bobbin winding slider to adjust the
amount of thread wound onto the bobbin to
one of five levels.
a Bobbin winding slider
b More
c Less
Memo
• Touch [OK] to minimize the bobbin winding
window. Touch (in top right of the LCD
screen) to display the bobbin winding window
again.
• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff
thread, such as nylon thread for quilting, may
be different from the one produced when
winding normal thread; however, this is not a
sign of a malfunction.
IMPORTANT
• For stretchable thread such as transparent nylon thread,
start winding the bobbin at low speed, then stop when it
is about half full. Otherwise, the bobbin may not be
wound neatly or may be damaged.
IMPORTANT
• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on the bobbin
winder seat. Doing so could loosen or remove the
bobbin winder seat, and could result in damage to the
machine.
a b
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
Getting Ready
39
1
Using the Spool Pin
You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin
before sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to
wind the bobbin while sewing.
1 Turn the main power to ON and open the
top cover.
2 Align the groove in the bobbin with the
spring on the bobbin winder shaft, and
set the bobbin on the shaft.
a Groove in the bobbin
b Spring on the shaft
3 Pivot the spool pin so that it angles
upward. Set the thread spool on the
spool pin so that the thread unwinds
from the front of the spool.
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
d Spool felt
4 Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as
far as possible, then return the spool pin
to its original position.
5 While holding the thread with both
hands, pull the thread up from under the
thread guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
6 Pass the thread through the thread guide.
a Thread guide
7 Pass the thread around the pretension
disk making sure that the thread is under
the pretension disk.
a Pretension disk
b Check to make sure thread is securely set between
pretension disks.
8 Follow steps 6 through 9 of “Using the
Supplemental Spool Pin” on page 37.
Using the Spool Stand (Winding
the Bobbin)
Pass the thread from the spool through the thread
guide on the telescopic thread guide, and then
wind the bobbin according to steps
4 through 9 of
“Using the Supplemental Spool Pin” on page 37.
For details on spool stand, refer to “Using the
Spool Stand” on page 45.
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
40
1 Touch to lock all keys and buttons
and raise the presser foot.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
[OK] to continue.
2 Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right.
a Bobbin cover
b Latch
3 Remove the bobbin cover.
4 Hold the bobbin with your right hand and
hold the end of the thread with your left
hand.
5 Set the bobbin in the bobbin case so that
the thread unwinds to the left.
6 Lightly hold down the bobbin with your
right hand, and then guide the end of the
thread around the tab of the needle plate
with your left hand.
a Tab
7 While lightly holding down the bobbin
with your right hand, guide the thread
through the slit in the needle plate and
lightly pull it with your left hand.
a Slit
8 While lightly holding down the bobbin
with your right hand, continue guiding
the thread through the slit with your left
hand. Then, cut the thread with the
cutter.
a Cutter
Setting the Bobbin
CAUTION
• Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly wound.
Otherwise, the thread tension may be incorrect and the
needle may break, causing injuries.
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be sure to
touch in the LCD to lock all keys and buttons,
otherwise injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button or
any other button is pressed and the machine starts
sewing.
a
b
Note
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread correctly.
Otherwise, the thread may break or the thread
tension will be incorrect.
Memo
• By pulling the thread as shown in step 7, the
thread will enter the tension spring of the
bobbin case to apply the appropriate tension
to the bobbin thread during sewing.
a
a
a
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
Getting Ready
41
1
9 Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of
the bobbin cover (1), and then lightly
press down on the right side to close the
cover (2).
10 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
There may be some sewing applications where
you want to pull up the bobbin thread; for
example, when making gathers, darts, or doing
free motion quilting (including stitch regulator
sewing) or embroidery.
1 Follow steps 1 through 4 of “Setting the
Bobbin” on page 40 for installing the
bobbin into the bobbin case.
2 Guide the bobbin thread through the
groove, following the arrow in the
illustration.
* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
* Do not replace the bobbin cover.
3 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
4 While holding the upper thread, press
(Needle position button) to lower the
needle.
5 Press (Needle position button) to
raise the needle.
Memo
• You can begin sewing without pulling up the
bobbin thread. If you wish to pull up the bobbin
thread before starting to sew, pull up the
thread according to the procedure of “Pulling
Up the Bobbin Thread” on page 41.
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread
Memo
• You can pull up the bobbin thread after
threading the upper thread (“Upper Threading”
on page 42).
Upper Threading
42
6 Gently pull the upper thread. A loop of
the bobbin thread will come out of the
hole in the needle plate.
7 Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under
the presser foot and pull it about 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches) toward the back of the
machine, making it even with the upper
thread.
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
8 Replace the bobbin cover.
1 Turn the main power to ON.
a
b
Upper Threading
Upper Threading
CAUTION
• Be sure to thread the machine properly. Improper
threading can cause the thread to tangle and break the
needle, leading to injury.
IMPORTANT
• Never use a thread weight of 20 or lower. It may cause
the machine to malfunction. Use the needle and the
thread in the correct combination. For details, refer to
“Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on page 34.
• When using 65/9 needle, manually thread the needle. If
the automatic needle threading function is used, the unit
may be damaged.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be used
with home sewing machine needle sizes 75/11
through 100/16.
• When threads such as transparent nylon
monofilament or specialty threads are used, it
is not recommended to use the needle
threader.
• The automatic threading function cannot be
used with the twin needle.
Upper Threading
Getting Ready
43
1
2 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
raise the presser foot.
The upper thread shutter opens so the machine
can be threaded.
a Upper thread shutter
3 Press (Needle position button) to
raise the needle.
4 Pivot the spool pin so that it angles
upward. Set the thread spool on the
spool pin so that the thread unwinds
from the front of the spool.
a Spool pin
b Spool cap
c Thread spool
d Spool felt
5 Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as
far as possible, then return the spool pin
to its original position.
6 While holding the thread with both
hands, pull the thread up from under the
thread guide plate.
a Thread guide plate
7 While holding the thread in your right
hand, pass the thread through the thread
guide in the direction indicated.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to raise the needle before using the automatic
needle threader. Otherwise, the needle may not thread
correctly and the needle threader may be damaged.
CAUTION
• If the spool or the spool cap is not installed correctly, the
thread may become tangled around the spool pin,
possibly causing the needle to break, resulting in
injuries.
• Choose a spool cap that best fits the size of spool being
used. For more information regarding the choice of
spool caps for your thread choice, refer to “How to Use
the Spool Cap and Spool Net” on page 35.
Upper Threading
44
8 Guide the thread down, up, then down
through the groove, as shown in the
illustration.
9 Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide (marked “6”) by holding the
thread with both hands and guiding it as
shown in the illustration.
a Needle bar thread guide
b Tab
10 Pass the thread through the thread guide
disks (marked “7”). Make sure that the
thread passes through the groove in the
thread guide.
a Groove in thread guide
11 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
lower presser foot.
12 Pull the thread up through the thread
cutter to cut the thread, as shown in the
illustration.
a Thread cutter
13 Press (Automatic threading button)
to have the machine automatically thread
the needle.
14 Carefully pull the end of the thread that
was passed through the eye of the
needle.
* If a loop was formed when the thread passed
through the eye of the needle, carefully pull the
loop of thread through the eye to the back of the
needle.
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if the
thread catches on the thread take-up lever
visible inside the upper groove area.
Note
• When using thread that quickly winds off the
spool, such as metallic thread, it may be
difficult to thread the needle if the thread is cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread cutter,
pull out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of
thread after passing it through the thread
guide disks (marked “7”).
a 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) or more
Upper Threading
Getting Ready
45
1
15 Raise the presser foot and pull out about
10 cm (approx. 4 inches) of the thread,
and then pass it under the presser foot
toward the rear of the machine.
a About 10 cm (approx. 4 inches)
The included spool stand is useful when using
thread spools with a large diameter (cross-wound
thread).
a Spool stand
b Spool cap (XL) × 2
c Spool holder × 2
d Spool cap base × 2
e Spool felt × 2
f Ring × 4
* No.2 to No.6 are included in a plastic bag.
Assembling the Spool Stand
1
Hold in the tabs on the spool stand and
remove the lid.
2 Fully extend the telescopic thread guide
shaft until the two internal stoppers snap
into place.
Raise the spool pins.
a Telescopic thread guide shaft
b Spool pins
Memo
• If the needle could not be threaded or the
thread was not passed through the needle bar
thread guides, perform the procedure again
starting from step
3.
Note
• When using a needle or thread that cannot be
used with a needle threader, manually pass
the thread through the eye of the needle from
the front.
a
Using the Spool Stand
Upper Threading
46
3 Turn the thread guide counterclockwise.
4 Open the upper cover of the machine,
and then place the spool stand on the
upper cover as shown in the illustration.
About the Thread Spool and
Spool Cap
IMPORTANT
• Do not place any object weighing 1 kg (2.2 lb) or more
on the top cover. Otherwise the cover may be damaged.
The weight of the spool stand with its lid removed is
about 280 g (0.6 lb).
• Do not close the upper cover while the spool stand is
installed.
• Do not push or pull the telescopic thread guide or spool
pins with extreme force, otherwise damage may result.
• Do not place any object other than spools of thread on
the spool support.
• Do not try to wind thread on the bobbin while sewing
using the spool stand.
Note
• Make sure that the spool stand is firmly
secured. Otherwise, the spool stand may fall
during sewing.
Be sure to use a spool cap (1) that is slightly
larger than the spool.
If the spool cap that is used is smaller or
much larger than the spool, the thread may
catch and sewing performance may suffer.
When using thread on a thin spool, place the
included spool felt (1) on the spool pin, place
the thread spool on the spool pin so that the
center of the spool is aligned with the hole at
the center of the spool felt, and then insert the
spool cap onto the spool pin.
When using a cone spool that is taller than
the spool pin, use the spool holder (1). When
using cone shaped thread spool with other
than cotton thread, it is not necessary to use
spool caps.
When using fluffy thread such as cotton
thread, place a spool cap (1) on the spool
cap base (2), as shown in the illustration.
Depending on the size of spool or the amount
of thread remaining, choose the appropriate
sized spool cap. Spool cap (small) cannot be
used with the spool cap base.
a
Upper Threading
Getting Ready
47
1
Thread the Machine Using the
Spool Stand
1
Attach the spool stand to the machine.
(page 45)
2 Place the spool of thread on the spool pin
so that the thread feeds off the spool
clockwise. Firmly insert the spool cap
onto the spool pin.
3 Pull the thread off the spool. Pass the
thread from the back to the front through
the thread guides at the top.
4 Pass the thread through the machine’s
thread guide from the right to the left.
a Thread guide
5 Thread the machine according to steps 6
through
15 of “Upper Threading” on
page 42.
CAUTION
• Make sure that the spools do not touch each other,
otherwise the thread will not feed off smoothly, the
needle may break and cause injury. In addition, make
sure that the spools do not touch the telescopic thread
guide at the center.
Note
• When using 2 spools of thread, make sure that
both spools are feeding in the same direction.
• Make sure that the thread is not caught under
the spool.
Note
• Guide the thread so that it does not become
entangled with the other thread.
• After feeding the thread as instructed, wind
any excess thread back onto the spool,
otherwise the excess thread will become
tangled.
• When using thread that quickly feeds off the
spool, such as metallic thread, use the
enclosed ring to prevent the thread from
becoming entangled. Threading sequence:
Pull the thread from the spool, place the
thread through the ring from the bottom up
(1), into the thread guide (2) and through the
ring from the top down (3). When using the
ring, do not use the spool cap base.
Changing the Presser Foot
48
1 Press (Needle position button) to
raise the needle.
2 Touch to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
[OK] to continue.
3 Raise the presser foot lever manually.
4 Press the black button on the presser
foot holder and remove the presser foot.
a Black button
b Presser foot holder
5 Place the new presser foot under the
holder, aligning the foot pin with the
notch in the holder. Lower the presser
foot lever manually so that the presser
foot pin snaps into the notch in the
holder.
a Notch
b Pin
6 Raise the presser foot lever to check that
the presser foot is securely attached.
7 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
Some presser feet require using the included
adapter and screw (small), for example, the free
motion echo quilting foot “E” and so on.
1 Remove the presser foot. (page 48)
2 Loosen the presser foot holder screw to
remove the presser foot holder.
a Multi-purpose screwdriver
b Presser foot holder screw
c Presser foot holder
3 Remove the presser foot holder screw
completely from the presser foot shaft.
Changing the Presser Foot
CAUTION
• When replacing the presser foot, be sure to touch
on the screen to lock all keys and buttons, otherwise
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button or any other
button is pressed and the machine starts.
• Always use the correct presser foot for the selected
stitch pattern. If the wrong presser foot is used, the
needle may strike the presser foot and break, and may
cause injury.
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in the correct
direction, otherwise the needle may strike the presser
foot, breaking the needle and causing injuries.
IMPORTANT
• Use presser feet made for this machine.
Replacing the Presser Foot
b
a
Attaching the Presser Foot with
the Included Adapter
Changing the Presser Foot
Getting Ready
49
1
4 Set the adapter on the presser foot bar,
aligning the flat side of the adapter
opening with the flat side of the presser
foot bar. Align the screw holes in the
adapter and presser foot bar, and then
securely tighten the presser foot holder
screw with the screwdriver.
a Presser foot holder screw
5 Turn the included screw (small) 2 or 3
times with your hand.
a Screw (small)
6 Attach the presser foot, referring to the
manual for the presser foot. Tighten the
screw (small) with the included
screwdriver (large).
The compact dual feed foot enables you to have
best fabric control when sewing difficult fabrics
that slip easily, such as quilted fabrics or fabrics
that tend to stick to the bottom of a presser foot,
such as vinyl, leather or synthetic leather.
Attaching the Compact Dual Feed
Foot
1
Touch . Remove the presser foot.
(page 48)
2 Loosen the screw of the presser foot
holder to remove the presser foot holder.
a Multi-purpose screwdriver
b Presser foot holder screw
c Presser foot holder
3 Position the compact dual feed foot to
the presser foot bar by aligning the notch
of the compact dual feed foot to the
screw.
Memo
• When attaching the free motion echo quilting
foot “E”, refer to “Echo Quilting” on page 113,
then go to step
4.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver (large) to tighten the screw
securely. If the screw is loose, the needle may strike the
presser foot and cause injury.
Using the Compact Dual Feed
Foot
Note
• When sewing with the compact dual feed foot,
sew at medium to low speeds.
Memo
• When the compact dual feed foot is connected
to the machine, only stitch patterns that allow
sewing with the compact dual feed foot can be
selected.
• When sewing fabric that easily sticks together,
a more attractive finish can be achieved by
basting the beginning of sewing.
Changing the Presser Foot
50
4 Hold the compact dual feed foot in place
with your right hand, then using the
included multi-purpose screwdriver,
securely tighten the screw.
5 Plug the connector of the compact dual
feed foot into the jack on the back of your
machine.
6 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
7 Place the fabric under the compact dual
feed foot with the needle at the starting
point of the stitching.
8 Be sure that the feed position lever is
pushed down and the compact dual feed
foot is ready to sew.
a Feed position lever
Attaching/Detaching Foot
Attach the foot by aligning the pins with the
notches and snap it into place.
a Pins
b Notches
To detach, push down on the front and back part of
the foot, the foot will snap off.
Adjusting the Amount of Fabric
Feeding by the Compact Dual
Feed Foot
The dual feed mechanism pulls the top fabric
according to the set stitch length. With troublesome
fabrics, fine tune the set length.
1 Touch to display [Dual Feed Feed
Adjustment] of the settings screen.
2 Touch the number to select the feeding
of the top fabric.
* Select [00] for sewing in most cases.
* Touch a higher number to increase the feed
amount for the top fabric.
Touch a lower number to decrease the feed
amount for the top fabric.
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten the screw.
If the screw is loose, the needle may strike the presser
foot and possibly cause injury.
a
Note
• Do not operate the lever while sewing.
Memo
• When the feed position lever is up, dual feed
function is not effective. When the feed
position lever is down, the black roller belt on
the compact dual feed foot is engaged.
Sewing
Sewing Basics
51
2
Utility Stitches
Swipe the key of a category sideways to display
hidden categories.
Character/Decorative Stitches
Swipe the key of a category sideways to display
hidden categories.
Chapter 2
Sewing Basics
Sewing
Stitch Types
Display Category Name
Straight/Overcasting
Decorative Stitches
Heirloom Stitches
Buttonholes/Bar tacks
Multi-directional Sewing
Quilting Stitches
Other Stitches
Stitch Tapering
Display Category Name
Wide and Various
Wide Botanical
Wide Motifs and Messages
Narrow and Various
Narrow Botanical
Candlewicking
Large Satin
Satin
Cross Stitches
Combinable Utility
Disney
* Disney stitch patterns contained in this
product are for personal non-commercial
use only. No license is granted for any
commercial use of these patterns and any
such use is strictly prohibited.
Alphabet Characters (Gothic Font)
Alphabet Characters (Handwriting Font)
Alphabet Characters (Outline Font)
Cyrillic font
Pocket (Machine's and external memory)
(page 64)
Basic Sewing
CAUTION
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the needle while
the machine is in operation. Keep your hands away from
moving parts while the machine is in operation.
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during sewing. Doing so
may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so may lead
to injury.
• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or other objects
during sewing. Otherwise, the needle may break and
cause injury.
IMPORTANT
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the stitch length
setting before continuing sewing. Otherwise, the needle
may bend or break.
Note
• First, perform a trial sewing, using a piece of
fabric and thread that are the same as those
used for your project.
Display Category Name
Sewing
52
1 Touch [Sewing] in the home page screen
to display the utility stitches. If the needle
is lowered, press (Needle position
button) to raise the needle.
2 Select the category, and then touch the
key of the stitch you want to sew.
* Swipe the key of a category sideways to display
hidden categories.
a Category
b Key of the stitch
The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD
screen.
3 Check which presser foot is indicated in
the upper-left corner of the screen, and
then attach it. (page 48)
4 Set the fabric under the presser foot.
Hold the fabric and thread in your left
hand, and press (Needle position
button) to set the needle in the sewing
start position.
5 Lower the presser foot.
* You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
6 Adjust the sewing speed with the speed
control slide.
a Slow
b Fast
7 Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
* Guide the fabric lightly by hand.
8 Press the “Start/Stop” button again to
stop sewing.
9 Press (Thread cutter button) to trim
the upper and bobbin threads.
b
a
Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the “Start/
Stop” button.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press (Thread cutter button) after the
threads have been cut. Doing so could tangle the thread
or damage the machine.
• Do not press (Thread cutter button) when there is
no fabric set in the machine or during machine
operation. The thread may tangle, possibly resulting in
damage.
Sewing
Sewing Basics
53
2
10 When the needle has stopped moving,
raise the presser foot and remove the
fabric.
With the advanced multi-function foot controller,
various sewing machine operations in addition to
starting/stopping sewing, such as thread cutting
and reverse stitching, can be specified to be
performed.
a Main foot controller
b Side pedal
c Mounting plate
d Mounting screw × 2
1 Align the smaller end of the mounting
plate with the guide on the bottom of the
side pedal, and then gently fasten them
together with the mounting screw.
Align the larger end of the mounting plate
with the guide on the bottom of the main
foot controller, and then gently fasten
them together with the mounting screw.
a Guide on side pedal
b Mounting plate
c Guide on main foot controller
2 Adjust the spacing between the main foot
controller and side pedal.
* Use the markings on the mounting plate as a
convenient guide to adjust the spacing.
3 Firmly tighten the mounting screws to
secure the main foot controller and side
pedal.
Note
• When cutting thread such as nylon
monofilament thread, or other decorative
threads, use scissors.
Using Advanced Multi-Function
Foot Controller
Note
• (For U.S.A. only) Foot controller: Model X
This foot controller can be used on the
machine with product code 882-W40/W42.
The product code is mentioned on the
machine rating plate.
Memo
• The side pedal can be mounted on either the
left or right side of the main foot controller.
• The main foot controller and side pedal can
also be used without installing the mounting
plate.
Memo
• To readjust the spacing between the main foot
controller and side pedal, slightly loosen the
mounting screws, and then adjust the
positions of the main foot controller and side
pedal.
ac
b
Sewing
54
4 Insert the plug for the side pedal into the
jack on the main foot controller.
5 Insert the plug for the main foot
controller into the foot controller jack on
the right side of the machine.
a Main foot controller
b Foot controller jack
6 Turn on the machine. And then touch
and display [Multi function Foot
Controller] of the settings screen.
7 Select the functions to be performed by
the multi-function foot controller.
8 Touch [OK].
9 Sew trial stitches and confirm that the
settings are as desired.
Pressing down on the main foot controller increases
the sewing speed; releasing the pressure on the main
foot controller decreases the sewing speed.
Release the main foot controller or side pedal to stop
sewing.
Memo
• The length of the cord for the main foot
controller can be adjusted. (page 55)
Controller Functions that can be specified
Main foot controller Start/Stop
Heel switch Select any of the following:
• [Thread Cutting]
• [Needle Position – Up/Down]
• [Single Stitch]
• [Reverse Stitch]
(Reinforcement stitching may be
applied depending on the selected
stitch pattern. (page 56))
• [Reinforcement Stitch]
• [Presser Foot Up/Down]
• [No Setting]
Side pedal
a
b
c
c
b
Memo
• If you set [Reverse Stitch] on the side pedal,
you can create a darning stitch effect using
zigzag stitches. With both feet, keep pressing
the main foot controller, and repeat pressing
and releasing the side pedal to sew forward
and reverse in turn. Machine will reverse at the
speed you press the main foot controller.
Memo
• The speed that is set using the sewing speed
controller will be the main foot controller’s
maximum sewing speed.
• When the multi-function foot controller is
connected, the “Start/Stop” button cannot be
used to start sewing.
Sewing
Sewing Basics
55
2
Adjusting the Length of the Cord
for the Main Foot Controller
1
Unwind the cord for the main foot
controller.
2 Guide the cord between the tabs and
then wind the cord until it is the desired
length.
* The cord can be wound either clockwise or
counterclockwise.
3 Pass the cord between the tabs.
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally
necessary at the beginning and end of sewing.
You can use (Reverse stitch button) to sew
reverse/reinforcement stitches. When you keep
pressing (Reinforcement stitch button), the
machine will sew reinforcement stitch at that
point 3 to 5 stitches, and then stop. (page 14)
a Reverse stitch
b Reinforcement stitch
c (Reverse stitch button)
d (Reinforcement stitch button)
The operation performed when the button is
pressed differs depending on the selected stitch
pattern. (Refer to the table of “The Operation
Performed When the “Reverse Stitch” or
“Reinforcement Stitch” is Pressed” on page 57.)
Note
• In order to avoid stepping on the cord with the
main foot controller, pass the cord between
the tabs.
Memo
• When storing the cord, pass it between the
tabs, and then insert the plug into the jack on
the main foot controller.
Sewing Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitches
Memo
• When you press (Reinforcement stitch
button) while sewing character/decorative
stitch pattern, you can end sewing with a full
stitch instead of at a mid-point. The green light
on the right of (Reinforcement stitch
button) lights up while the machine is sewing a
full motif, and it automatically turns off when
the sewing is stopped.
Sewing
56
After selecting a stitch motif, turn on the
automatic reinforcement stitching function before
sewing, and the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch selected) at the
beginning and end of sewing.
1 Select a stitch pattern.
2 Touch to set the automatic
reinforcement stitching function.
The key will display as .
3 Set the needle into the fabric, and then
press the “Start/Stop” button.
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will automatically sew reverse
stitches (or reinforcement stitches) and then
continue sewing.
4 When the end of stitching has been
reached, press (Reverse stitch
button) or (Reinforcement stitch
button).
a Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement
Stitching
Memo
• Pressing the “Start/Stop” button while the
machine is sewing pauses or restarts sewing.
Memo
• To turn off the automatic reinforcement
stitching function, touch .
Sewing
Sewing Basics
57
2
The Operation Performed When
the “Reverse Stitch” or
“Reinforcement Stitch” is
Pressed
The operation performed when the button is
pressed differs depending on the selected stitch
pattern.
* If [Reinforcement Priority] of the settings screen is set to on
(page 22), reinforcement stitches are sewn instead of reverse
stitches.
(Reverse stitch
button)
(Reinforcement
stitch button)
Automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching function is not
active.
Machine sews
reverse stitches
while holding .
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding .
Stitch patterns with
a dot mark at the top
Machine sews
reverse stitches
while holding
.*
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding .
Other than straight/
zigzag stitch
patterns
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding .
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding .
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding .
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding .
At the end of
sewing, when
is pressed, the LED
beside the button
lights up, machine
completes the stitch
pattern, stops
sewing, then sews
reinforcement
stitches.
Automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching function is active.
+
At the beginning of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
when is
pressed.
At the beginning of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
when is
pressed.
+
Stitch patterns with
a dot mark at the top
At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
when is
pressed.*
At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
when is
pressed.
+
Other than straight/
zigzag stitch
patterns
At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
when is
pressed.
At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
when is
pressed.
+
At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
when is
pressed.
At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.
At the end of
sewing, when the
is pressed,
the LED beside the
button lights up,
machine completes
the stitch pattern,
stops sewing, then
sews reinforcement
stitches.
(Reverse stitch
button)
(Reinforcement
stitch button)
Sewing
58
The machine can be set to automatically cut the
threads at the end of the stitching. If automatic
thread cutting is set, automatic reverse/
reinforcement stitching is also set.
1 Select a stitch pattern.
2 Touch to set the automatic thread
cutting function.
The keys will display as , and the machine
is set for automatic thread cutting function and
automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching.
3 Set the needle in the start position, and
press the “Start/Stop” button.
The machine will automatically sew reverse
stitches (or reinforcement stitches) and then
continue sewing.
4 Once you have reached the end of the
stitching, press (Reverse stitch
button) or (Reinforcement stitch
button) once.
If stitching, such as buttonholes and bar tacking, that
includes reinforcement stitching has been selected,
this operation is unnecessary.
After the reverse stitching (or reinforcement
stitching) has been done, the machine stops, and
the threads are cut.
a The point where the “Start/Stop” button was
pressed.
b The point where (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button) was pressed.
c The thread is cut here.
By setting the machine to automatically raise and
lower the presser foot, sewing operations can be
performed more smoothly. Touch to display
[Automatic Presser Foot Lift] of the settings
screen.
a When set to on, pressing the “Start/Stop” button or
depressing the foot controller automatically lowers
the presser foot (if it is raised) before starting to
sew.
b When set to on, pressing (Thread cutter
button) automatically lowers the presser foot (if it is
raised) before cutting the thread. The presser foot
will be raised after the thread is cut.
Automatic Thread Cutting
Memo
• To turn off the automatic thread cutting
function, touch again.
Automatic Presser Foot Lift
Function
32
1
a
b
Sewing
Sewing Basics
59
2
When the needle position is set to , auto up
key appears instead of pivot key. When the auto
up key is set to , the presser foot and needle
are raised automatically if the machine is
stopped.
Even if you stopped stitching while sewing, you
can return to the beginning of the stitch pattern.
This function is useful after trial sewing or when
the stitching is sewn incorrectly.
Touch then before start sewing to return
to the beginning of the stitch.
a Stop stitching
b Re-start stitching ( was touched.)
c Re-start stitching ( was not touched.)
Combining Various Stitch
Patterns
Example:
1 Select and then touch so that it
displays .
2 Select a font.
3 Touch the tab to select a character type.
4 Enter characters.
* To enter a space, touch .
Automatic Presser Foot Raising
Function
Returning to the Beginning of the
Stitch Pattern
Editing Character/Decorative
Stitches
Sewing
60
5 Touch , then touch so that it
displays to sew the stitch pattern
continuously.
a Touch to delete the last stitch pattern
entered. To delete other stitch pattern, touch
or to select the desired stitch pattern before
touching .
b Touch this key to view an image of the entire
combined stitch pattern.
Inserting Stitch Patterns
1
Touch or to select the stitch
pattern in front of the stitch pattern which
new stitch patterns will be added.
a Selected pattern
2 Select a new stitch pattern.
The new stitch pattern is added immediately after
the stitch pattern selected in step 1.
Changing the Size
Select a stitch pattern, then touch or
to change the stitch width and stitch pattern length.
a When the select all on/off key appears as , the
size of all stitch patterns can be changed.
b When the maintain aspect ratio key appears as
, the stitch pattern size can be changed while
maintaining the aspect ratio.
Memo
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess
thread between characters.
b
a
a
a
b
Stitch Settings
Sewing Basics
61
2
When you select a stitch, your machine
automatically selects the appropriate stitch
settings. However, if needed, you can change
any of the individual settings.
Setting the Stitch Width
Touch or to make the stitch wider or
narrower.
Setting the Stitch Length
Touch or to make the stitch
coarser (longer) or finer (shorter).
Setting the [L/R Shift]
Touch or to change the placement of
the stitch pattern by moving it left and right.
Stitch Settings
Setting the Stitch Width/Stitch
Length/“L/R Shift”
Note
• After adjusting the stitch width or the “L/R
Shift”, slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the needle
does not touch the presser foot.
Memo
• Touch [Reset] to return the setting to its
default.
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed.
• If you turn off the machine or select another
stitch without saving stitch setting changes
(page 63), the stitch settings will return to their
default settings.
IMPORTANT
• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen the stitch
and continue sewing. Do not continue sewing without
lengthening the stitch. Otherwise, the needle may bend
or break.
Stitch Settings
62
You may need to change the thread tension,
depending on the fabric and thread being used.
Proper Thread Tension
The upper thread and the bobbin thread should
cross near the center of the fabric. Only the upper
thread should be visible from the right side of the
fabric, and only the bobbin thread should be visible
from the wrong side of the fabric.
Upper Thread is Too Tight
If the bobbin thread is visible from the right side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
Touch to loosen the upper thread.
Upper Thread is Too Loose
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of
the fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
Touch to tighten the upper thread.
Setting the Thread Tension
a Wrong side
b Right side
c Upper thread
d Bobbin thread
Memo
• Many decorative stitches and satin stitches
are designed so that the upper thread wraps to
the back slightly for a more attractive finish.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded,
the upper thread may be too tight. Rethread
the bobbin thread. (page 40)
a Bobbin thread
b Upper thread
c Right side
d Locks appear on right
side of fabric
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded,
the upper thread may be too loose. Rethread
the upper thread. (page 42)
a Upper thread
b Bobbin thread
c Wrong side
d Locks appear on
wrong side of fabric
Stitch Settings
Sewing Basics
63
2
Mirror image, twin needle, stitch width, stitch
length, L/R Shift and thread tension settings can
be saved for each stitch pattern.
Saving Settings
1
Select a stitch.
2 Specify your preferred settings.
3 Touch [Memory].
The settings are saved and the original screen
automatically appears.
Retrieving Saved Settings
1
Select a stitch.
2 Touch [Retrieve].
3 Touch the numbered key of the settings
to be retrieved and then touch [Retrieve].
* Touch [Close] to return to the original screen
without retrieving settings.
a Numbered keys
The selected settings are retrieved, and the
original screen automatically appears.
Saving the Utility Stitch Settings
Memo
• Touch [Reset] and then [Memory] to return the
selected stitch pattern saved settings to the
default settings.
• If you touch [Memory] when there are already
5 sets of settings saved for a stitch, a message
appears. Touch [OK] to close the message,
and then touch [Retrieve] to delete a setting
referring to “Retrieving Saved Settings” on
page 63. Touch [Memory] again to save the
settings.
Memo
• Touch [Delete] to delete the settings of the
selected number.
• You can delete all the saved settings by
touching [All Delete].
a
Using the Memory Function (Sewing)
64
You can save often-used stitch patterns in the
machine’s memory or USB media.
1 Touch .
2 When saving the stitch pattern in a USB
media, insert the USB media into the USB
port on the machine.
a USB ports
3 Touch the desired destination to start
saving.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
a Save to the machine’s memory.
b Save to the USB media.
The stitch pattern is saved in a folder labeled
[bPocket].
Retrieve stitch patterns saved in the machine's
memory or USB media.
1 When retrieving stitch patterns from a
USB media, insert the USB media into the
USB port on the machine.
* For details on supported file extensions, refer to
“Specifications” on page 271.
2 Touch and touch the desired
destination.
In this case, touch .
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
a Retrieve from the machine’s memory.
b Retrieve from a USB media.
c Retrieve stitch patterns via the wireless network.
For detailed procedures, refer to PE-DESIGN
manual (Version 11 or later).
Using the Memory
Function (Sewing)
Saving Character/Decorative
Stitch Patterns
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Saving…] screen is displayed. You will lose
the stitch pattern you are saving.
Memo
• For more information about the memory
function, refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
Retrieving Stitch Patterns
a
b
a b c
Projecting the Guidelines onto the Fabric
Sewing Basics
65
2
3 Touch the key of the stitch pattern you
want to retrieve.
* Touch to return to the previous folder.
With the guideline function, sewing can easily be
done by following the lines and marks projected
onto the fabric.
1 Touch .
The guideline settings screen appears.
2 Specify the guideline settings.
Main Guideline
a Set the guideline function to on or off.
b Select the guideline whose settings are to be
specified.
c Select a cross, a line or a point as the shape of the
guideline marker.
d Select the length of the main guideline.
e Select the color of the main guideline.
f Specify the position of the main guideline. In order
to reset the position, touch .
g Touch to flip the main guideline position on the
center needle position.
h Touch to finish specifying the guideline settings.
Memo
• If the stitch pattern to be retrieved is in a folder
of the USB media, touch the key for that folder.
Memo
• You can delete the saved stitch patterns or
save to machine’s memory from USB media
by touching .
a Touch to select all displayed stitch patterns.
b Touch to deselect all selected stitch
patterns.
c Touch to delete the selected stitch patterns.
d Touch to save the selected stitch patterns in
the machine’s memory.
a b c d
Projecting the Guidelines
onto the Fabric
Specify the Guidelines
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Projecting the Guidelines onto the Fabric
66
Sub Guidelines
Sub Guideline
A straight-line guideline is displayed.
a Select the color of the sub guideline.
b Specify the sub guideline position (distance from
the main guideline).
*1
Sub guideline
*2
Main guideline
*3
Distance specified with [Sub Line Position] (2)
Sub Guideline
A grid guideline is displayed.
a Select the color of the sub guideline.
b Specify the grid spacing of the sub guideline.
Sub Guideline
Guidelines for sewing angled quilt pieces are
displayed.
a Select the color of the sub guideline.
b Specify the angle of the sub guideline. (*3)
c Specify the seam allowance of the sub guideline.
(*4)
Sewing quilt pieces together with their right sides
together (when the starting point of sewing is at the
intersection of seam lines)
*1
Align the sub guideline with the edge of the
quilt piece.
*2
Start sewing from the intersection with the main
guideline.
*3
Angle specified with [Angle] (2)
*4
Distance specified with [Seam Allowance] (3)
Memo
• Touch to return the setting to its default.
Memo
• When or is selected, the position of
the sub guideline is based on the position of
the main guideline. In order to move the two
guidelines without changing the spacing
between the main guideline and the sub
guideline, change the position of the main
guideline.
a
b
*2 *3
*1
a
b
a
b
c
*4
*1
*2
*3
Projecting the Guidelines onto the Fabric
Sewing Basics
67
2
Sub Guideline
Concentric circles are displayed.
a Select the color of the sub guideline.
b Specify the position of the concentric circles
(distance from the main guideline (*3)).
c Specify the size of the concentric circles (*4).
*1
Sub guideline
*2
Main guideline
*3
Distance specified with [Sub Line Position] (2)
*4
Radius specified with [Spacing] (3)
*5
Circle whose radius is the length specified with
3
*6
Circle whose radius is twice the length
specified with 3
Sub Guideline
Displays a 3-lined crosshatch.
a Select the color of the sub guideline.
b Specify the position of the 3-lined crosshatch
(distance from the main guideline (*3)).
c Specify the size of the 3-lined crosshatch.
*1
Sub guideline
*2
Main guideline
*3
Distance specified with [Sub Line Position] (2)
*4
Length specified with [Spacing] (3)
1 Select stitch Q-01 [Piecing stitch
(Middle)], and then touch .
2 Make sure that the guideline position for
[Main] aligns with the stitch pattern
displayed in the screen.
3 Set [Sub Line Position] of [Sub] to 6.35
mm (approx.1/4 inch).
4 Touch [Close].
5 Align the edge of the fabric with the sub
guideline and sew 6.35 mm (approx.1/4
inch) seams.
* For details, refer to “Sub Guidelines” on page 66.
a
b
c
*3
*5
*6
*4
*1
*2
a
b
c
*1
*2
*3
*4
*4
Piecing Using Guidelines
Memo
• If [Initial Position] in the settings screen is set
to , set [Main Line Position] to 3.50 mm in
order to align the guideline with the middle
needle position of the stitch pattern.
a Main guideline
b Stitch pattern
a
b
Projecting the Guidelines onto the Fabric
68
When Arranging Buttonholes
Vertically
1
Select a buttonhole stitch. Attach
buttonhole foot “A+” and pull out the
button holder plate on the presser foot,
and insert the button.
* For details, refer to “One-Step Buttonholes” on
page 87.
2 Touch .
3 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
lower buttonhole foot “A+”.
The buttonhole length is reflected in the guidelines.
4 Touch and then specify the guideline
settings.
a Turn on or off the guideline function. When this
function is turned on, the main guidelines (*1, *2) in
addition to the sub guidelines (*4, *5) that are
turned on will be projected.
b Select the color of the main guidelines (*1, *2).
c Switches the direction in which buttonholes are
placed.
d Turn on or off the sub guidelines (*4) that show the
spacing of the buttonholes.
e Change the color of the sub guidelines (*4).
f Change the spacing of the buttonholes of the sub
guidelines (*3). To reset the spacing, touch .
g Turn on or off the sub guideline (*5) that shows the
distance from the centerline of the buttonholes to
the edge of the fabric.
h Change the color of the sub guideline (*5).
i Change the distance from the centerline of the
buttonholes to the edge of the fabric of the sub
guideline (*6). To reset the spacing, touch .
*1
Centerline of the buttonholes (main guideline)
*2
Buttonhole length (main guideline)
*3
Spacing of the buttonholes specified with
[Spacing] (6)
*4
Position of next buttonhole to be sewn (sub
guidelines)
*5
Edge of fabric (sub guideline)
*6
Distance from the centerline of the buttonholes
to the edge of the fabric specified with
[Distance from edge] (9)
*7
Buttonhole foot “A+”
*8
Position of buttonhole to be sewn
*9
Touch to project the selected buttonhole
stitch beside the presser foot. (page 71)
5 Touch [Close].
Buttonhole Guidelines
Memo
• Touch to project the selected stitch
pattern along with the guidelines. (page 71)
Memo
• When buttonhole foot “A+” is lowered, the
buttonhole length is reflected in the projection.
a
b
c
d
e
f
h
g
i
*1
*8
*7
*5
*2
*3
*4
*6
*9
Projecting the Guidelines onto the Fabric
Sewing Basics
69
2
When Arranging Buttonholes
Horizontally
1
Follow steps 1 through 3 of “When
Arranging Buttonholes Vertically” on
page 68.
2 Touch and then specify the guideline
settings.
a Turn on or off the guideline function. When this
function is turned on, the main guidelines (*1, *2) in
addition to the sub guidelines (*4, *5) that are
turned on will be projected.
b Select the color of the main guidelines (*1, *2).
c Switches the direction in which buttonholes are
placed.
d Turn on or off the sub guidelines (*4) that show the
spacing of the buttonholes.
e Change the color of the sub guidelines (*4).
f Change the spacing of the buttonholes of the sub
guidelines (*3). To reset the spacing, touch .
g Turn on or off the sub guideline (*5) that shows the
distance from the bottom edge of the buttonholes
to the edge of the fabric.
h Change the color of the sub guideline (*5).
i Change the distance from the bottom edge of the
buttonholes to the edge of the fabric of the sub
guideline (*6). To reset the spacing, touch .
*1
Centerline of the buttonholes (main guideline)
*2
Buttonhole length (main guideline)
*3
Spacing of the buttonholes specified with
[Spacing] (6)
*4
Centerline of next buttonhole to be sewn (sub
guideline)
*5
Edge of fabric (sub guideline)
*6
Distance from the bottom edge of the
buttonholes to the edge of the fabric specified
with [Distance from edge] (9)
*7
Buttonhole foot “A+”
*8
Position of buttonhole to be sewn
*9
Touch to project the selected buttonhole
stitch beside the presser foot. (page 71)
3 Touch [Close].
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
*1
*8
*7
*5
*2
*3
*4
*6
*9
Using the Projector with the Dual Purpose Stylus
70
1 Install a new AAA alkaline battery (LR03)
in the dual purpose stylus with the
negative end (-) pointing up.
2 Press the button to light the dual purpose
stylus.
a Button
After the built-in camera detects the light, you can
operate the projector with the dual purpose stylus.
Using the projector, the selected stitch pattern
can be projected onto the fabric.
1 Select a stitch pattern.
2 Touch .
The selected stitch pattern and the adjustment
keys are projected onto the fabric.
3 Place the dual purpose stylus over the
key that you wish to operate, and then
press the button to turn on the light.
* After the built-in camera detects the light, you can
operate the projector with the dual purpose stylus.
a Turn off the projector.
b Select a different stitch pattern. (page 71)
c Change the [Background Color] setting.
d Change the thread color displayed on the
projection.
e Set the stitch width.
f Set the stitch length.
g Set the [L/R Shift].
Using the Projector with
the Dual Purpose Stylus
Operating the Projector with the
Dual Purpose Stylus
Note
• Do not disassemble or modify the dual
purpose stylus.
• Do not use metallic objects, such as tweezers
or a metallic pen, when changing the battery.
IMPORTANT
• Remove the battery if you do not intend to use the dual
purpose stylus for an extended period of time.
Note
• Do not put your hand, fabric or any object
between the built-in camera and the light-
emitting part of the dual purpose stylus,
otherwise the built-in camera cannot detect
the light from the dual purpose stylus.
Projecting/Editing the Stitch
Pattern with the Projector
Memo
• The illustrations of the projections shown in
this manual are for illustrative purposes only
and may differ from the actual projections.
Memo
• In the settings screen, settings for the
background color of the projector and outline
of stitch patterns can be specified. (page 24)
e
d
c
b
a
f
g
Using the Projector with the Dual Purpose Stylus
Sewing Basics
71
2
Selecting a Stitch Pattern
1
Press the button of the dual purpose
stylus to turn on the light over .
2 Press the button of the dual purpose
stylus over until the desired stitch
pattern is displayed, and then press the
button over .
a Stitch pattern to be set
When selecting a stitch that uses
the buttonhole foot
1
Select a buttonhole stitch. Attach
buttonhole foot “A+” and pull out the
button holder plate on the presser foot,
and insert the button.
* For details, refer to “One-Step Buttonholes” on
page 87.
* When a bar tack or darning stitch is selected, set
the scale to the length that you wish to sew. For
details, refer to “Bar Tacks” on page 93 and
“Darning” on page 93.
2 Touch .
The selected stitch pattern and the adjustment
keys are projected onto the fabric.
3 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
lower buttonhole foot “A+”.
The buttonhole length is reflected in the projected
stitch pattern.
4 If necessary, use the dual purpose stylus
to change the stitch settings.
a Projected buttonhole stitch
b Set the stitch width.
c Set the stitch length.
d The buttonhole length is reflected in the projection.
Memo
• A stitch pattern cannot be selected from the
LCD while a stitch pattern is being projected
by the projector. In order to select a stitch
pattern from the LCD, touch [Cancel] in the
screen. The projector is turned off, when
touching [Cancel].
Memo
• The stitch pattern is projected beside
buttonhole foot “A+”.
• When the presser foot is lowered, the
adjustment keys are not projected.
a
Memo
• When buttonhole foot “A+” is lowered, the
buttonhole length is reflected in the projection.
Memo
• Buttonhole length can be set by setting [Slit
Length] instead of inserting the button on the
buttonhole foot “A+”. [Slit Length] can be set
by touching , then on the screen.
(page 89)
When specifying the buttonhole length with
[Slit Length], the adjustment keys are
projected as shown below.
a Set the slit length.
Useful Functions
72
If the pivot function is selected, the machine
stops with the needle lowered and the presser
foot is automatically raised. This function is
useful for stopping the machine to rotate the
fabric.
1 Select a stitch.
2 Touch to select the pivot setting.
* To use the pivot function, the needle position
should be set to .
a Needle position setting key
The key appears as .
3 Set the needle in the start position, and
press the “Start/Stop” button.
4 Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the
machine at the point where the sewing
direction changes.
The machine stops with the needle in the fabric,
and the presser foot is raised.
5 Rotate the fabric, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button.
The presser foot is automatically lowered, and
sewing continues.
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the
presser foot with your knee, leaving both hands
free to handle the fabric.
1 Slide up the knee lifter handle slightly
and rotate knee lifter handle till it clicks
into the selected position that is most
comfortable for you.
a Knee lifter handle
Useful Functions
Pivoting
CAUTION
• When the pivot setting is selected, the machine starts
when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed or the foot
controller is pressed down even if the presser foot has
been raised. Be sure to keep your hands and other
items away from the needle, otherwise injuries may
occur.
Memo
• The height of the presser foot when sewing is
stopped can be changed. Touch to display
[Pivoting Height] of the settings screen and
select the height.
a
Memo
• If appears as light gray when the stitch
pattern was selected, the pivot function cannot
be used.
Using the Knee Lifter
Useful Functions
Sewing Basics
73
2
2 Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the
notches in the knee lifter slot on the front
of the machine. Insert the knee lifter bar
as far as possible.
3 Use your knee to move the knee lifter bar
to the right in order to raise the presser
foot. Slowly return the knee lifter bar to
the left to lower the presser foot.
The thickness of the fabric is automatically
detected and the presser foot pressure is
automatically adjusted with an internal sensor
while sewing, to insure that your fabric is fed
smoothly. The fabric sensor system works
continuously while sewing. This function is useful
for sewing over thick seams (page 78), or quilting
(page 111).
Touch , and then set [Automatic Fabric Sensor
System] to on. (page 22)
a Presser foot pressure
Set the sewing speed controller to control the
stitch width to make subtle changes in the stitch
width during sewing. When this function is set,
the foot controller must be used to sew.
1 Attach the foot controller. (page 53)
2 Select and attach zigzag foot “J”.
3 Touch in the length display to
shorten the stitch length.
IMPORTANT
• Only change position of the knee lifter handle when knee
lifter is not on the machine, otherwise the knee lifter may
damage the mounting slot on front of the machine.
Memo
• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the
mounting slot as far as possible, it may come
out during use.
Note
• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee
lifter during sewing.
Automatic Fabric Sensor System
(Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure)
Changing the Stitch Width During
Sewing
Memo
• The setting will vary according to the kind of
fabric and the thickness of the thread, but a
length of 0.3 to 0.5 mm (approx. 1/64 to 1/32
inch) is best for satin stitches.
Useful Functions
74
4 Touch to display [Width Control].
5 Set the [Width Control] to on.
6 Touch [OK].
The screen appears as shown below.
7 While sewing, slide the sewing speed
controller to adjust the stitch width.
* Adjust the sewing speed with the foot controller.
8 When you are finished sewing, set the
[Width Control] back to off.
You can check the stitch image with actual fabric
image on the screen.
1 Select a stitch, and then touch .
An image of the selected stitch and the actual
fabric image are displayed.
a Change the thread color displayed on the screen.
2 Touch on the fabric image or on the
screen.
The camera view window appears.
a Touch this key to save a camera image to the USB
media.
Insert the USB media to the machine to save a
camera image. (page 13)
b Touch this key to display a grid.
c Lower the presser foot, and then touch .
The needle drop point appears in the screen as
“”.
* When moving the fabric, raise the presser foot, and
then lower it again afterwards.
d Touch this key to close the screen.
e Touch to enlarge the image in the screen.
Touch again to return the image to its original
display size.
a narrower
b wider
Checking the Needle Location in
the Screen
a
c
d
e
a b
Useful Functions
Sewing Basics
75
2
Touch , and then set [Needle Position - Stitch
Placement] to on. (page 23)
When the [Needle Position - Stitch Placement] is
on, the needle will be partially lowered for precise
stitch placement and then completely lowered.
Each press of (Needle position button)
button changes the needle to the next position.
a The feed dogs are lowered. At this time, the fabric
can be shifted to finely adjust the needle drop
point.
1 Select a stitch.
2 Touch , make sure that [End Point
Setting Temporary Stop] in the settings
screen is set to off, and then touch [OK].
3 Touch to set [Guideline] to on. Set the
[Main] line horizontal position according
to the selected stitch pattern. And then
touch [Close].
4 Touch .
Memo
• Touch again to turn off the camera view.
• The camera view window disappears when
you start sewing.
• The needle drop point indicated in the screen
may differ from the actual position.
In that case, performing the camera needle
position setting procedure may resolve the
problem. Refer to “Needle Calibration for
Camera/Projector” on page 257.
Needle Position - Stitch Placement
Specifying the Sewing End Point
Note
• Using the same material and stitch pattern as
your project, sew trial stitches to check the
result. The machine’s sewing end point may
become misaligned in the following cases:
- The end point sticker is loose.
- The fabric was not sewn straight.
- The fabric was pushed too hard during
feeding.
- Fabrics difficult to sew, such as
heavyweight, quilted, stretchy, or thin
fabrics, were used.
Memo
• If is selected for [Sub], a grid will be
displayed.
Useful Functions
76
5 Touch .
6 Touch to select whether or not
sewing is ended with a complete stitch
pattern.
If necessary, touch [Close] after making
your selection.
7 With a chalk pencil, mark the fabric with
lines for sewing the stitch pattern and for
the end of stitching.
8 Affix an end point sticker, avoiding the
sewing area. Attach the end point sticker
within 4 cm (approx. 1-1/2 inches) to the
left or right of the chalkline where the end
point for sewing has been drawn.
a 4 cm (Approx. 1-1/2 inches)
9 Place the fabric in the machine, and then
lower the presser foot.
Memo
• If appears in light gray and is not
available, the sewing end point cannot be
specified with the selected stitch pattern.
Select a different stitch pattern.
• Automatic reinforcement stitching function and
automatic thread cutting function cannot be
used when using this function.
The length of the stitch pattern is adjusted
so that sewing will stop at the specified
end point with a complete stitch pattern.
If this key appears in light gray and is not
available, this function cannot be used.
This adjustment may cause the stitch
pattern to be sewn slightly stretched
vertically.
The end of stitching is not adjusted. When
the end point is reached, sewing stops
immediately, even if the stitch pattern is
not complete.
Memo
• If [End Point Setting] is set to on, the stitch
pattern cannot be projected by the projector.
• To cancel [End Point Setting], set [End Point
Setting] to off, and then touch [Close].
Memo
• If the end point sticker can be affixed to either
left or right of the sewing position, we
recommend affixing it to the left side.
• We recommend affixing the end point sticker
as close as possible to the sewing position.
• If you cannot affix an end point sticker
avoiding the sewing area, refer to “Temporary
Stop Setting” on page 77.
• The horizontal guideline at the needle
indicates the distance from the stitching line
where the end point sticker can be affixed.
a 4 cm (Approx. 1-1/2 inches)
b Guideline
Note
• Before sewing, make sure that the end point
sticker has not become detached. In addition,
make sure that the end point sticker is not
covered with your hand. Otherwise, the
machine cannot detect the end point sticker.
a a
Useful Functions
Sewing Basics
77
2
10 Press the "Start/Stop" button to start
sewing. When the foot controller is
plugged in, press down on the foot
controller.
Gently guide the fabric to sew the
stitching straight.
The machine stops at the specified end point
automatically.
11 Peel off the end point sticker.
Temporary Stop Setting
If you cannot affix an end point sticker that avoids
the sewing area, you can adjust the machine
settings to temporarily stop sewing to allow the
sticker to be removed as you approach the end
point sticker.
1 Select a stitch.
2 Touch , set [End Point Setting
Temporary Stop] in the settings screen to
on, and then touch [OK].
3 Follow steps 3 through 6 of “Specifying
the Sewing End Point” on page 75.
4 With a chalk pencil, mark the fabric with
lines for sewing the stitch pattern and for
the end of stitching, and then affix an end
point sticker.
5 Follow steps 9 through 10 of
“Specifying the Sewing End Point” on
page 75.
When the needle approaches the mark, the
machine stops, and the following message
appears.
6 Peel off the end point sticker, and then
touch [OK].
7 Press the “Start/Stop” button again.
When the foot controller is plugged in,
press down on the foot controller.
The machine finishes sewing the stitch pattern,
then stops.
Note
• While making sure that the guidelines align
with the lines drawn with the chalk pencil, sew
the stitching straight, not at an angle.
• Do not forcefully feed the fabric. Otherwise,
sewing may not stop correctly.
Memo
• If the stitch pattern could not be adjusted when
was set in step
6, the following
message appears. Cancel [End Point Setting],
and then select a different stitch or change the
length of the stitch.
Useful Sewing Tips
78
Sewing Curves
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine
stitch. Sew slowly, keeping the seams parallel with
the fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the
curve.
Changing Sewing Direction
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric,
and press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise
the presser foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn
the fabric so that you can sew in the new direction.
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to lower the
presser foot and start sewing.
The pivot setting is useful when changing the
sewing direction. (page 72)
Sewing Cylindrical Pieces
Removing the flat bed attachment allows for free
arm sewing, making it easier to sew cylindrical
pieces such as sleeve cuffs and pant legs.
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics
If the Fabric Does Not Fit Under the
Presser Foot
If the fabric cannot be smoothly placed under the
presser foot there are two options.
Option 1: The presser foot height can be changed
in the settings screen. (page 22)
Option 2: The presser foot can be raised higher
manually so that the fabric can be placed under the
presser foot.
Useful Sewing Tips
Sewing Tips
Sewing Various Fabrics
Note
• Sew trial stitches on fabric that is the same as
that used in your project, referring to “Fabric/
Thread/Needle Combinations” on page 34.
While checking the sewing results, adjust the
thread tension as well as the stitch length and
width according to the number of fabric layers
and stitch that is sewn.
CAUTION
• Do not forcefully push fabrics through the machine. This
may cause the needle to break and cause injury.
Memo
• Thicker fabrics require a larger needle.
(page 34)
Memo
• You cannot use the presser foot lever after the
presser foot has been raised using
(Presser foot lifter button).
Useful Sewing Tips
Sewing Basics
79
2
If the Fabric Does Not Feed
When sewing thick fabric such as denim or quilting
layers, the fabric may not feed at the start of
sewing if the presser foot is not level. In this case,
use the presser foot locking pin (black button on
the left side) of zigzag foot “J” so that the presser
foot remains level while sewing, allowing the fabric
to be fed smoothly.
If the presser foot misalignment is too large, place
thick paper or fabric (with the same thickness as
the fabric being sewn) under the heel of the
presser foot to be able to start sewing smoothly.
a Sewing direction
b Misalignment
c Fabric being sewn
d Fabric or thick paper
1 Raise the presser foot.
2 While keeping the black button on the left
side of zigzag foot “J” pressed in, press
(Presser foot lifter button) to lower
the presser foot.
3 Release the black button.
The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric
to be fed. Once the trouble spot has been passed,
the foot will return to its normal position.
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics
Place thin paper or tear away embroidery stabilizer
under thin fabrics to make sewing easier. Gently
tear off the paper or the stabilizer after sewing.
a Thin paper
Sewing Stretch Fabrics
First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then
sew without stretching the fabric. If the stitching is
misaligned, place non-woven water soluble
stabilizer under the fabric and sew them together.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by
using thread for knits or a stretch stitch.
a Basting stitching
Sewing Leathers or Vinyl Fabrics
When sewing fabrics that may stick to the presser
foot, such as leather or vinyl fabrics, replace the
presser foot with the compact dual feed foot.
(page 49)
If the leather or vinyl fabric sticks to the flat bed
attachment, sew with copy paper or tracing paper
placed on top of the flat bed attachment so the
fabric moves smoothly.
If the paper is positioned so that it does not cover
the needle plate, the paper will not be sewn
together with the fabric.
a Copy paper or tracing paper
Memo
• When [Automatic Fabric Sensor System]
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) in the
settings screen is set to on, the thickness of
the fabric is automatically detected by the
internal sensor, so the fabric can be fed
smoothly for best sewing results. (page 73)
b
a
d
c
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch fabrics,
decrease the pressure of the presser foot.
a
a
a
Useful Sewing Tips
80
Sewing Hook-and-Loop Fastener
Tape
Make sure that the needle passes through the
hook-and-loop fastener tape by rotating the
handwheel and lowering the needle into the hook-
and-loop fastener tape before sewing. Sew the
edge of the hook-and-loop fastener tape at a slow
speed.
If the needle does not pass through the hook-and-
loop fastener tape, replace the needle size with the
needle for thick fabrics. (page 34)
a Edge of the hook-and-loop fastener tape
Check the table below for the proper fabric/
needle/thread combinations.
CAUTION
• If non-adhesive hook-and-loop fastener tape is sewn
with a fine needle (65/9-75/11), the needle may break
and cause injury.
IMPORTANT
• Adhesive backed hook-and-loop fastener tape is not
designed for sewing. When glue adheres to the needle
or the bobbin hook race, it may cause malfunction.
Note
• Before starting to sew, baste the fabric and
hook-and-loop fastener tape together.
Sewing Character/Decorative
Stitches
Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics,
or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach stabilizer on
the wrong side of the fabric. If you do not wish to do
so, place the fabric on a thin paper such as tracing
paper.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
c Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball
point needle (golden colored)
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine
needle 90/14
Presser foot Advanced monogramming foot “N+”.
Using another presser foot may give inferior results.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
81
3
1 Select a stitch.
* For details on stitch patterns, refer to “Stitch Chart”
on page 273.
2 Start sewing.
* For details, refer to “Basic Sewing” on page 51.
* If necessary, sew reverse or reinforcement stitches
at the beginning and end of the stitching. (page 55)
Changing the Needle Position
When you select straight stitches, you can use
and in the [L/R Shift] display to
change the position of the needle. Match the
distance from the right edge of the presser foot to
the needle with the L/R Shift, then align the edge of
the presser foot with the edge of the fabric during
sewing for an attractive finish.
a L/R Shift
Chapter 3
Various Stitches
Utility Stitches
CAUTION
• Before replacing the presser foot, be sure to touch
to lock all keys and buttons, otherwise injuries may
occur if the “Start/Stop” button or any other button is
pressed and the machine starts. For details on changing
the presser foot, refer to “Replacing the Presser Foot” on
page 48.
Straight Stitches
12.0 mm
(approx.
15/32 inch)
8.5 mm
(approx. 21/
64 inch)
6.5 mm
(approx.
1/4 inch)
5.0 mm
(approx. 13/
64 inch)
Memo
• Stitch Q-01 will not permit using the L/R Shift
function.
• When [Width Control] in the settings screen is
set to on, the needle position of a straight
stitch can be changed with the sewing speed
controller. Use the foot controller to operate
the machine.
a Shift the stitch pattern to the left.
b Shift the stitch pattern to the right.
Utility Stitches
82
Aligning the Fabric with a Mark
on the Needle Plate or Bobbin
Cover (with Mark)
For stitches with a left needle position
(L/R Shift: 0.00 mm)
a Seam
b Presser foot
c Centimeters
d Inches
e Needle plate
f 5/8 inch (approx. 16 mm)
For stitches with a middle (center)
needle position
(L/R Shift: 3.50 mm)
a Seam
b Presser foot
c Inches
d Bobbin cover (with mark)
e 5/8 inch (approx. 16 mm)
Using the Straight Stitch Needle
Plate and the Straight Stitch Foot
The straight stitch needle plate and the straight
stitch foot can only be used for straight stitches
(middle needle position stitches). Use the straight
stitch needle plate and the straight stitch foot when
sewing thin fabrics or when sewing small pieces
which tend to sink into the hole of the regular
needle plate during sewing.
1 Turn off the machine and remove the
needle plate.
* For details, refer to steps 1 through 6 of “Cleaning
the Race” on page 255.
a Slide toward you.
The needle plate opens.
2 Insert the tabs on the straight stitch
needle plate into the notches in the
machine.
a Tabs
b Notches
c Round hole
a
b
c
d
e
f
a
b
c
e
d
CAUTION
• Always use the straight stitch foot in combination with
the straight stitch needle plate. Otherwise, the needle
may break and cause injury.
a
c
b
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
83
3
3 Press down on the right side of the
straight stitch needle plate to secure it.
4 If necessary, attach the flat bed
attachment.
5 Insert needle and attach the straight
stitch foot. (page 36, page 48)
6 Select any of the straight stitches.
7 Start sewing.
* After sewing, make sure to turn off the machine
and to remove the straight stitch needle plate and
the straight stitch foot. Reinstall the regular needle
plate and the zigzag foot “J”.
Zigzag stitches are useful for overcasting
(page 84), appliqué (page 107), patchwork, and
many other applications. For details on stitch
patterns, refer to “Stitch Chart” on page 273.
Using the Cord Guide Bobbin
Cover
1
Remove the bobbin cover from the
machine. (page 40)
2 Thread the gimp thread through the hole
in the cord guide bobbin cover as shown
in the illustration.
a Notch
b Gimp thread
3 Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into
place, making sure there are no
restrictions when feeding the thread.
4 Set the zigzag width from 2.0-2.5 mm
(approx. 1/16 - 3/32 inch).
5 Attach advanced monogramming foot
“N+”.
6 Position the fabric right side up on top of
the cord and place the cord to the rear of
the machine under the presser foot.
a Fabric (right side)
b Gimp thread
Memo
• When the straight stitch needle plate is
attached on the machine, only stitch patterns
that allow sewing with the straight stitch
needle plate can be selected.
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on the
machine, the needle will automatically move to
the middle position.
Note
• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before sewing and make
sure that the needle is not contacting the
straight stitch foot and straight stitch needle
plate.
Memo
• The small opening on the foot provides
support for the fabric as the needle travels
through the fabric.
a 2.25 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
b 4.25 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
c 6.25 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d 8.5 mm (approx. 5/16 inch)
Zigzag Stitches
a
b
Utility Stitches
84
7 Start sewing to make a decorative finish.
Sew overcasting stitches along the edges of cut
fabric to prevent them from fraying.
For details on stitch patterns, refer to “Stitch
Chart” on page 273.
Using Overcasting Foot “G”
1
Select a stitch and attach the overcasting
foot “G”.
2 Lower the presser foot so that the
presser foot guide is set flush against the
edge of the fabric.
a Guide
3 Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise). Check that the
needle does not touch the presser foot.
a The needle should not touch the center bar
4 Sew along the presser foot guide.
a Guide
b Needle drop point
5 Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop
sewing when you are finished, and raise
the presser foot and needle to remove
the fabric by pulling it back.
Using Zigzag Foot “J”
1
Select a stitch and attach zigzag foot “J”.
2 Sew with the needle dropping slightly off
the edge of the fabric.
a Needle drop point
Overcasting
CAUTION
• When using overcasting foot “G”, be sure to select a
stitch that can be used with overcasting foot “G”. If you
sew with the incorrect stitch, the needle may strike the
presser foot and break, and may cause injury.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to pull the fabric backward after finished sewing.
If you pull the fabric toward side or forward, the presser
foot pin may be damaged.
• If thread is tangled on the presser foot, remove the
entangled thread, and then raise the presser foot lever
to remove the presser foot. If the presser foot is raised
while entangled with thread, the presser foot may be
damaged.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
85
3
Secure the bottoms of skirts and pants with a
blind hem.
1 Turn the skirt or pants wrong side out.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Bottom side
2 Fold the fabric along the desired edge of
the hem, and press.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of Fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
*1 Thick fabric
*2 Normal fabric
3 Use a chalk pencil to mark on the fabric
about 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) from the
edge of the fabric, and then baste it.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
f Basting
*1 Thick fabric
*2 Normal fabric
4 Fold back the fabric inside along the
basting.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
f Basting
g Basting point
*1 Thick fabric
*2 Normal fabric
Blind Hem Stitches
Memo
• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too small
to slide onto the arm or the length is too short,
the fabric will not feed and desired results may
not be achieved.
2
1
3
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
Utility Stitches
86
5 Unfold the edge of fabric, and position
the fabric with the wrong side facing up.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
c Edge of fabric
d Desired edge of hem
e Basting point
f Basting
*1 Thick fabric
*2 Normal fabric
6 Attach blind stitch foot “R”.
7 Select a stitch.
8 Remove the flat bed attachment to use
the free arm.
9 Slide the item that you wish to sew onto
the free arm and make sure that the fabric
feeds correctly.
a Free arm
10 Position the fabric with the edge of the
folded hem against the guide of the
presser foot, and then lower the presser
foot lever.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Fold of hem
c Guide
11 Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
and check that the needle slightly
catches the fold of the hem.
a Needle drop point
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then change the stitch width. (The stitch
width setting is in neither millimeters nor inches.)
a Thick fabric
b Normal fabric
c Touch to move the needle drop point to the right, if
the needle catches too much of the fold.
d Touch to move the needle drop point to the left, if
the needle does not catch the fold.
*1
*2
Memo
• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left
needle drop point does not catch the fold. If
the needle catches too much of the fold, the
fabric cannot be unfolded and the seam
appearing on the right side of the fabric will be
very large, leaving an unattractive finish.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
87
3
12 Sew with the fold of the hem against the
presser foot guide.
* We recommend to stitch reinforcement stitches at
the beginning and end of the hem.
13 Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop
sewing when you are finished, and raise
the presser foot and needle to pull the
fabric under the presser foot towards the
back of the machine.
14 Remove the basting stitching and
reverse the fabric.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Right side of fabric
With one-step buttonholes, you can make
buttonholes appropriate to the size of your
button.
One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of
the presser foot to the back, as shown below.
a Reinforcement stitching
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to pull the fabric towards the back of the
machine after sewing. If you pull the fabric toward side
or forward, the presser foot may be damaged.
One-Step Buttonholes
Note
• For details on projecting buttonhole stitches
and guidelines, refer to the following.
- “Projecting/Editing the Stitch Pattern with the
Projector” on page 70
- “Buttonhole Guidelines” on page 68
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “Stitch
Chart” on page 273.
Utility Stitches
88
1 Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach
buttonhole foot “A+”.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A+”.
2 Mark the position and length of the
buttonhole on the fabric.
a Marks on fabric
b Buttonhole sewing
3 Pull out the button holder plate on the
presser foot, and insert the button that
will be put through the buttonhole. Then
tighten the button holder plate around
the button.
a Button holder plate
4 Align the presser foot with the mark on
the fabric, and lower the presser foot.
a Mark on the fabric
b Marks on the presser foot
IMPORTANT
• When attaching and removing buttonhole foot “A+”, do
not apply excessive force to the presser foot, otherwise
it may be damaged. In addition, be careful not to hit the
needle when attaching and removing buttonhole foot
“A+”.
Note
• Before attaching the presser foot, check that
there is enough thread in the bobbin.
• Sew trial stitches on fabric that is the same as
that used in your project, referring to “Fabric/
Thread/Needle Combinations” on page 34.
• The built-in camera detects the position of
buttonhole foot “A+”. Do not touch the camera.
(Refer to “Names of Machine Parts” on
page 13.)
• Do not peel the “A+” sticker off buttonhole foot
“A+” or cover the sticker with the upper thread,
etc., otherwise the camera cannot detect the
presser foot or buttonholes cannot be sewn.
• If the fabric does not feed correctly, such as
when sewing stretchy fabrics, install the
buttonhole foot stabilizer. (page 90)
Memo
• The maximum buttonhole length is about 47
mm (approx. 1-3/4 inches) (diameter +
thickness of the button).
Memo
• The size of the buttonhole is determined by
the size of the button in the button holder
plate. If the button does not fit in the button
holder plate, refer to page 89.
Note
• After lowering the presser foot, make sure that
there is no gap in 1.
a
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
89
3
5 Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then start sewing.
* Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and
then stops.
6 Press (Thread cutter button) once.
Raise the presser foot, and then remove
the fabric.
7 Insert a pin along the inside of one of the
bar tacks, and then insert the seam ripper
into the center of the buttonhole and cut
towards the pin.
a Seam ripper
Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that
Do Not Fit into the Button
Holder Plate
Add the button diameter and thickness together,
and then set the button holder plate at the
calculated value.
The distance between the long markings on the
presser foot scale is 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
a Presser foot scale
b Button holder plate
c Completed measurement of diameter + thickness
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
Example: For a button with a diameter of 15 mm
(approx. 9/16 inch) and thickness of 10 mm
(approx. 3/8 inch), align the scale with 25 mm
(approx. 1 inch)
a 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
b 15 mm (approx. 9/16 inch)
Setting the Slit Length
The calculated value can also be set in the screen
instead of setting the button holder plate.
Memo
• When using scissors to cut the threads, press
(Needle position button) to raise the
needle, raise the presser foot, and then pull
out the fabric before cutting the threads.
CAUTION
• When using the seam ripper to open the buttonhole, do
not put your hand or finger in the path of the ripper. The
ripper may slip and cause injury.
Memo
• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet punch
to make a hole in the rounded end of the
buttonhole, and then use the seam ripper to
cut open the buttonhole.
a Eyelet punch
Memo
• Option: turn on projector make adjustment
using dual purpose stylus. (page 70)
a
d
c
b
Utility Stitches
90
Fabric Cannot Be Correctly Fed
If the fabric does not feed (for example, because it
is too thick), first increase the stitch length setting.
If the fabric still does not feed correctly, such as
when sewing thick fabrics or stretch fabrics, install
the buttonhole foot stabilizer, and then feed the
fabric between the buttonhole foot stabilizer and
buttonhole foot “A+”. Attach the buttonhole foot
stabilizer to buttonhole foot “A+” before attaching
buttonhole foot “A+” to the presser foot holder.
Sewing Thick Fabrics
Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside
the fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot
and allow for easier and even feeding.
a Presser foot
b Thick paper
c Fabric
Sewing Stretch Fabrics
When sewing on stretch fabric, sew the buttonhole
stitches over a gimp thread.
1 Hook the gimp thread onto the back of
presser foot “A+”. Insert the ends into
the grooves of the presser foot, and then
temporarily tie them there.
a Gimp thread
b Upper thread
2 Select a stitch and start sewing.
3 Once sewing is completed, gently pull
the gimp thread to remove any slack, and
trim off any excess.
a Buttonhole foot
stabilizer
b Fabric
Note
• Attach stabilizer material to the back of stretch
fabrics to prevent them from stretching.
Memo
• Adjust the stitch width to the thickness of the
gimp thread.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
91
3
You can sew any desired length for the
buttonhole when using 4-step buttonholes.
Four-step buttonholes are sewn as shown below.
1 Mark the position and length of the
buttonhole on the fabric.
a Starting point
b End point
c Buttonhole sewing
2 Attach advanced monogramming foot
“N+”, and select stitch to sew the left
side of the buttonhole.
3 Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing.
4 Sew the desired length for the buttonhole
and press the “Start/Stop” button again.
5 Select stitch to sew the bar tack and
press the “Start/Stop” button.
The machine will automatically stop after sewing
the bar tack.
6 Select stitch to sew the right side of
the buttonhole, and press the “Start/
Stop” button to begin sewing.
7 Sew the right side of the buttonhole and
press the “Start/Stop” button again.
* Sew the right side of the buttonhole the same
length as the left.
8 Select stitch to sew the bar tack and
then press the “Start/Stop” button.
The machine will automatically sew off the bar tack
tie and stop when the bar tack is complete.
9 Raise the presser foot and remove the
fabric.
10 Follow step 7 of “One-Step Buttonholes”
on page 87 to open the buttonhole.
Four-Step Buttonholes
Note
• When changing the stitch settings, make sure
that all stitch settings are changed to match.
b
c
a
Utility Stitches
92
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using
the machine.
1 Select .
The feed dogs are lowered automatically.
2 Raise the presser foot.
3 Attach button fitting foot “M”, slide the
button along the metal plate and into the
presser foot, and lower the presser foot.
a Button
b Metal plate
4 Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to check that the
needle goes into each hole correctly.
a Align the holes of the button with the marks on
button fitting foot “M”.
* If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
side, adjust the stitch width.
5 Gently hold the end of the upper thread
and start sewing.
The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
* To attach the button more securely, repeat the
process.
6 From the wrong side of the fabric, pull
the end of the bobbin thread to pull the
upper thread through to the wrong side
of the fabric. Tie the two thread ends
together then cut the threads.
Attaching 4-Hole Buttons
Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the
presser foot and move the fabric so that the needle
goes into the next two holes, and sew them in the
same way.
Attaching a Shank to the Button
1
Pull the shank lever toward you before
sewing.
a Shank lever
2 After sewing is finished, cut the upper
thread with plenty of excess, wind it
around the thread between the button
and the fabric, and then tie it to the upper
thread from the beginning of the
stitching.
3 Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from
the beginning and end of sewing together
on the wrong side of the fabric.
4 Cut off any excess thread.
Button Sewing
Note
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting
function when sewing buttons. Otherwise, you
will lose the thread ends.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure the needle does not strike the button during
sewing.
a
a
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
93
3
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be
subject to strain, such as pocket corners.
1 Select .
2 Attach buttonhole foot “A+” and set the
scale to the length of the bar tack you
wish to sew.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A+”.
a Presser foot scale
b Completed length measurement
c 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
3 Set the fabric so that the pocket moves
toward you during sewing.
4 Check the first needle drop point and
lower the presser foot.
a 2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch)
5 Gently hold the end of the upper thread
and begin sewing.
When sewing is completed, the machine will sew
reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.
Use darning stitches for mending and other
applications.
Darning is performed by sewing from the front of
the presser foot to the back as shown below.
a Reinforcement stitches
1 Select a stitch, and attach buttonhole
foot “A+”.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A+”.
Bar Tacks
Memo
• Instead of setting the bar tack length with the
buttonhole foot, it can be set on the screen.
(page 89)
Note
• After lowering the presser foot, make sure that
there is no gap in 1.
a
c
b
Memo
• If the fabric does not feed, for example,
because it is too thick, refer to “Sewing Thick
Fabrics” on page 90.
Darning
Utility Stitches
94
2 Set the scale to the desired length of the
darning.
a Presser foot scale
b Completed length measurement
c Width 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
d 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
3 Check that the needle drops at the
desired position and lower the presser
foot, making sure the upper thread
passes underneath the buttonhole foot.
4 Gently hold the end of the upper thread,
and then press the “Start/Stop” button to
start the machine.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and
then stops.
Use this stitch for making belt holes and other
similar applications.
1 Select or .
2 If selecting , adjust either the stitch
width or the stitch length to choose the
size of the eyelet. (page 61)
3 Attach advanced monogramming foot
“N+”, then rotate the handwheel toward
you (counterclockwise) to check the
needle drop point.
a Needle drop point
4 Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
When sewing is finished, the machine sews
reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.
5 Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in
the center of the stitching.
Memo
• Instead of setting the darning length with the
buttonhole foot, it can be set on the screen.
(page 89)
Note
• After lowering the presser foot, make sure that
there is no gap in 1.
a
d
c
b
Eyelet
Note
• If the stitch pattern comes out poorly, make
adjustments by following “Making
Adjustments” on page 105.
a
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
95
3
1 Select and attach zigzag foot “J”.
2 Before sewing, pull up the bobbin thread,
align it with the upper thread, and then
pull them to the back of the machine.
(page 41)
* For clean stitching, hold these thread ends when
starting to sew.
3 If desired, keep pressing (Reverse
stitch button) or (Reinforcement
stitch button) to sew 4 stitches of
reinforcement stitches, then press “Start/
Stop” button to continue sewing.
4 Sew while keeping the fabric straight.
5 If desired, end the basting with
reinforcement stitches.
Basting with the Stitch Regulator
The stitch regulator allows free-motion basting with
a set stitch length. Refer to “Free-Motion Quilting/
Basting with the Stitch Regulator” on page 114.
Free-Motion Basting
When the feed dogs are lowered, basting can be
sewn while freely moving the fabric.
1 Touch and then select .
The presser foot is raised to the necessary height,
and then the feed dogs are lowered for free motion
sewing.
2 If desired, keep pressing (Reverse
stitch button) or (Reinforcement
stitch button) to sew 4 stitches of
reinforcement stitches.
3 Press the “Start/Stop” button to start
sewing. While the needle is raised, slide
the fabric to the next sewing position to
sew one stitch. Repeat this operation.
4 If desired, end the basting with
reinforcement stitches.
Centered Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
1 Select .
2 Attach zigzag foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening.
Change to a basting stitch (page 95) and
sew to the top of the fabric.
a Basting stitches
b Reverse stitches
c End of zipper opening
d Wrong side
3 Press the seam allowance open and
attach the zipper with a basting stitch in
the middle of each side of the zipper tape.
a Basting stitches
b Zipper
c Wrong side
Basting
Memo
• If the side pedal of the multi-function foot
controller is set to [Single Stitch], basting can
be sewn by using the side pedal to sew each
single stitch. (page 53)
Zipper Insertion
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
a
c
b
d
cc
a
b
Utility Stitches
96
4 Remove zigzag foot “J”. Align the right
side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with the
presser foot holder, and attach the zipper
foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop point
5 Topstitch 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 to 3/8
inch) from the seamed edge of the fabric,
then remove the basting.
Inserting a Side Zipper
Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.
1 Select .
2 Attach zigzag foot “J” and sew straight
stitches up to the zipper opening.
Change to a basting stitch and sew to the
top of the fabric.
a Reverse stitches
b Wrong side of fabric
c Basting stitches
d End of zipper opening
3 Press the seam allowance open and align
the folded hem along the teeth of the
zipper, while maintaining 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) of sewing space.
a Zipper pull tab
b Wrong side of fabric
c Zipper teeth
d End of zipper opening
e 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
4 Remove zigzag foot “J”.
5 Align the right side of the pin in zipper
foot “I” with the presser foot holder, and
attach the presser foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop point
6
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx.
1/8 inch) margin.
Note
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the zipper during
sewing. If the needle strikes the zipper, the needle may
break, leading to injury.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
a
b
c
Note
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the
straight stitch, middle needle position is
selected. Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to make sure the needle
does not strike the presser foot.
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
c
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
97
3
7 Starting from the end of the zipper
opening, sew to a point about 50 mm
(approx. 2 inches) from the edge of the
fabric, then stop the machine.
8 Pull down the zipper slider, then continue
sewing to the edge of the fabric.
a About 5 cm (approx. 2 inches)
b 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
9 Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and
sew a basting stitch.
a Front of the skirt (wrong side of fabric)
b Basting stitches
c Front of the skirt (right side of fabric)
d Back of the skirt (right side of fabric)
10 Remove the presser foot, and reattach it
so that the left side of the pin is attached
to the presser foot holder.
* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
When sewing the right side of the zipper, the
needle should drop on the left side of the presser
foot.
a Right
b Left
c Needle drop point
11 Set the fabric so that the left edge of the
presser foot touches the edge of the
zipper teeth.
12 Sew reverse stitches at the end of the
zipper, then continue sewing.
13 Stop sewing about 5 cm (approx. 2
inches) from the edge of the fabric, leave
the needle in the fabric, and remove the
basting stitches.
14 Open the zipper and sew the rest of the
seam.
a Basting stitches
b Reverse stitches
c 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch)
d About 5 cm (approx. 2 inches)
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the zipper during
sewing. If the needle strikes the zipper, the needle may
break, leading to injury.
a
b
a
b
c
Utility Stitches
98
The angles of the start and end of stitch patterns
can be changed. This is useful when sewing
projects with sharply defined angles or decorative
stitching, attaching appliqués, etc.
Use the method for finishing the stitch pattern,
according to your needs.
• “Method 1: Begin Changing the Angle at the
End of Sewing by Pressing the “Reverse
Stitch” Button” on page 98
• “Method 2: Sewing a Specified Number of
Stitch Patterns” on page 100
• “Method 3: Specifying the Sewing End Point
with an End Point Sticker” on page 100
Method 1: Begin Changing the
Angle at the End of Sewing by
Pressing the “Reverse Stitch”
Button
1
Touch [Utility Stitch], then , and then
select a stitch pattern for stitch tapering.
2 If necessary, change the stitch width and
stitch length.
3 Touch , and then touch .
Stitch Tapering Function
Note
• Using the same material and stitch pattern as
your project, sew trial stitches to check the
result. If necessary, attach a stabilizer
material.
•
If reinforcement stitches at the beginning and
end of sewing are needed, use
(Reinforcement stitch button). (Reverse
stitch button) cannot be used for reinforcement
stitching when stitch tapering function is on.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
99
3
4 Touch [Select], select the angle settings
for the start and end of sewing, and then
touch [OK].
a Select the start or end of sewing.
b Select an angle.
c Specify that the angle does not change.
5 Select the method for finishing sewing.
For this example, since the angle at the
end of sewing will begin changing when
(Reverse stitch button) is pressed,
select .
a Press (Reverse stitch button) for the angle at
the end of sewing to start changing; the machine
stops when sewing is finished.
b The machine stops when the specified number of
stitch patterns have been sewn. The number of
patterns that are specified includes the number of
patterns used to change the angle. (page 100)
c The machine stops at the position where the end
point sticker is affixed. (page 100)
6 If necessary, use a chalk pencil to draw a
line at the location to be sewn.
7 Start sewing.
8 After sewing the desired length, press
(Reverse stitch button).
When (Reverse stitch button) is pressed, the
angle at the end of sewing begins to change, and
the machine stops when sewing is finished.
9 When finished sewing, set [Tapering] to
off, and then touch [Close].
b
a
c
c
a
b
Memo
• If you stop sewing at the point where end
tapering should begin (either by pressing the
“Start/Stop” button or by lifting your foot from
the foot controller), press (Reverse stitch
button) and resume sewing by either pressing
the “Start/Stop” button or pressing on the foot
controller. End tapering will begin as soon as
sewing resumes.
Utility Stitches
100
Method 2: Sewing a Specified
Number of Stitch Patterns
With this method, the number of stitch patterns
(including those used to change the angle) are
specified. This allows stitch patterns of the same
length to be repeatedly sewn.
1 Refer to steps 1 through 4 of “Method 1:
Begin Changing the Angle at the End of
Sewing by Pressing the “Reverse Stitch”
Button” on page 98 to select the angle
settings for the start and end of sewing.
2 Touch , and then specify the number
of stitch patterns (including those used
to change the angle).
a Approximate length of the stitch pattern
3 Start sewing.
The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
Method 3: Specifying the Sewing
End Point with an End Point
Sticker
1
With a chalk pencil, mark the fabric with
lines for sewing the stitch pattern and for
the end of stitching.
2 Affix an end point sticker, avoiding the
sewing area. Attach the end point sticker
within 4 cm (approx. 1-1/2 inches) to the
left or right of the chalkline where the end
point for sewing has been drawn.
a 4 cm (Approx. 1-1/2 inches)
3 Refer to steps 1 through 4 of “Method 1:
Begin Changing the Angle at the End of
Sewing by Pressing the “Reverse Stitch”
Button” on page 98 to select the angle
settings for the start and end of sewing.
4 Touch .
* If the key appears in light gray, this function cannot
be used with the selected stitch length.
a Automatic reinforcement stitching function and
automatic thread cutting function are not available.
Memo
• The number of stitch patterns used to change
the angle depends on the pattern and angle.
Perform trial sewing to check the result.
Memo
• To sew stitching in a square, select for
the start of sewing and for the end of
sewing, and then continue sewing the same
stitch pattern, rotating the fabric 90° after
sewing each line of stitching.
The pivot setting is useful when changing the
sewing direction. (page 72)
a
Note
• For details on the procedure as well as
precautions, refer to “Specifying the Sewing
End Point” on page 75.
Memo
• If you cannot affix an end point sticker
avoiding the sewing area, refer to “Temporary
Stop Setting” on page 77.
a a
a
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
101
3
5 Start sewing.
The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
6 Peel off the end point sticker.
Saving Settings
Specified angles for start and end, finish tapering
method, and stitch settings can be saved in
machine’s memory.
1 After setting the tapering function, touch
[Close].
2 Touch [Memory].
Retrieving Saved Settings
1
Touch [Retrieve] to retrieve the saved
setting after selecting pattern.
2 Touch the numbered key of the settings
to be retrieved and then touch [Retrieve].
* The settings cannot be retrieved if stitch tapering
function is set to on.
You can easily sew decorative effects using yarn.
Prepare for Couching
1
Attach the spool stand to the machine.
At this time, do not raise the telescopic thread guide
shaft.
* Refer to “Assembling the Spool Stand” on page 45.
2 Insert the yarn guide into the slot on the
top left of the machine.
3 Touch to lock all keys and buttons,
and then raise the presser foot lever.
Memo
• For more information on saving and recalling
settings, refer to “Saving the Utility Stitch
Settings” on page 63.
Couching
CAUTION
• When using yarn, we recommend selecting yarn of
weight 4 (MEDIUM ). Medium yarn is often referred
to as worsted weight, 20 knitted stitches per 10 cm, or 9-
11 wraps per inch. The diameter of the yarn is
approximately 2-3 mm (approx. 1/12-1/8 inch). If the
yarn is extremely thin or thick, has an unusual shape
(flat or furry), or more than 2 yarns, the best finishing
results may not be achieved, or injuries or damage may
result.
Note
• Sew test stitches on the fabric before sewing
on your project.
• We recommend using a stabilizer material
when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics
which are prone to fabric shrinkage.
Utility Stitches
102
4 Attach the compact dual feed to the
machine without attaching the couching
dual feed foot.
* Refer to “Attaching the Compact Dual Feed Foot”
on page 49.
5 Pass the yarn through the telescopic
thread guide and the yarn guide (1) to
(2).
6 Thread the yarn through the couching
dual feed foot.
Pass the yarn through the loop in the
yarn threader, and then pass the threader
from top to bottom through the hole on
the couching dual feed foot.
7 Attach the couching dual feed foot
shown below to the compact dual feed.
8 Pull out the yarn for about 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches) to the back of the
machine.
9 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
10 Thread the machine with the upper
thread.
Sewing Couching
1
Select .
2 Measure the width of the yarn and set the
stitch width according to the width of the
yarn.
3 Rotate the handwheel to set the needle in
the sewing start position. Start sewing on
the right side of the yarn.
4 Make sure that the yarn passes straight
through the channel in the back of the
couching dual feed foot, and then lower
the presser foot.
a Channel
Note
• Make sure that the yarn does not become
entangled as you work.
Note
• Do not use the spool stand for upper thread.
Otherwise thread may tangle with yarn.
Note
• Make sure that there is enough width to wrap
over the yarn.
Note
• Pull off an appropriate amount of yarn from the
ball or skein so the yarn does not become taut.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
103
3
5 Set the sewing speed to a medium speed.
6 Press “Start/Stop” button to start sewing.
* While lightly holding down the fabric with both
hands, adjust the sewing direction.
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or
emblems to pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.
1 Remove the flat bed attachment to use
the free arm. (page 78)
2 Touch , and then select a stitch
pattern. For this example, touch . And
then, attach advanced monogramming
foot “N+”.
3 Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing
start point, and sew seam “1” as shown.
a Start Point
4 Select and sew seam “2” as shown.
* The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by
hand to keep sewing straight.
5 Select and sew seam “3” as shown.
The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.
6 Select and sew seam “4” as shown.
The seam will be connected to the starting point of
seam 1.
Memo
• The multi-function foot controller can also be
very useful for sharp angle sewing when set to
single stitch sewing. (page 53)
• Pivoting is also useful when rotating fabric with
both hands. (page 72)
• When guideline marker is set to on, it is easy
to sew couching straight. (page 65)
Multi-directional Sewing
Memo
• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the free
arm, and then sew in the order shown in the
illustration.
a
Utility Stitches
104
You can create a step effect, also called step
stitch patterns. Touch to move the stitch
pattern a distance equal to half of the stitch
pattern’s size to the left/right.
Example:
1 Select .
2 Touch , and then touch .
The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
3 Select again.
4 Touch .
The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
5 Touch , and then touch .
The entered stitch pattern is repeated.
Making Step Stitch Patterns
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
105
3
If your sewing does not turn out well, sew trial
stitches using the same conditions as the real
sewing, and adjust the stitch pattern as explained
below.
If the stitch pattern does not turn out well even
after making adjustments based on the stitch
pattern, make adjustments for each stitch pattern
individually.
1 Touch and select .
2 Attach advanced monogramming foot
“N+” and sew the stitch pattern.
3 Compare the finished stitch pattern to the
illustration of the correct stitch pattern
below. Touch , and then adjust the
stitch pattern with the [Fine Adjust Verti.]
or [Fine Adjust Horiz.] displays.
4 Sew the stitch pattern again.
* Adjust until the stitch pattern comes out correctly.
Making Adjustments
Memo
• This function is available for the following
stitch patterns.
- All stitch patterns in
- , , , and in
Problem Solution
The stitch pattern is
bunched.
Touch to increase the number in the [Fine
Adjust Verti.] display. The stitch pattern will
lengthen.
The stitch pattern
has gaps.
Touch to decrease the number in the [Fine
Adjust Verti.] display. The stitch pattern will
shorten.
The stitch pattern is
skewed to the left.
Touch to increase the number in the [Fine
Adjust Horiz.] display. The stitch pattern will
slide to the right.
The stitch pattern is
skewed to the right.
Touch to decrease the number in the [Fine
Adjust Horiz.] display. The stitch pattern will
slide to the left.
Memo
• You can sew with the setting screen on the
display.
Utility Stitches
106
With the twin needle, you can sew two parallel
lines of the same stitch with two different threads.
Both upper threads should have the same
thickness and quality.
1 Touch and then install the twin
needle (“Changing the Needle” on
page 36).
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
to continue.
2 Pass the first upper thread according to
steps
1 through 8 of “Upper Threading”
on page 42.
3 Pass the thread through the needle bar
thread guide, then thread the needle on
the left side manually.
a Needle bar thread guide
b First upper thread
4 Set the supplemental spool pin in the
“up” position and then place the
additional spool of thread, so that the
thread unwinds to the front from the
bottom.
a Supplemental spool pin
b Thread spool
c Spool cap
Sewing with a Twin Needle
CAUTION
• When using the twin needle, it is recommended to use
zigzag foot “J”. Otherwise, the needle may break and
cause injury.
• Before changing the needle or threading the machine,
be sure to touch
on the LCD Screen to lock all keys
and buttons, otherwise injuries may occur if the “Start/
Stop” button or any other button is pressed and the
machine starts sewing.
IMPORTANT
• Twin needle (size 2/11) is recommended for this
machine. Contact your authorized Brother dealer for
replacement needles.
• (Automatic threading button) cannot be used.
Manually thread the twin needle from front to back.
Using (Automatic threading button) may result in
damage to the machine.
Note
• When the twin needle is used, bunched
stitches may occur depending on the types of
fabric and thread that are used.
Use advanced monogramming foot “N+” or
attach stabilizer material.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
107
3
5 Thread the machine as shown in the
illustration.
a Thread guide
b Thread guide plate
6 Without passing the thread through the
needle bar thread guide, thread the
needle on the right side manually.
a Needle bar thread guide
b Additional upper thread
7 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
8 Touch , and then touch to select
the twin needle mode.
Twin needle mode is set. Only stitch patterns that
allow twin needle sewing can be selected.
9 Select a stitch pattern.
* Refer to “Stitch Chart” on page 273 for stitch
patterns that can use a twin needle.
10 Start sewing.
Appliqué
1
Use two-sided stabilizer material to
secure the appliqué piece to the base
fabric.
2 Select a stitch.
* For details on stitch patterns, refer to “Stitch Chart”
on page 273.
3 Attach the presser foot.
4 Turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and then begin
sewing around the edge of the appliqué,
making sure that the needle drops just
outside of the appliqué.
When sewing around corners, stop the machine with
the needle in the fabric just outside of the appliqué,
raise the presser foot lever, and then turn the fabric as
needed to change the sewing direction.
Memo
• If the key is light gray after selecting the
stitch, the selected stitch cannot be sewn in
the twin needle mode. In addition, the twin
needle cannot be used with functions that
cannot be set to twin needle mode (functions
where does not appear).
CAUTION
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when using the twin
needle. Using the twin needle while the machine is in
single needle mode could cause the needle to break and
cause injury.
Memo
• To change direction when sewing with the twin
needle, raise the needle from the fabric, raise
the presser foot lever, and then turn the fabric.
Sewing Technique
Utility Stitches
108
Attaching Tape or Elastic
1
Select a straight stitch and attach zigzag
foot “J”.
2 Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/
16 inch), and loosen the upper thread
tension to 2.0. (page 61, page 62)
3 Sew two rows of straight stitches on the
right side of the fabric, then pull the
bobbin thread to create the necessary
gather.
4 Place the tape over the gather, and hold it
in place with basting pins.
a Tape
5 Select a stitch.
6 Sew over the tape (or elastic).
7 Pull out the straight stitch threads.
Gathering
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
1 Select a straight stitch and attach zigzag
foot “J”.
2 Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx. 5/
32 inch) and the thread tension to
approximately 2.0 (weaker tension).
3 Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by
50 mm (approx. 2 inches). (page 41)
4 Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel
to the seam line, then trim excess thread
leaving 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
a Seam line
b 10 to 15 mm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
c About 50 mm (approx. 2 inches)
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “Stitch
Chart” on page 273.
Memo
• Be sure that neither automatic reinforcement
nor automatic thread cutting is
selected.
Memo
• Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) and
pull up the bobbin thread. Holding the top and
bobbin thread, pull a length of thread out from
the rear of the machine. (Be sure that the
presser foot is raised.)
a
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting pin, or any
other objects, during sewing. The thread could tangle or
the needle could break, causing injury.
Utility Stitches
Various Stitches
109
3
5 Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the
desired amount of gather, then tie the
threads.
6 Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
7 Sew on the seam line and remove the
basting stitch.
Shell Tuck Stitches
The arched tucks that look like seashells lined up
in a row are called “shell tucks”. They are used to
decorate trims, the front of blouses or cuffs made
of thin fabrics.
1 Draw equally spaced lines along the bias,
and then fold the fabric along the lines.
2 Select , and then increase the thread
tension.
3 Attach zigzag foot “J”.
4 Sew while making sure that the needle
drops slightly off the edge of the fabric.
One fold at a time, continue folding the fabric along the
line, then sewing it.
a Needle drop point
5 After sewing is finished, remove the
fabric. Unfold the fabric, and then iron
the tucks down to one side.
Scallop Stitches
This wave-shaped satin stitch is called
"scalloping". Use this stitch to decorate the edges
of blouse collars and handkerchiefs or use it as a
hem accent.
1 Select .
2 Attach advanced monogramming foot
“N+”.
3 Stitch along the edge of the fabric,
making sure not to sew directly on the
edge of the fabric.
4 Trim along the stitches.
• Be careful not to cut the stitches.
a
Quilting
110
Using Zigzag Foot “J”
Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called
piecing. When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make
sure the seam allowance is 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4
inch).
1 Select or and attach zigzag foot
“J”.
2 Align the edge of the fabric with the edge
of the presser foot, and start sewing.
* When aligning the right side of the presser foot with
the edge of the fabric, and sew using stitch .
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
* When aligning the left side of the presser foot with
the edge of the fabric, and sew using stitch .
a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
Piecing Using the 1/4" Piecing
Foot with Guide
This piecing foot can sew an accurate 1/4-inch or
1/8-inch seam allowance.
It can be used for piecing together a quilt or for
topstitching.
1 Select , and then attach the 1/4"
piecing foot with guide.
2 Use the guide and marks on the presser
foot to sew accurate seam allowances.
Piecing a 1/4 inch seam allowance
Keep the edge of the fabrics against the guide as you
sew.
a Guide
b 1/4 inch
Creating an accurate seam allowance
Use the mark on the foot to begin, end, or pivot 1/4
inch from edge of fabric.
a Align this mark with edge of fabric to begin.
b Beginning of stitching
c End of stitching
d Opposite edge of fabric to end or pivot
e 1/4 inch
Quilting
Memo
• The 40 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-40,
stitches S-03 through S-05 and the utility
stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated on their key
are useful for quilting.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “Stitch
Chart” on page 273.
Piecing
Memo
• To change the needle position, use or
in the [L/R Shift] display.
• You can sew piecing by referring to the
guideline marker. For details, refer to “Specify
the Guidelines” on page 65.
Memo
• For details on pivoting, refer to “Pivoting” on
page 72.
a
e
e
c
d
b
Quilting
Various Stitches
111
3
Topstitching quilting, 1/8 inch
Sew with the edge of the fabric or seam aligned
with the left side of the presser foot's front section.
a Right side of fabric
b Seam
c 1/8 inch
Sewing the quilt top, batting, and backing
together is called quilting. You can sew the quilt
with the compact dual feed foot to keep the quilt
top, batting, and backing from sliding.
1 Select a stitch.
2 Attach the compact dual feed foot.
(page 49)
3 Place one hand on each side of the
presser foot to hold the fabric secure
while sewing.
With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be
lowered by touching then , so that the
fabric can be moved freely in any direction.
For free motion quilting, use free motion quilting
foot “C” or free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
depending on the stitch that is selected, and set
the machine to free motion sewing mode. In this
mode, the presser foot is raised to the necessary
height for free motion sewing.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and
sewing at a consistent speed. You can adjust the
sewing speed with the speed control slide on the
machine.
Quilting with the Compact Dual
Feed Foot
Note
• If necessary, adjust the stitch length.
(page 61)
Memo
• Sew at slow to medium speed.
• Always check to be sure that your quilting
surface is securely basted before beginning to
sew.
a
b
c
Free Motion Quilting
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding speed of
the fabric to match the sewing speed. If the fabric is
moved faster than the sewing speed, the needle may
break and cause injury.
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor
detects the thickness of the fabric, and the
quilting foot is raised to the height specified in
the settings screen. Touch to display [Free
Motion Foot Height] of the settings screen.
Touch the number to select the height that the
quilting foot is raised above the fabric.
Increase the setting, for example, when
sewing very stretchy fabric, so that it is easier
to sew.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it may
be necessary to adjust the upper thread
tension. Test with a sample piece of fabric that
is similar to your chosen fabric.
Note
• Do not be discouraged with your initial results.
The technique requires practice.
Quilting
112
Using Free Motion Quilting Foot
“C”
Use free motion quilting foot “C” with the straight
stitch needle plate for free-motion sewing with
straight stitches.
1 Turn off the machine and remove the
needle plate. (page 255)
a Round hole
2 Select a stitch.
3 Touch then to set the machine to
free motion sewing mode.
a Free motion quilting foot “C”
4 Remove the presser foot holder.
(page 48)
5 Attach free motion quilting foot “C” as
shown the illustration and tighten the
presser foot holder screw.
a Presser foot holder screw
b Notch
6 Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
inch) in length.
a Stitch
7 Touch to cancel the free motion
sewing mode.
8 After sewing, make sure to remove the
straight stitch needle plate and presser
foot “C”, and reinstall the regular needle
plate.
CAUTION
• When using free motion quilting foot “C”, be sure to use
the straight stitch needle plate and sew with the needle
in middle (center) needle position. If the needle is moved
to any position other than the middle (center) needle
position, the needle may break, which may result in
injuries.
C
a
a
Note
• Make sure that the free motion quilting foot “C”
is attached properly and not slanted.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screw with the included
multi-purpose screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle may
touch the quilting foot, causing it to break and causing
injury.
Memo
• Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” can also
be used with the straight stitch needle plate.
We recommend using free motion open toe
quilting foot “O” with free motion sewing of
fabrics of uneven thicknesses.
Quilting
Various Stitches
113
3
Using Free Motion Open Toe
Quilting Foot “O”
The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used
for free motion quilting with zigzag or decorative
stitches or for free motion quilting of straight lines
on fabric with an uneven thickness. Various
stitches can be sewn using free motion open toe
quilting foot “O”. For details on the stitches that can
be used, refer to “Stitch Chart” on page 273.
1 Touch then to set the machine to
free motion sewing mode.
2 Select a stitch.
3 Remove the presser foot holder.
(page 48)
4 Attach free motion open toe quilting foot
“O” as shown the illustration and tighten
the presser foot holder screw.
a Presser foot holder screw
b Notch
c Pin
5 Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut,
and then move the fabric at a consistent
pace in order to sew uniform stitches
roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/32
inch) in length.
a Stitch
6 Touch to cancel the free motion
sewing mode.
Echo Quilting
Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a
motif is called echo quilting. Use the free motion
echo quilting foot “E” for echo quilting.
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
b 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8 inch)
c Free motion echo quilting foot “E”
1 Select .
2 Touch then to set the machine to
free motion sewing mode.
3 Remove the presser foot holder and then
attach the adapter. (page 48)
Memo
• The standard needle plate must be used if
zigzag or decorative stitch patterns are
selected.
Note
• Make sure that the free motion open toe
quilting foot “O” is not slanted.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screw with the included
multi-purpose screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle may
touch the quilting foot, causing it to break and causing
injury.
O
O
Quilting
114
4 Position the free motion echo quilting
foot “E” on the left side of the presser bar
with the holes in the quilting foot and
presser bar aligned.
5 Tighten the screw (small) with the
included screwdriver (large).
6 Using the measurement on the quilting
foot as a guide, sew around the motif.
a 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
7 Touch to cancel the free motion
sewing mode.
The stitch regulator allows free-motion quilting
and free-motion basting with a set stitch length.
The machine detects how the fabric is being
moved and makes adjustments to ensure the set
stitch length.
Names of Parts and Their
Functions
Replace the presser foot to be used with the stitch
regulator, according to your needs.
a Stitch regulator quilting foot
Used for general quilting.
b Stitch regulator open toe quilting foot
This presser foot enables you to easily check the needle and
stitching. Carefully sew, making sure that the fabric does not
catch on the tips of the presser foot. Do not use this foot when
selecting [Basting mode].
c Stitch regulator echo quilting foot
Used for echo quilting. This presser foot is also suitable for
sewing furry fabric or fabric with an uneven surface or for
sewing different types of fabric together.
d Presser foot slot
e Stitch regulator window
The inner sensor detects fabric movement.
f Presser foot release button
Push this toward you to remove the presser foot.
g Notch in the stitch regulator
h Connector of the stitch regulator
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the included
screwdriver (large). Otherwise, the needle may touch
the quilting foot, causing it to break and causing injury.
Free-Motion Quilting/Basting with
the Stitch Regulator
Quilting
Various Stitches
115
3
Attaching the Stitch Regulator
and Presser Foot
1
Press (Needle position button) to
raise the needle.
2 Touch to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
[OK] to continue.
3 Raise the presser foot lever.
4 Remove the presser foot and presser foot
holder. (page 48)
5 Prepare the presser foot to be used with
the stitch regulator.
6 If the presser foot already attached to the
stitch regulator will not be used, slowly
push the presser foot release button
toward you as far as it will go, and then
remove the presser foot after it has been
ejected.
7 Correctly orient the presser foot, insert it
horizontally into the presser foot slot,
and then push it in as far as it will go.
a Presser foot slot
b Presser foot
8 Pull the presser foot slightly toward you
to check if it is firmly secured. If the
presser foot comes out, reinsert it as far
as it will go.
9 Align the notch in the stitch regulator
with the screw on the presser bar, and
then firmly tighten the screw.
CAUTION
• Before installing or removing the stitch regulator or
replacing the presser foot, be sure to touch to lock
all keys and buttons. Unintentional operations such as
pressing a button may cause the machine to start
operating, resulting in injuries.
• We strongly advise to not use the stitch regulator open
toe quilting foot when in [Basting mode], as the
possibility of needle breakage is increased.
IMPORTANT
• Do not install the stitch regulator onto the machine if the
stitch regulator is wet or has been damaged from being
dropped. The laser sensor may have been damaged.
Note
• Before using the stitch regulator, check the
window at the bottom. Remove any
accumulated dust or lint with a cotton swab or
other soft object without damaging the built-in
lens. Do not use hard objects such as needles
or tweezers.
a Stitch regulator window
CAUTION
• Make sure that the presser foot is firmly secured.
Otherwise, the presser foot may come off or the needle
may break, causing injuries.
Quilting
116
10 Plug the connector of the stitch regulator
into the jack on the back of your
machine.
11 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
Replacing the Presser Foot with
the Stitch Regulator Installed
1
Press (Needle position button) to
raise the needle.
2 Touch to lock all keys and buttons.
3 To replace the presser foot, refer to steps
6 through 8 of “Attaching the Stitch
Regulator and Presser Foot” on
page 115. After replacing the presser
foot, make sure that the thread is not
caught in the stitch regulator.
* If the presser foot has been raised, lowering it will
make it easier to replace it.
4 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
Memo
• Make sure that the stitch regulator harness
does not catch on the presser foot lever.
CAUTION
• When replacing the presser foot, make sure that the
needle does not strike your fingers or the presser foot.
Otherwise, injuries may result, or the needle or presser
foot may become damaged.
Memo
• We recommend removing the fabric from the
machine before replacing the presser foot.
IMPORTANT
• If the thread has been caught in the stitch regulator,
remove the presser foot, and then reattach it, making
sure to avoid the thread.
a The machine cannot sew if the thread is caught.
Quilting
Various Stitches
117
3
Selecting the Stitch Pattern and
Stitch Regulator Mode
1
With the Utility Stitch screen displayed,
install the stitch regulator onto the
machine.
When the message appears, touch [OK]. The stitch
regulator sewing screen appears.
2 Touch a key to select the appropriate
mode.
* If using the foot controller with any mode, stepping
on the foot controller starts sewing when the stitch
regulator detects fabric movement. Release the
foot controller to stop sewing.
If using the “Start/Stop” button, pressing the button
starts sewing when the stitch regulator detects
fabric movement. Press the button again to stop
sewing.
a Intermittent mode:
Stitches are sewn when the fabric is moved the set
length. When the fabric is not being moved, the
needle is raised, the machine enters standby, and
the “Start/Stop” button flashes. Sewing starts when
the fabric is moved while the button is flashing.
A message appears and sewing ends when the
fabric has not been moved for a certain period of
time.
b Continuous mode:
Stitches are continuously sewn after sewing has
been started. This is suitable for sewing shapes
with corners such as rectangles.
If the fabric is not being moved, stitches are slowly
sewn at the same location. Since stitches continue
to be sewn at the same location, be careful that the
thread does not become tangled.
c Basting mode:
Stitches are sewn spaced far apart. Stitches are
sewn when the fabric is moved the set length.
When the fabric is not being moved, the needle is
raised, the machine enters standby, and the “Start/
Stop” button flashes. Sewing starts when the fabric
is moved while the button is flashing.
A message appears and sewing ends when the
fabric has not been moved for a certain period of
time.
Sew trial stitches, check the stitching and how
easily the thread can be removed, and then adjust
the thread tension if necessary.
d Turn on or off [Stitch regulator]. When switched off,
normal free-motion sewing is possible. Since the
machine does not detect fabric movement, feed
the fabric at a constant speed while you sew.
3 Select a stitch pattern, and then set the
stitch length.
Memo
• If the stitch regulator was installed with a
screen other than the utility stitch screen
displayed, touch [Sewing] in the home page
screen to display the stitch regulator sewing
screen.
d
abc
CAUTION
• While using the stitch regulator open toe quilting foot
with [Stitch regulator] switched off, be careful not to pull
the fabric forcefully, which could cause the needle to
break.
Memo
• When using a straight stitch to sew small parts
or stippling, we recommend setting the stitch
length between 1 mm and 1.5 mm.
• Zigzag stitch patterns are suitable for thread
painting.
Quilting
118
4 Specify any other settings.
a Display the guidelines. (page 65)
b Switch on or off the projection of the stitch
regulator sensor position. Select a projection color
different from the projector’s background color
selected in the settings screen. Refer to step 1 of
“Free-Motion Quilting/Basting with the Stitch
Regulator” on page 118.
c Switch on or off the projected status of the stitch
regulator. Refer to step
1 of “Free-Motion Quilting/
Basting with the Stitch Regulator” on page 118.
d Adjust the height of the stitch regulator presser
foot.
Free-Motion Quilting/Basting with
the Stitch Regulator
1
Position the fabric on the machine. At
this time, correctly orient the fabric and
position it so that it is under the stitch
regulator sensor during sewing.
a This projected line indicates the position where the
sensor can detect the fabric; it must be on the
fabric while sewing.
b This projection indicates the status of the stitch
regulator.
Lit in green: Ready to sew or sewing.
Flashing green: Standby in intermittent mode or
basting mode.
Lit in red: Not ready to sew.
Off: The stitch regulator function is switched off, or
the projection of the stitch regulator status is
switched off (refer to step
4 of “Selecting the Stitch
Pattern and Stitch Regulator Mode” on page 117).
2 Pull the bobbin thread up through the
fabric.
* Refer to “Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread” on
page 41.
Memo
• For details on the other keys, refer to “Sewing
Screens” on page 19.
Note
• Before sewing your project, sew trial stitches
with fabric and thread that are the same as
those used in your project.
The result may vary depending on the fabric
and thread used, stitch regulator mode,
presser foot height, and fabric movement.
• If stitches are skipped or the thread becomes
frayed, try sewing test stitches under the
following conditions.
- Use the included ball point needle (gold
colored) 90/14.
- Specify a stitch length of 2 mm or less (when
selecting [Intermittent mode] or [Continuous
mode]).
d
cba
CAUTION
• If the thread tension is too tight, pulling on the fabric
could cause needle breakage.
• Move the fabric, making sure that your hands keep away
from the needle during sewing. Otherwise, injuries may
result.
Note
• If there is no fabric under the sensor, it will not
be able to detect fabric movement and will not
be able to sew at the set stitch length. If
necessary, make sure that the fabric has a
size that the sensor can detect.
a The fabric cannot be detected because it is
in front of the position where the sensor can
detect it.
b Sensor location
Quilting
Various Stitches
119
3
3 Lower the presser foot. Depress the foot
controller or press the “Start/Stop”
button, and then move the fabric.
Quilting
a Stitching
Basting
Stitches will be sewn at the set stitch length in
response to the speed at which the fabric is
moved.
4 Release the foot controller or press the
“Start/Stop” button to stop sewing.
Sew hand-look quilting stitch patterns using the
threads recommended below:
Upper thread: Use transparent nylon thread or
lightweight thread that matches the color of the
fabric for this thread to appear invisible.
Bobbin thread: Use a color that contrasts with the
fabric for the stitch pattern to stand out.
Note
• Before sewing, make sure that a presser foot
has been attached to the stitch regulator.
• Adjust the height of the stitch regulator presser
foot so that the fabric can be smoothly moved.
If the distance between the stitch regulator
sensor and the fabric is too large, the sensor
may not be able to accurately detect fabric
movement. In that case, lower the height of
the stitch regulator presser foot without
hindering fabric movement.
• When the needle is up, move the fabric slowly
and carefully. If the fabric is moved too quickly,
an alarm will sound.
• Do not rotate the fabric while sewing.
Otherwise, the stitch regulator sensor will not
be able to correctly detect fabric movement.
• In order to sew stitches with a uniform length,
move the fabric at a speed that does not cause
the alarm to sound. The alarm volume can be
adjusted in the settings screen.
• In order to sew stitches at the set stitch length,
move the fabric at least as much as the set
stitch length.
Memo
• With the needle stop position set to
(down), the needle remains lowered when
sewing stops.
When the foot controller is released after you
stop moving the fabric, or when the “Start/
Stop” button is pressed to finish sewing, an
alarm sounds, and then the needle is lowered.
• Touch [Memory] to save the current settings.
To retrieve the settings at a later time, touch
[Retrieve]. For details, refer to “Saving the
Utility Stitch Settings” on page 63.
Hand-look Quilting
Memo
• For most fabrics and threads, using a 90/14
needle will result in a clean finish.
• To bring up more of the bobbin thread,
increase the thread tension.
• S-03, S-04, S-05 are made up of several short
stitches.
MY CUSTOM STITCH
120
By using the MY CUSTOM STITCH function, you
can register stitches you have created yourself.
You can also sew designs combining MY
CUSTOM STITCH creations with built-in
characters. (page 59)
1 Draw the stitch design on the grid sheet.
Place points where the stitch pattern
intersects with the grid, and connect all
the points with a line.
2 Determine the x and y coordinates of
each of the marked points.
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Designing a Stitch
Memo
• Stitches that you create with MY CUSTOM
STITCH can be a maximum of 7 mm (approx.
9/32 inch) wide and 37 mm (approx. 1-1/3
inches) long.
Memo
• Simplify the design so that it can be sewn as a
continuous line. For a more attractive stitch,
close the design by intersecting lines.
If the design is to be repeated and linked, the
start point and end point of the design should
be at the same height.
Memo
• This will determine the stitch design that will
be sewn.
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Various Stitches
121
3
Key Functions (MY CUSTOM
STITCH Screen)
a This area displays the stitch being created.
b Displays the number of the present set point over
the total number of points in the stitch.
c Displays the y-coordinate of over the x-
coordinate of .
Entering Points
1
Touch [Sewing] in the home page screen
and then [Character Decorative Stitch].
2 Touch .
3 Use to move to the
coordinates of the first point on the grid.
Entering Stitch Data
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Touch this key to select
whether one or three stitches
will be sewn between two
points.
121
Single/triple
stitching key
Touch this key to delete a
selected point.
121
Point delete key
Touch this key to exit the
entering stitch data screen.
—
Return key
Touch this key to sew a test
of the stitch.
121
Test key
Touch this key to store the
stitch being created.
123
MY CUSTOM
STITCH memory
key
Touch this key to group
points together and move
them together.
122
Block move key
Touch this key to insert new
points on the stitch design.
123
Insert key
Touch this key to set a point
on the stitch design.
121, 122
Set key
a
m
i
h
g
b
d
f
c
e
l
k
j
o
n
p
q
Use these keys to move
over the display area.
121, 122
Arrow keys
Use these keys to move
from point to point on the
stitch, or to the first or last
point entered on the stitch.
122, 123
Point-to-point key
Touch this key to edit the
preset stitch patterns and
saved stitch patterns.
124
Import stitch
patterns key
Touch this key to change the
direction of the grid sheet.
—
Grid direction key
Touch this key to see an
enlarged version of the stitch
being created.
—
Enlarger key
Touch this key to view an
image of the stitch.
121
Preview key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
MY CUSTOM STITCH
122
4 Touch to add the point indicated by
.
5 Select whether one stitch or triple
stitches will be sewn between the first
two points.
* To sew triple stitches, touch the key so that it
appears as .
6 Repeat the steps for each point that you
have drawn on the grid sheet until the
stitch design is drawn on the screen as a
continuous line.
* Touch to delete a selected point entered.
* Touch [Test] to sew a test-run of the stitch. Touch
[Edit] to finish trial sewing and return to the
previous screen.
* Touch to view an image of the stitch.
a Currently selected point/Total number of points
b Coordinates of
7 Once you finish entering the stitch data,
touch to save the stitch pattern.
Moving a Point
1
Touch or to move to the point
that you want to move.
* To move to the first point, touch .
* To move to the last point, touch .
2 Use to move the point.
Moving Part or All of the Design
1
Touch or to move to the first
point that you want to move. Touch .
The selected point and all points that were entered
after it are selected.
a
b
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Various Stitches
123
3
2 Touch or to move the section, and
then touch .
The section will be moved.
Inserting New Points
1
Touch or to move to a place on
the design where you want to add a new
point.
2 Touch .
A new point is entered and moves to it.
3 Use to move the point.
Saving Custom Stitch Patterns
1
Touch .
2 Refer to “Saving Character/Decorative
Stitch Patterns” on page 64, and then
save the custom stitch pattern.
Retrieving Custom Stitches
Refer to “Retrieving Stitch Patterns” on page 64.
Using the Memory Function (MY
CUSTOM STITCH)
MY CUSTOM STITCH
124
Editing Retrieved Custom Stitch
Patterns
1
Touch .
2 Select the stitch category. If selecting ,
touch the desired destination.
a Preset stitch patterns.
b Saved stitch patterns.
c Retrieve from the machine’s memory.
d Retrieve from a USB media.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
3 Select the stitch pattern you want to edit
and touch [OK].
a
b
c
d
Embroidering Preparation
Basic Embroidery
125
4
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine
for embroidery.
1 Touch . Remove the presser foot and
presser foot holder. (page 48)
2 Position the embroidery foot “W” on the
presser foot bar by aligning the notch of
the presser foot to the screw.
Side view
3 Hold the embroidery foot in place with
your right hand, and then use the
included multi-purpose screwdriver to
securely tighten the presser foot holder
screw.
a Presser foot holder screw
4 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and
the previous screen is displayed.
Chapter 4
Basic Embroidery
Embroidering Preparation
Embroidery Step by Step
Aim Action
Reference
Presser foot
attachment
Attach embroidery foot “W”. 125
Checking the
needle
Use needle 75/11 for
embroidery.
36
Embroidery unit/
Support table
attachment
Attach the embroidery unit and
support table.
126
Bobbin thread
setup
For the bobbin thread, wind
embroidery bobbin thread and
set it in place.
37
Fabric
preparation
Attach a stabilizer material to
the fabric, and hoop it in the
embroidery frame.
127
Embroidery
frame
attachment
Attach the embroidery frame to
the embroidery unit.
131
Pattern
selection
Turn the main power to ON,
and select an embroidery
pattern.
134
Checking the
layout
Check and adjust the size and
position of the embroidery.
139
Embroidery
thread setup
Set up embroidery thread
according to the pattern.
42
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W”
CAUTION
• When attaching an embroidery foot, always touch
on the screen. You may accidentally press the “Start/
Stop” button and possibly cause injury.
• Be sure to use the embroidery foot “W” when doing
embroidery. Otherwise, the needle may break and cause
injury.
• Use the included multi-purpose screwdriver to firmly
tighten the screw of the presser foot holder. If the screw
is loose, the needle may strike the embroidery foot and
break, possibly causing injury.
Embroidering Preparation
126
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
1
Turn the main power to OFF, and remove
the flat bed attachment.
2 Insert the embroidery unit connection
into the connection port of the machine
until it snaps into place.
3 Raise the three legs on the back of the
support table until they snap into place,
and then position the support table so
that the side with the marks face up.
4 Align the marks on the back of the
machine and on the support table, and
then insert the tab into the machine.
a Tab
5 Turn the main power to ON.
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
CAUTION
• Do not move the machine with the embroidery unit
attached. The embroidery unit could fall off and cause
injury.
IMPORTANT
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away from the
embroidery carriage and embroidery frame when the
machine is embroidering. Damage or malfunction may
result.
• Be sure to turn off the power before attaching or
removing the embroidery unit. Otherwise, the machine
may be damaged.
• Do not touch the inner connector of the embroidery unit.
The pins on the embroidery unit connection may be
damaged.
• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery unit carriage
or pick up the unit by the carriage. Otherwise, the
embroidery unit may be damaged.
• Do not push on the carriage when attaching the
embroidery unit onto the machine. Moving the carriage
may damage the embroidery unit.
• Make sure that there is enough space for the carriage of
the embroidery unit to move. If the embroidery frame
comes into contact with an object, the pattern may not
be embroidered correctly, or damage may result. 50 cm
(approx. 20 inches) clearance needed from back
embroidery unit.
• Do not touch the embroidery carriage until the
initialization finishes.
Note
• When embroidering, install the support table.
Using the support table to support the
embroidery frame and fabric allows you to
maintain stitching quality.
• To avoid distorting your embroidery design, do
not touch the embroidery carriage and frame
when the machine is embroidering.
• Store the embroidery unit in a safe place to
prevent damage to the unit.
Memo
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches
with the embroidery unit attached. Touch
and [Sewing] in the home page screen.
Note
• Be sure there is no gap between the
embroidery unit and the machine. If there is a
gap, the embroidery patterns will not
embroider with the correct registration.
Embroidering Preparation
Basic Embroidery
127
4
6 Touch [OK].
The carriage will move to the initialization position.
Removing the Embroidery Unit
1
Remove the embroidery frame.
* For details on removing the embroidery frame,
refer to “Removing the Embroidery Frame” on
page 132.
2 Touch [Embroidery] in the home page
screen, then touch .
The carriage will move to the removal position.
3 Turn the main power to OFF.
4 Press the release lever, and pull the
embroidery unit away from the machine.
a Release lever
Attaching Stabilizer to Fabric
1
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the
wrong side of the fabric.
• Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger than
the embroidery frame being used.
a Fusible side of stabilizer
b Fabric (wrong side)
c Size of the embroidery frame
Memo
• Utility stitches can also be sewn with the
support table attached. We recommend that
the support table always be attached to the
machine.
Before transporting the machine, pull the
release lever toward you to remove the
support table.
a Release lever
Hooping the Fabric in the
Embroidery Frame
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 2 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 2 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch) may cause the needle to break
and cause injury.
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery when
embroidering stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics,
fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics which cause
pattern shrinkage. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury.
Note
• When using fabrics that cannot be ironed
(such as terry cloth or fabrics that have loops
which expand when ironed) or in places where
ironing is difficult, position the stabilizer
material under the fabric without fusing it, then
position the fabric and stabilizer in the
embroidery frame.
a
b
c
Embroidering Preparation
128
Types of Embroidery Frames
Inserting Fabric into Embroidery
Frame (465 mm × 297 mm
(approx. 18-1/4 inches × 11-5/8
inches))
1
Loosen the lever on the outer frame, and
then remove the inner frame.
* If the inner frame cannot be removed, loosen the
frame adjustment screw.
a Lever
b Frame adjustment screw
2 With the embroidery frame guide on the
left, place the fabric on top of the outer
frame. Check that the rectangular area
(4) of the inner frame faces up, and then
re-insert the inner frame, making sure to
align the inner frame’s with the outer
frame’s , to clamp the fabric.
The top of the inner frame must be
tucked under the flanges at the top of the
outer frame.
a Inner frame’s
b Outer frame’s
c Embroidery frame guide
d Rectangular area
Memo
• When embroidering small pieces of fabric that
cannot be hooped in an embroidery frame, use
stabilizer material as a base. After lightly
ironing the fabric to the stabilizer material,
hoop it in the embroidery frame. If stabilizer
material cannot be ironed onto the fabric,
attach it with a basting stitch. After completing
the embroidery, remove the stabilizer material
carefully.
a Fabric
b Stabilizer
c Basting
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such as
towel or corduroy, use water soluble stabilizer
(sold separately) for best results. In the case
of thick terry cloth towels we recommend that
you place a piece of water soluble stabilizer on
the top surface of the towel. This will help to
reduce the nap of the toweling and result in
more attractive embroidery.
Embroidery frame Embroidering area
465 mm × 297 mm
(approx. 18-1/4 inches × 11-5/8
inches)
(page 128)
272 mm × 272 mm
(approx. 10-5/8 inches × 10-5/8
inches)
(page 129)
180 mm × 130 mm
(approx. 7 inches × 5 inches)
(page 130)
100 mm × 100 mm
(approx. 4 inches × 4 inches)
(page 130)
a
b
c
Memo
• If the inner frame for this hoop is installed
incorrectly, it may come apart and embroidery
will not be performed correctly.
Embroidering Preparation
Basic Embroidery
129
4
3 With the lever at the top tightened, push
the inner frame down into the outer
frame.
* Loosen the lever at the bottom.
a Tighten the lever at the top.
4 Push the inner frame down into the outer
frame in the order shown (from top to
bottom).
5 Gently smooth out the fabric. With the
lever at the bottom loosened, slightly
tighten the frame adjustment screw, and
then pull the edges of the fabric to
remove any slack.
a Frame adjustment screw
6 After stretching the fabric, make sure that
it is taut and that the inner and outer
frames are aligned.
* Make sure the inner and outer frames are even
before you start embroidering.
a Outer frame
b Inner frame
c Fabric
7 Tighten the lever at the bottom.
* If the lever cannot be tightened, loosen the frame
adjustment screw.
Inserting Fabric into Embroidery
Frame (272 mm × 272 mm
(approx. 10-5/8 inches × 10-5/8
inches))
1
Loosen the lever on the outer frame, and
then remove the inner frame.
* Refer to step 1 of “Inserting Fabric into
Embroidery Frame (465 mm × 297 mm (approx.
18-1/4 inches × 11-5/8 inches))” on page 128.
2 Perform steps 2 through 5 of “Inserting
the Fabric into Embroidery Frame
without Levers” on page 130.
3 Tighten the frame adjustment screw and
tighten the lever.
* Refer to “Inserting Fabric into Embroidery Frame
(465 mm × 297 mm (approx. 18-1/4 inches × 11-5/
8 inches))” on page 128, then go to step
7.
Note
• If the fabric is not taut at the top, such as when
thick fabric is used, slightly loosen the lever at
the top, loosen the frame adjustment screw at
the top, and then pull the edges of the fabric to
remove any slack.
Embroidering Preparation
130
Inserting the Fabric into
Embroidery Frame without
Levers
1
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment
screw and remove the inner frame.
a Frame adjustment screw
b Inner frame
2 Lay the fabric right side up on top of the
outer frame.
3 Re-insert the inner frame making sure to
align the inner frame’s with the outer
frame’s .
a Inner frame’s
b Outer frame’s
4 Slightly tighten the frame adjustment
screw, and then remove the slack in the
fabric by pulling on the edges and
corners.
5 Gently smooth out the fabric. Make sure
fabric is flat and without wrinkles.
* After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.
* Make sure the inner and outer frames are even
before you start embroidering.
a Outer frame
b Inner frame
c Fabric
6 Tighten the frame adjustment screw.
Return the frame adjustment screw to its
initial position.
Note
• If the fabric is not securely held in the
embroidery frame, the embroidery design will
embroider out poorly. Insert the fabric on a
level surface, and gently stretch the fabric taut
in the embroidery frame.
a
b
Memo
• You can use the included multi-purpose
screwdriver, setting the position to “3”, when
you loosen or tighten the frame adjustment
screw.
Embroidering Preparation
Basic Embroidery
131
4
Using the Embroidery Sheet (Sold
Separately)
When you want to embroider the pattern in a
particular place, use the embroidery sheet (sold
separately) with the embroidery frame.
1 With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the
fabric you want to embroider.
2 Place the embroidery sheet on the inner
frame. Align the guide lines on the
embroidery sheet with the mark you
made on the fabric.
3 Gently stretch the fabric so there are no
folds or wrinkles, and press the inner
frame into the outer frame.
4 Remove the embroidery sheet.
1 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
raise the embroidery foot.
2 Align the embroidery frame guide with
the right edge of the embroidery frame
holder.
a Embroidery frame holder
b Embroidery frame guide
a Inner frame
b Guide line
c Mark
a Inner frame
b Outer frame
Attaching the Embroidery Frame
Note
• When attaching/removing the 465 mm × 297
mm (approx. 18-1/4 inches × 11-5/8 inches)
embroidery frame to/from the machine, angle
the embroidery frame so that the lever at the
top does not hit the embroidery foot, as shown
in the illustration. If the embroidery frame lever
is hidden by the fabric, attach/remove it so that
the rectangular area (indentation) of the inner
frame does not touch the presser foot.
a Embroidery frame lever
b Embroidery foot
c Rectangular area (indentation) (Make sure
that this area does not touch the embroidery
foot.)
• Wind embroidery bobbin thread and insert the
bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.
Check that there is enough thread in the
bobbin.
• Make sure that the frame-securing lever is
correctly lowered after the embroidery frame
has been installed in the embroidery frame
holder.
Embroidering Preparation
132
3 Slide the embroidery frame into the
holder, making sure to align the
embroidery frame’s with the holder’s
.
a Arrow mark
4 Lower the frame-securing lever to be
level with the frame to secure the
embroidery frame in the embroidery
frame holder.
a Frame-securing lever
Removing the Embroidery Frame
1
Raise the frame-securing lever.
2 Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
Many factors are involved in achieving a beautiful
embroidery result. Using the appropriate
stabilizer (page 127) and hooping the fabric in
the embroidery frame (page 130) are two
important factors mentioned earlier. There are
several other factors as well.
Thread
Bobbin Case
Standard bobbin case (recommended for
sewing and for embroidering with included 60
weight bobbin thread)
a Standard bobbin case (green marking on the
screw)
Standard bobbin case originally installed in the
machine has a green marking on the screw. We
recommend using the included embroidery
bobbin thread with this bobbin case. Do not
adjust the tension screw on this bobbin case with
the green marked screw.
Embroidering Attractive Finishes
CAUTION
• When embroidering large items (especially jackets or
quilts), do not let the fabric hang off of the table.
Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move freely and
the embroidery frame may strike the needle, causing the
needle to break and possibly causing injury.
Note
• Recommended to do trial embroidery using
same fabric and threads as project in order to
check the embroidering results.
Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for use with this
machine.
For most embroidery applications, the upper
thread should be 40-weight rayon or polyester
embroidery thread.
Bobbin thread Use the included 60 weight embroidery bobbin
thread or recommended 60 weight embroidery
bobbin thread.
Embroidering Preparation
Basic Embroidery
133
4
Alternate bobbin case (recommended for
embroidering with 90 weight bobbin thread or
any other specialty thread when adjusting the
bobbin thread tension)
a Alternate bobbin case (no color on the screw)
The bobbin case with no color on the screw is set
with tighter tension for embroidery with different
weights of bobbin threads and a variety of
embroidery techniques. This bobbin case is
identified with a dark colored mark on the inside
of the bobbin cavity. The tension screw on this
case can be adjusted if necessary. (page 166)
Embroidery Needle Plate Cover
Under some conditions, based on the type of
fabric, stabilizer or thread being used, there may
be some looping in the upper thread. In this case,
insert the embroidery needle plate cover into the
notches on the needle plate as shown below.
To remove the embroidery needle plate cover,
place your fingernail in the groove and lift the plate
out.
Embroidery Speed
Decrease the embroidery speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy fabrics and
when using a specialty thread like a metallic
thread. You can specify the embroidery speed in
the settings screen. SPM is the number of stitches
embroidered in one minute.
Embroidery Foot Height
When embroidering thick or puffy fabrics, a better
result can be achieved by adjusting the embroidery
foot height in the settings screen.
Touch , and set the [Embroidery Foot Height] to
a larger number in order to increase the space
between the embroidery foot and the needle plate.
a Groove
b Projection
c Notch
CAUTION
• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far as
possible to attach it. If the embroidery needle plate cover
is not securely attached, it may cause the needle to
break and cause injury.
Note
• Do not use the embroidery needle plate cover
for any applications other than embroidery.
Embroidering Patterns
134
Copyright Information
The patterns stored in the machine and patterns
sold separately are intended for private use only.
Any public or commercial use of copyrighted
patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is
strictly prohibited.
a Embroidery patterns
b Character patterns (page 137)
c Decorative alphabet patterns
d Frame patterns
e Buttonhole/Eyelet patterns/Design Patterns (for
Buttonhole Decoration)/Utility embroidery patterns
f Split embroidery patterns (page 212)
g Long-Stitch embroidery patterns
Before embroidering, refer to the “Embroidery
Design Guide”, which includes precautions for
obtaining best results.
h Quilt sashes and edge-to-edge quilt patterns
(page 195, page 201, page 203, page 208)
i Disney patterns
j Couching patterns (page 191)
k Patterns saved in the machine’s memory, USB
media, etc. (page 168)
l Picture Play embroidery function (page 177)
m My Design Center (page 227)
n Touch this key to position the embroidery unit for
storage (page 127)
1 Touch [Embroidery] in the home page
screen and then the category key you
want to embroider.
a Pattern category keys
2 Select the sub-category, and then select
the pattern that you want to embroider.
a Sub-category
b Embroidery pattern
3 Touch [Set].
a Touch this key to see detailed information about
the selected pattern.
Embroidering Patterns
Embroidery Pattern Categories
Memo
• Refer to the “Embroidery Design Guide” for
more information on each category’s
embroidery pattern.
Visit https://s.brother/cmdae/
.
h
f
a
n
e
g
c
l
j
i
m
k
d
b
Selecting Embroidery Patterns
a
b
a
a
Embroidering Patterns
Basic Embroidery
135
4
4 If necessary, touch [Edit] to edit the
selected pattern.
* Refer to “Embroidery Edit Screen” on page 142
about the “Edit” display.
5 Touch [Embroidery].
The embroidery screen is displayed.
6 If necessary, touch [Layout] to reposition
the pattern.
* Refer to “Embroidery Screen” on page 145.
7 Start embroidering. (page 140)
The embroidery patterns can be filtered based on
size or number of thread colors.
1 Select the category of embroidery
patterns to be filtered.
* The following categories can be filtered.
2 Touch [Filter].
3 Specify the upper and lower limits of the
embroidery pattern size or the number of
thread colors.
a Specify the upper and lower limits of the
embroidery pattern size.
b Specify the number of thread colors. Touch the
check boxes for the desired number of thread
colors so that the check mark appears.
c Reset the specified settings.
Filtering the Embroidery Patterns
a
c
b
Embroidering Patterns
136
4 Touch [Apply].
The patterns that meet the specified conditions
appear. If a pattern size is specified, the patterns
are sorted by size. If the number of thread colors is
specified, the patterns are sorted by the number of
thread colors. If both pattern size and number of
thread colors are specified, the patterns are sorted
by size.
5 Select a pattern, and then touch [Set].
a Reset the filter.
b Switch between descending and ascending order.
1 Touch .
2 Touch the key of the frame shape you
want to embroider in the top part of the
screen.
And then, touch the key of the frame
pattern you want to embroider.
a Frame shapes
b Frame patterns
3 Follow steps 3 through 7 of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns” on page 134.
1 Touch .
2 Select a pattern, and then touch to
change the size.
a
b
Selecting Frame Patterns
Selecting Buttonhole/Eyelet
Patterns
a
b
Embroidering Patterns
Basic Embroidery
137
4
1 Touch .
2 Touch the key of the font you want to
embroider.
a If the check box is selected, a preview of all
characters will appear after the font has been
selected.
3 If a preview of the characters is
displayed, confirm that it is the desired
font, and then touch [OK].
4 Specify the size of the characters to be
entered. Select the character category
and then type in the text.
a Change the font of the characters.
b Specify the character size.
c Move the cursor and select a character. (page 138)
d Switch between selecting multiple characters or
selecting a single character. (page 138)
e Delete the character.
f Add a line.
g Enter a space.
h Align the characters at the right, left or center.
(page 138)
i Change the spacing of the character patterns.
(page 144)
j Change the configuration of the character patterns.
(page 144)
5 Touch [Set].
6 Follow steps 4 through 7 of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns” on page 134.
Selecting Alphabet Character
Patterns
a
Memo
• When entering text, the cursor is positioned
after the last character entered. If the font or
character size setting is changed, the new
setting will be applied starting with the next
character entered.
a Cursor
• By selecting characters that have already
been entered, you can change the font and
character size. Refer to “Selecting Entered
Characters” on page 138.
a
c
b
d
e
f
g
hij
a
Embroidering Patterns
138
Selecting Entered Characters
In order to change the font or size of entered
characters, those characters must be selected.
Selecting a Single Character
In single character selection mode ( ), touch
to select the character to be changed.
a Selected character
Selecting Multiple Characters
In multiple character selection mode ( ), all
characters will be selected.
To deselect a character, touch it.
a Deselected character
Adding a New Line of Text
1
Type in the first line of characters, and
then touch .
2 Type in the second line of characters,
and then touch . Type in the third
line of characters.
3 Touch to change the text alignment.
Note
• Add new lines and change the arrangement of
the text when entering characters. No changes
can be made after [Set] has been touched.
a
a
Note
• In multiple character selection mode ( )
with multiple lines of text, all characters in one
line will be selected. To select characters in a
different line of text, touch that line.
: Right alignment : Left alignment
: Center alignment
Embroidering Patterns
Basic Embroidery
139
4
Checking the Needle Drop Point
with the Projector
With the projector pointer, you can check the
needle drop point before embroidering.
1 Touch in the embroidery screen.
The pointer of the projector indicates the needle
drop point onto the fabric.
a Needle drop point
Checking the Pattern Position
The carriage moves and shows the pattern
position. Watch the embroidery frame closely to
make sure the pattern will be embroidered in the
right place.
1 Touch .
2 Touch the key for the position that you
want to check.
a Touch to check the selected position.
b Touch to check the entire embroidering area.
The carriage will move to show the pattern
position.
3 Touch [OK].
Confirming the Pattern Position
Memo
• The pattern can be projected onto the fabric in
order to check the position of and edit the
pattern. (page 154)
Memo
• The color and shape of the pointer can be
changed in the settings screen.
Note
• With fabric that has a very uneven surface
such as thick fabric or quilting, the fabric
thickness may not be correctly measured. In
this case, the pointer indication should be
used only as a reference.
Memo
• Touch so that the pointer of the projector
indicates the needle drop point onto the fabric.
CAUTION
• Do not lower the needle when the embroidery frame is
moving. If the needle is down, it could break and result in
injury.
a
b
Embroidering Patterns
140
1 Prepare embroidery thread colors as
shown on the screen.
a Embroidery color order
2 Using the automatic needle threader,
thread the machine for the first color.
3 Lower the embroidery foot, then press
the “Start/Stop” button to start
embroidering.
When the first color is completely embroidered, the
machine will stop.
On the embroidery color order display, the next
color will move to the top.
4 Remove the thread for the first color from
the machine. Thread the machine with
the next color.
Embroidering Patterns
Memo
• Either the thread color name or the thread
number appears in this screen, depending on
the setting selected in the settings screen. You
can also select a thread brand. (page 25)
• The automatic thread cutting function and the
thread trimming function can be used.
(page 141)
a
Memo
• A setting in the settings screen can be
specified so that pressing the “Start/Stop”
button before starting embroidering
automatically lowers the embroidery foot.
(page 25)
• If you want to get more attractive finishes, try
the procedures below;
- After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop”
button again to stop the machine.
- Trim the excess thread at the beginning of
embroidering. If the thread at the beginning
of embroidering is under the embroidery
foot, raise the embroidery foot, then trim the
excess thread.
• If there is thread left over from the beginning of
embroidering, it may be embroidered over as
you continue embroidering the pattern, making
it very difficult to deal with the thread after the
pattern is finished. Trim the threads at the
beginning of each thread change.
Embroidering Patterns
Basic Embroidery
141
4
5 Repeat the same steps for embroidering
the remaining colors.
a Current stitch numbers/Total stitch numbers
b Current time/Total time
c The part of pattern to be embroidered next
d Embroidered colors/Total colors
When the last color is embroidered, [Finished
embroidering.] will appear on the display. Touch
[OK], and the display will return to the original
screen.
6 Cut the excess thread jumps within the
color, if necessary.
Thread Cutting/Trimming
Function
The automatic thread cutting function (End Color
Trim) will cut the thread at the end of
embroidering each color.
The thread trimming function (Jump Stitch Trim)
will automatically trim any excess thread
jumps within the color. These functions are initially
turned on.
a Jump stitch
1 On the embroidery screen, touch .
2 Turn on or off the thread cutting/trimming
function.
a Turn on or off the automatic thread cutting function
(End Color Trim).
b Turn on or off the thread trimming function (Jump
Stitch Trim).
c Touch or to select the length of jump
stitch. For example, when the value is set to 25
mm (approx. 1 inch) and the machine will not trim a
jump stitch of 25 mm or less before moving to the
next stitching.
b
c
a d
Memo
• If design has many trims, it is recommended to
select a higher jump stitch trim setting in order
to reduce the amount of excess tails on
backside of fabric.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length
selected, the fewer number of times the
machine will trim. In this case, more jump
stitches remain on the surface of the fabric.
c
a
b
Key Functions (Embroidery)
142
Using these keys, you can edit the pattern as you
like.
Key Functions
(Embroidery)
Embroidery Edit Screen
Memo
• If a key display is grayed out, you cannot use
that function with the selected pattern.
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Touch this key to select the
magnification ratio.
—
Magnify key
Touch this key to move the
canvas when it is magnified.
—
Hand tool key
Shows the embroidery
frames that can be used for
the selected pattern.
128
Available
embroidery frames
This shows the size of the
entire combined pattern.
—
Pattern size
Touch this key to scan the
fabric to align the embroidery
position.
157
Fabric scan key
Touch this key for a preview
of the embroidered image.
153
Preview key
Touch this key to display the
[Edit] window.
143
Edit key
i
e
o n k jm l
a
p
g
cb d
q
f
h
Touch this key to use the
projector to project the
pattern.
154
Projector key
This shows the color
sequence and stitching times
of each step of the pattern
currently selected.
140
Thread color
sequence
Touch this key to call up the
embroidery screen.
—
Embroidery key
Touch this key to save a
pattern in the machine’s
memory or USB media. The
pattern can also be
transferred to a computer via
a wireless network
connection.
167
Memory key
Touch this key to redo the
last operation that was
undone.
—
Redo key
Touch this key to undo the
last operation.
—
Undo key
Touch this key to delete the
selected pattern (the pattern
outlined by the red box).
—
Delete key
Touch this key to add another
pattern to the editing pattern.
147
Add key
Touch this key to change a
selected pattern when
multiple patterns are in the
screen.
147
Select key
Touch this key to allow
multiple patterns on the
screen to be selected at the
same time.
148, 149
Multiple selection
key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Key Functions (Embroidery)
Basic Embroidery
143
4
[Edit] Window
Touch [Edit] to display the [Edit] window.
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Touch this key to change the
size of the pattern.
146
Size key
Touch this key to display the
pattern moving window.
• : Move the pattern
in the direction shown by
the arrow.
• : Center the pattern.
—
Move key
Touch this key to group the
selected multiple patterns.
—
Group/ungroup key
Touch this key to display the
pattern rotating window.
Select the key indicating the
desired direction and angle
for rotating the pattern.
• : Reset the rotation.
• : Move the pattern
in the direction shown by
the arrow.
You can also rotate the
pattern by dragging the red
point at the corners of the
pattern.
—
Rotate key
Touch this key to change the
pattern to a horizontal mirror
image.
—
Flip Horizontal key
Touch this key to duplicate
the pattern.
—
Duplicate key
ba
dc
fe
hg
ji
lk
nm
po
Touch this key to change the
density. This setting is
available for some alphabet
character patterns, frame
patterns and so on. Other
patterns are available after
enabling patterns to change
the density. (page 146)
—
Density key
Touch this key to create and
edit repeated patterns.
150
Border function
(Designing
repeated patterns)
key
Touch this key to create an
appliqué piece by
embroidering an outline
around the selected pattern.
184
Appliqué piece key
Touch this key to change the
colors of the displayed
pattern.
169
Thread palette key
Touch this key to edit
character patterns.
144
Edit character
patterns key
Touch this key to align the
selected multiple patterns.
149
Alignment key
Touch this key to create
stippling, echo quilting, or
decorative fill around a
pattern.
194
Stippling key
Touch this key to extract the
outline of a pattern. The
extracted pattern can be
used with My Design Center.
249
Outline extraction
key
Touch this key to change the
embroidering order of
combined patterns.
172
Embroidering order
key
Touch this key to specify not
to embroider the selected
thread color.
171
No sew setting key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Key Functions (Embroidery)
144
Even after text has been entered, the characters
can be re-edited. Touch in the [Edit] window
to display the following screen.
Character Pattern Editing Screen
Memo
• If a key display is grayed out, you cannot use
that function with the selected pattern.
• Line feed key (7) and alignment key (0)
cannot be used when re-editing character
patterns.
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Change the font of the
characters. Touch this key to
display the available fonts.
—
Font type key
Change the size of characters. —
Character size key
Move the cursor and select a
character.
138
Character selection
keys
Switch between selecting
multiple characters or selecting
a single character.
• : Multiple character
selection mode
• : Single character
selection mode
138
Select multiple/one
key
—
Select the category of character. —
Delete the character. —
Delete key
Add a line.
This function is available when
entering characters.
138
Line feed key
jkln
b
i
e
f
g
h
a
c
d
m
Enter a space. —
Space key
Apply the character pattern
editing.
—
Set key
Align the characters at the right,
left or center. This function is
available when multiple lines of
characters are input.
138
Alignment key
Change the spacing of the
character patterns.
• : Increase the
character spacing.
• : Decrease the
character spacing.
• The spacing between the
selected character and the
next character is changed.
When the letter “D” is
selected:
When all characters are
selected:
• : Move the one selected
character up.
• : Move the one selected
character down.
• : Reset the spacing.
—
Character spacing
key
Change the configuration of the
character patterns.
• To arrange the character
patterns on an arc, touch
, , or .
: Make the arc flatter.
: Make the arc rounder.
• To arrange the character
patterns on an incline, touch
.
: Change the incline
counterclockwise.
: Change the incline
clockwise.
• : Reset the layout.
147
Array key
Change the character size for
fine adjustment.
—
Size key
Return to the previous screen. —
Cancel key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Key Functions (Embroidery)
Basic Embroidery
145
4
a Touch to check the needle drop point with the
projector. (page 139)
b Shows the embroidery frames that can be used for
the selected pattern. Be sure to use the proper
frame. (page 128)
c Shows a preview of the selected pattern.
d Shows the boundary for embroidering with the
selected frame in the settings screen. (page 25)
e Shows the size of the selected pattern.
f Shows how many stitches are in the selected
pattern and how many stitches have been
embroidered so far.
g Shows the number of colors in the selected pattern
and the number of the color currently being
embroidered.
h Shows the time necessary to embroider the pattern
and the time already spent embroidering the
pattern (not including time for changing thread
colors and automatically trimming the thread).
i Shows the part of the embroidery that will be
embroidered with the first thread color.
j Shows the order for thread color changes and the
embroidering time for each thread color.
* The displayed time is the approximate time that will
be required. The actual embroidering time may be
longer than the displayed time, depending on the
embroidery frame that is used. In addition, the
amount of time required to change thread colors is
not included.
[Layout] Window
Touch [Layout] to display the [Layout] window.
Embroidery Screen
b
j
a
c
d
e f g
i
h
Memo
• Some operations or functions are not available
for certain patterns. If the key appears in light
gray, you cannot use that function or operation
with the selected pattern.
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Touch this key to check the
needle drop point with the
projector.
139
Needle point check
key
Touch this key to scan the
fabric to align the embroidery
position.
157
Fabric scan key
Touch this key for a preview
of the embroidered image.
153
Preview key
Touch this key to use the
projector to project the
pattern.
154
Projector key
Touch this key to display the
pattern moving window.
—
Move key
Touch this key to display the
pattern rotating window.
—
Rotate key
Touch this key to add the
basting stitch to the pattern.
You can set the desired
basting distance.
173
Basting key
Touch this key to align the
embroidering position using
the built-in camera and
embroidery positioning
sticker.
159
Embroidery
positioning key
Touch this key to embroider
the selected pattern with a
single color (monochrome).
171
Uninterrupted
embroidery key
f
s
noq p
c
a
r m
e
g
i
k
h
j
b
d
l
Editing Patterns
146
1 Touch [Edit], and then touch .
2 Select the size changing method.
*:
Change the pattern size while maintaining the
number of stitches. Enlarged patterns will be less
dense, and reduced patterns will be more dense.
In order to maintain embroidering quality, there is a
limit to how much the embroidery pattern can be
enlarged or reduced.
*:
With this function, the pattern will be enlarged or
reduced at a larger ratio than with normal pattern
resizing.
Change the pattern size while maintaining the
thread density. The number of stitches is
recalculated depending on the pattern size.
If this key appears in light gray and is not available,
this function cannot be used with the selected
pattern.
When making a border pattern, change the size
using this function and then apply the border
setting.
Touch this key to reduce the
number of thread color
changes by rearranging the
embroidering order for the
selected pattern to combine
parts of the same thread
color.
170
Color sorting key
Touch this key to start pattern
connecting embroidering.
You can connect the patterns
accurately using the built-in
camera.
217
Pattern connect
key
Touch this key to save a
pattern in the machine’s
memory or USB media. The
pattern can also be
transferred to a computer via
a wireless network
connection.
167
Memory key
Position the carriage so the
embroidery frame can easily
be removed or attached.
164
Frame move key
Touch this key to check the
position of the pattern.The
carriage moves to the
desired position so you can
check that there is enough
space to embroider the
pattern.
139
Trace area key
Touch this key to move the
needle start position to align
the needle with the pattern
position.
160, 174
Starting point key
Touch this key to move the
needle forward or back in the
pattern; useful if the thread
breaks while embroidering or
if you want to start again from
the beginning.
163
Forward/Back key
Touch this key to specify
automatic thread cutting,
thread trimming or the thread
tension.
141, 165
Cut/Tension key
Touch this key to return to the
previous screen.
—
Return key
Touch this key to switch the
progress bar (which shows
the embroidering progress)
between showing only one
color or all colors.
—
Progress bar
switching key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Editing Patterns
Changing the Size of the Pattern
Memo
• After the pattern size is changed using
, the thread density can be changed
in the embroidery edit screen. (page 143)
• If the pattern is enlarged and there is space
between stitches, a better effect can be
achieved by increasing the thread density.
• If the pattern is reduced and the stitching is too
thick, a better effect can be achieved by
reducing the thread density.
Editing Patterns
Basic Embroidery
147
4
3 Select the direction in which to change
the size.
a Size of the pattern
b Touch to return the pattern to its original size.
c Touch to move patterns.
4 Touch [OK].
Example:
1 Select a pattern and then touch [Set].
2 Touch [Add].
3 Touch .
4 Touch the key of the font and then type in
the text. (page 137)
The characters you enter will be displayed in the
center of the display.
Decrease the pattern proportionately.
Decrease the pattern vertically.
Decrease the pattern horizontally.
Enlarge the pattern proportionately.
Stretch the pattern vertically.
Stretch the pattern horizontally.
Memo
• Each pattern’s range of size adjustment
depends upon the original size of the design
and the maximum embroidery area.
• Some patterns or characters can be enlarged
to a greater degree if they are rotated 90
degrees.
• You can also change the pattern size by
dragging the red point on the pattern image.
Note
• Be sure to do trial embroidery using same
fabric and threads as project in order to check
the embroidering results.
a
b
c
Combining Patterns
Editing Patterns
148
5 Touch to change the layout of the
characters. Touch [OK].
* Refer to page 144 for more information about
changing the layout.
6 Touch [Set] and then touch [Edit].
7 Touch and then use to move
the characters. Touch [OK].
* Patterns can also be moved by directly dragging
them with your finger or the included dual purpose
stylus.
8 When all editing is finished, touch
[Embroidery].
a If editing the combined patterns, use to
select the pattern to be edited. Patterns can also
be selected by directly touching the screen with
your finger or the included dual purpose stylus.
1 Touch .
2 Touch each pattern to select multiple
patterns.
a Touch or to check the patterns to be
selected, and then touch [Select] to select the
pattern. The selected patterns are surrounded with
a red box. To deselect the selected patterns, touch
[Unselect].
b Touch to deselect all selected patterns.
c Touch to select all patterns in the pattern display
area.
d While the Multiple Selection screen is displayed,
patterns can be moved with.
3 Touch [OK].
Each selected pattern is surrounded with a red
box.
a
Memo
• Combined patterns will be embroidered in the
order they were entered. You can change the
embroidering order. (page 172)
Selecting Multiple Patterns at the
Same Time
Memo
• Some editing keys appear in light gray and are
not available while multiple patterns are
selected.
b
d
a
c
Editing Patterns
Basic Embroidery
149
4
If the multiple patterns are grouped, they can be
edited as a single pattern.
1 Touch .
2 Touch each pattern to select multiple
patterns and then touch [OK]. (page 148)
3 Touch .
The selected patterns are grouped.
* Touch to ungroup the patterns. If there are
multiple grouped patterns, the selected pattern
group is ungrouped.
1 Touch [Edit] and then touch .
2 Touch each pattern that you want to
align.
3 Touch the key for the desired alignment.
Example:
Grouping Multiple Selected
Patterns
Memo
• Some editing keys appear in light gray and are
not available while multiple patterns are
grouped.
Aligning the Embroidery Patterns
Editing Patterns
150
Creating Repeated Patterns
Using the border function, you can create repeated
patterns.
1 Touch [Edit], and then touch .
2 Select the direction in which the pattern
will be repeated.
a Vertical direction
b Horizontal direction (page 150)
The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
3 Use to repeat the pattern above and
to repeat the pattern below.
* To delete above pattern, touch .
* To delete below pattern, touch .
a Key to cancel pattern repeating
4 Adjust the spacing of the repeated
pattern.
* To widen spacing, touch .
* To tighten spacing, touch .
5 Complete repeated patterns by repeating
steps
2 through 4.
6 Touch [OK].
Horizontal Direction
Use to repeat the pattern to the left and
to repeat the pattern on the right.
* To delete patterns from the left, touch .
* To delete patterns from the right, touch .
a Spacing keys
b Key to cancel pattern repeating
Designing Repeated Patterns
b
a
a
Memo
• When there are two or more patterns, all
patterns will be grouped together as one
pattern in the red frame.
b
a
Editing Patterns
Basic Embroidery
151
4
Repeating One Element of a
Repeated Pattern
By using the Cut function, you can select one
element of a repeated pattern and repeat only that
single element.
1 Touch and create repeated patterns.
(page 150).
2 Choose the direction in which the
repeated pattern will be cut.
a Touch to cut horizontally.
b Touch to cut vertically.
The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
3 Use and to select the cut line.
And then touch .
The repeated pattern will be divided into separate
elements.
4 Touch .
5 Use and to select the element to
repeat.
6 Repeat the selected element.
7 Touch [OK].
ba
Memo
• Once you have cut a repeated pattern into
separate elements, you cannot return to the
original repeated pattern.
Editing Patterns
152
By embroidering thread marks, you can easily
align patterns when rehooping the fabric to
embroider a series.
1 Touch [Edit], and then touch .
2 Touch .
3 Touch to select the thread mark to
be sewn.
4 Touch [OK], then [Embroidery].
5 Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is
embroidered with the last thread color.
6 Remove the embroidery frame.
7 Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery
frame.
8 Attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then touch .
9 Touch to set the starting point to the
top center of the pattern.
10 Touch [OK].
11 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
lower the embroidery foot.
Embroidering the Pattern
Repeatedly
Memo
• When there are two or more elements, use
and or and to select a pattern
that you want to assign a thread mark(s) to.
Note
• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the
embroidering area for the next pattern is within
the embroidering area.
a Pattern embroidered first
b Position of pattern to be embroidered next
c Embroidering area
Editing Patterns
Basic Embroidery
153
4
12 Touch .
13 Touch the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the thread mark
on the fabric is aligned on the starting
point in the camera view window.
a Thread mark on the fabric
b Starting point
14 Touch [OK] to return to the previous
screen.
15 If necessary, remove the thread mark.
16 Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
1 Touch .
An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered
appears.
2 Touch to select the
embroidery frame used in the preview.
* Embroidery frames displayed in light gray cannot
be selected.
* Touch to enlarge the image of the pattern.
3 Touch to check the embroidering
order.
The stitch simulator screen appears.
a Play/Pause
When touching , icon changes to .
b Return to beginning.
c Select the simulation speed.
d Touch to return to the embroidery frame
selection screen.
Note
• If the pattern position cannot be aligned using
the positioning keys, rehoop the fabric, and
then try again to align the position with the
positioning keys.
• When embroidering the repeated pattern, do
not rotate the pattern in the camera view
window. If the pattern is rotated in the camera
view window, you cannot embroider the
pattern properly aligned even if the thread
mark and the starting point are aligned in the
camera view window.
a
b
Previewing the Pattern
d
c b a
Checking/Editing the Embroidery Pattern Projected Onto Fabric
154
Using the projector, the selected embroidery
pattern can be projected onto the fabric.
1 Make sure that the embroidery frame is
attached to the machine, and then touch
in the following screens.
• Embroidery edit screen
• Embroidery screen
• Stitch settings screen of My Design Center
If a message appears, warning that the carriage
will be moved, touch [OK].
The embroidery pattern is projected onto the fabric.
2 Check the embroidery pattern projected
onto the fabric. If necessary, from the
screen of the machine, change the
location of the projection area on the
fabric and the projector settings.
a Drag a blue line at one of the four corners to move
the embroidery frame and change the location of
the projection area on the fabric.
b Touch to display the following screen.
The function [Projector Edit with Stylus], which
projects editing keys onto the fabric, can be
switched on or off.
With [Background Color], the background color of
the projector can be selected.
c Embroidery pattern projected by the projector
d Editing keys for operating with the dual purpose
stylus. (page 155)
Checking/Editing the
Embroidery Pattern
Projected Onto Fabric
Checking the Embroidery Pattern
with the Projector
Memo
• The illustrations of the projections shown in
this manual are for illustrative purposes only
and may differ from the actual projections.
a
b
c
d
Checking/Editing the Embroidery Pattern Projected Onto Fabric
Basic Embroidery
155
4
3 If necessary, edit the pattern.
4 After confirming the embroidery pattern,
touch to turn off projection.
From the embroidery edit screen or embroidery
screen, you can project the embroidery pattern
onto the fabric, then edit it.
1 Prepare the dual purpose stylus.
* For details on how to use the dual purpose stylus,
refer to “Operating the Projector with the Dual
Purpose Stylus” on page 70.
2 Touch in the embroidery edit screen
or embroidery screen. (page 154)
3 If necessary, press the button of the dual
purpose stylus to turn on the light over
the key to change the projection.
a Select whether to position the editing keys
(projected by the projector) at the left, right or
bottom.
b Displays keys for changing the location of the
projection area on the fabric. (page 156)
c Minimizes the keys projected by the projector.
Memo
• Editing keys that are not displayed cannot be
used with this function. To use all editing
functions, touch to turn off projection.
For details on each key, refer to “[Edit]
Window” on page 143 or “[Layout] Window” on
page 145.
Using the Dual Purpose Stylus To
Edit the Embroidery Pattern
Projected Onto Fabric (Projector
Edit with Stylus)
Memo
• If an embroidery frame that does not support
this function has been attached, a message
appears In that case, edit using the screen.
a
b
c
Checking/Editing the Embroidery Pattern Projected Onto Fabric
156
4 Press the button of the dual purpose
stylus to turn on the light over or in
order to edit the embroidery pattern.
* The camera detects the light, and the embroidery
pattern is edited as specified.
* When finished editing, touch in the LCD
screen to turn off projection.
Positioning Mode
a Move the embroidery pattern.
Resizing Mode (Embroidery Edit
Screen Only)
a Changes the height of the embroidery pattern.
b Changes the width of the embroidery pattern.
c Locks/unlocks the aspect ratio.
Rotation Mode
a Rotates the embroidery pattern counterclockwise.
b Rotates the embroidery pattern clockwise.
Changing the Location of the
Projection Area
1
Make sure that the embroidery frame is
attached to the machine, and then touch
in the following screens.
• Embroidery edit screen
• Embroidery screen
• Stitch settings screen of My Design Center
2 If was touched in the embroidery edit
screen or embroidery screen, place the
point of the dual purpose stylus over ,
and then press the button to turn on the
light.
3 Place the point of the dual purpose stylus
over a key in , and then press the
button to turn on the light.
a Select whether to position the keys (projected by
the projector) at the left, right or bottom.
b Switches the projection to edit mode (embroidery
edit screen and embroidery screen only).
(page 155)
c Minimizes the keys projected by the projector.
The camera detects the light of the dual purpose
stylus, and the location of the embroidery pattern
projection area is changed as specified.
4 After confirming the settings, touch in
the LCD screen to turn off projection.
a
b
a
c
b
a
ac
b
Align the Embroidering Position
Basic Embroidery
157
4
The fabric hooped in the embroidery frame can
be displayed on the screen so that the
embroidery position can be easily aligned.
Example:
1 Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame,
and then attach the frame to the machine.
2 Select the pattern and, if necessary, edit
the pattern.
3 Touch .
4 Touch [Scan].
5 When the following message appears,
touch [OK].
The carriage moves so the fabric can be scanned.
6 When the fabric appears as a background
for the pattern, touch [Close].
a The transparency of the scanned background
image can be adjusted.
b The background image can be saved to USB
media.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
Align the Embroidering
Position
Display the Fabric on the Screen
Memo
• When embroidery frame (20 mm (H) × 60 mm
(W) (approx. 1 inch (H) ×2-1/2 (W) inches) is
installed, this function cannot be used.
• For details on using thicker fabric such as
quilting, refer to “Positioning the Pattern on
Thick Fabric” on page 158.
a
b
Align the Embroidering Position
158
7 Align the pattern to the desired
embroidery position.
* Refer to “Embroidery Edit Screen” on page 142
about the “Edit” display.
Positioning the Pattern on Thick
Fabric
When positioning the pattern on thick fabric such
as quilting, the fabric may not be detected
correctly. In order for the fabric to be correctly
detected, its thickness must first be measured.
1 Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame,
and then attach the embroidery frame to
the machine.
2 Select the pattern and, if necessary, edit
the pattern.
3 Touch to display [Fabric Thickness
Sensor] of the settings screen and then
set to on.
4 Touch [OK].
5 Touch .
6 Touch [Scan].
7 Affix the embroidery positioning sticker
to the fabric within the area indicated by
the red frame displayed with the
projector, and then touch .
Memo
• The pattern can be moved to the desired
position by dragging on the screen using your
finger or the included dual purpose stylus pen.
If you need some fine adjustment, touch
to move the pattern.
Note
• The fabric will appear in the background until
embroidering of the pattern is finished. In order
to show or hide the background image, touch
, and then set [Background Image] to on or
off.
• With the settings screen, the quality of the
background image can be set, or the scanned
image can be deleted.
Align the Embroidering Position
Basic Embroidery
159
4
8 When the following message appears,
remove the embroidery positioning
sticker, and then touch [OK].
The carriage is moved, and the embroidery
positioning sticker affixed to the fabric is detected.
9 Continue with step 6 of “Display the Fabric
on the Screen” on page 157 to align the
pattern with the desired embroidery
position.
The embroidering position can easily be aligned
using the machine’s built-in camera and the
included embroidery positioning sticker.
1 Touch [Layout] to display the editing
window, and then touch .
2 Following message appears. Touch [OK].
3 Select the position you want to set as the
reference point.
* Select if you want to embroider referring the
embroidery positioning sticker as the center of the
pattern.
4 Affix the embroidery positioning sticker
to the location in the fabric to be
embroidered. Place the embroidery
positioning sticker so that the center of
the larger circle is at the center or edge of
the embroidery pattern.
a Embroidery positioning sticker
b Center or edge of the embroidery pattern
c Embroidery field
Using the Embroidery Positioning
Sticker
Note
• Before using the embroidery positioning
sticker, check that it can be cleanly removed
from a scrap piece of the fabric to be used.
Memo
• Affix the embroidery positioning sticker so that
the smaller circle is on top. The angle of the
pattern depends on the angle at which the
embroidery positioning sticker is affixed. In
order to change the angle at which the pattern
will be embroidered, affix the embroidery
positioning sticker at the desired angle.
Align the Embroidering Position
160
5 Touch [Scan].
* Attach embroidery foot “W” before touching [Scan].
6 Following message appears. Touch [OK].
The built-in camera automatically searches for the
embroidery positioning sticker, and then the
carriage is moved so that the selected reference
point of the embroidery pattern is aligned with the
embroidery positioning sticker.
7 A reminder message appears. Remove
the embroidery positioning sticker from
the fabric, and touch [OK].
* To remove the embroidery positioning sticker more
easily, touch so that the carriage moves
slightly forward and away from under the needle.
8 Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a pattern
and the needle.
1 Mark the embroidery start position on the
fabric, as shown.
2 On the embroidery screen, touch .
3 Touch then touch [OK].
* When is touched, the pointer of the projector
indicates the needle drop point onto the fabric.
(page 139)
a Start position
The carriage will move to the specified needle
position.
4 Touch [Layout], and then touch . And
then align the needle and the mark on the
fabric.
Aligning the Pattern and the
Needle
a
Align the Embroidering Position
Basic Embroidery
161
4
The camera built into this machine can be used
to easily align the embroidering position.
1 Use a chalk pencil to draw a cross at the
desired embroidering location.
And then, hoop the fabric
a Chalk pencil mark
2 Select the pattern on your machine and
touch [Embroidery].
3 Touch in the embroidery screen.
4 Touch to set the starting point to the
center of the pattern.
5 Touch [OK].
6 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
lower the embroidery foot.
7 Touch .
8 Touch the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the cross-shaped
chalk mark drawn on the fabric is
displayed in the camera view window.
9 Touch to display the grid lines.
10 Touch the orientation keys until the grid
lines are parallel with the chalk mark
drawn on the fabric.
11 Touch the positioning keys to move the
embroidery frame until the center point of
the pattern in the camera view window is
aligned with the chalk mark drawn on the
fabric.
a Center point of the pattern
b Chalk mark
12 Touch [OK] to return to the previous
screen.
Using the Camera View Window
a
b
Adjustments during the Embroidery Process
162
When the bobbin begins to run out of thread
during embroidering, the machine will stop and
the message below will appear.
1 Leave the message displayed and then
press (Reinforcement stitch button)
to sew reinforcement stitches to prevent
stitches from unraveling.
2 Touch .
3 Touch [OK].
After the thread is automatically cut, the carriage
will move.
4 Leave the message displayed and then
continue with the next step.
5 Unlock the frame-securing lever and
remove the embroidery frame.
* Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at
this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
embroidery frame.
6 Insert a wound bobbin into the machine.
(Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on
page 40.)
7 Attach the embroidery frame.
8 Touch [OK].
The carriage will move to its previous position.
9 Press (Reinforcement stitch button)
to sew reinforcement stitches at the
beginning of sewing, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button to continue
embroidering.
Adjustments during the
Embroidery Process
If the Bobbin Runs out of Thread
Memo
• If the message appears when only a few more
stitches are necessary to complete
embroidering, simply press the “Start/Stop”
button, allowing about 10 more stitches to be
embroidered.
• If [Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor] in the
settings screen is set to off, the message
shown above does not appear.
• Touch [Return] to close the message.
Adjustments during the Embroidery Process
Basic Embroidery
163
4
1 If the upper thread is broken or runs out,
redo the upper threading.
2 Touch .
3 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
lower the embroidery foot.
4 Touch .
The camera view window appears.
5 Touch , , , or to move the
needle back the correct number of
stitches before the spot where the thread
broke.
a Touch to enlarge the image in the screen.
b Touch to remove “ ” from the screen.
6 Touch [Close] and then touch [OK].
7 Press (Reinforcement stitch button)
to sew reinforcement stitches at the
beginning of sewing, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button to continue
embroidering.
If the Thread Breaks during
Embroidering
Memo
• If the bobbin thread is broken, follow the
directions of “If the Bobbin Runs out of
Thread” on page 162.
a b
Memo
• If you cannot move back to the spot where the
thread broke, touch or to select the
color and move to the beginning position of
that color, then use , , , or
to move ahead to slightly before where the
thread broke.
• Touch to restart from the beginning.
Adjustments during the Embroidery Process
164
Depending on the position of the embroidery
frame, it may be difficult to thread the needle or
remove the embroidery frame. If this happens,
move the embroidery frame.
1 Touch in the embroidery screen.
2 When a message appears, warning that
the carriage will be moved, touch [OK].
The carriage moves. A message appears again.
3 Leave the message displayed, thread the
needle or remove the embroidery frame.
4 Touch [OK].
The embroidery frame will be moved to its original
position.
Even if the power goes out in the middle of
embroidery, the next time the machine is turned
on, you have the option to continue or delete the
pattern.
If It is Difficult to Thread the
Needle or Remove the Embroidery
Frame
Resuming Embroidery after
Turning Off the Power
Note
• Do not remove the embroidery unit or the
memory will no longer remember your design.
• If embroidery was interrupted before a color
segment was completed, move the needle
back to overlap the previous stitching by a few
stitches to avoid unraveling. (page 163)
Adjusting Thread Tension
Basic Embroidery
165
4
Adjust thread tension according to the situation.
Correct Thread Tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of
fabric.
Upper Thread is Too Tight
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of
fabric. In this case, loosen the upper thread
tension.
Upper Thread is Too Loose
Loops appear on the right side of the fabric. In this
case, tighten the upper thread tension.
Adjusting the Tension of the
Upper Thread
1
On the embroidery screen, touch .
2 Adjust the upper thread tension.
* Touch to loosen the upper thread tension.
(The tension number will decrease.)
* Touch to tighten the upper thread tension.
(The tension number will increase.)
Adjusting Overall Upper Thread
Tension
When embroidering, if the overall tension of the
upper thread is too tight or too loose, adjust it from
the setting screen.
If an individual embroidery pattern needs additional
fine tuning, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on
page 165.
1 Touch , and then touch .
2 In the [Embroidery Tension], adjust the
upper thread tension.
* Increase to tighten the upper thread tension.
* Decrease to loosen the upper thread tension.
Adjusting Thread Tension
Adjusting the Tension of the
Upper Thread
a Right side
b Wrong side
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded,
the upper thread may appear to be too tight. In
this case, refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on
page 40 and rethread the bobbin thread.
a Right side
b Wrong side
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded,
the upper thread may appear to be too loose.
In this case, refer to “Upper Threading” on
page 42 and rethread the upper thread.
a Right side
b Wrong side
Note
• If the thread tension setting is made extremely
loose, the machine may stop during
embroidering. Increase the thread tension
slightly, and begin embroidering again.
Adjusting Thread Tension
166
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery
function, using the alternate bobbin case (with no
color on the screw), turn the slotted screw (-) with
a (small) screwdriver.
a Do not turn the phillips screw (+).
b Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
Correct Tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of
fabric.
* Light gray color represents upper thread.
* Dark gray color represents bobbin thread.
Bobbin Thread is Too Loose
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of
fabric.
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-) clockwise,
being careful not to over-tighten the screw,
approximately 30-45 degrees to increase bobbin
tension.
Bobbin Thread is Too Tight
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to
be lifting/looping and bobbin thread is not seen on
the wrong side of fabric.
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-)
counterclockwise, being careful not to over-loosen
the screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to
decrease bobbin tension.
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin
Case (with No Color on the
Adjusting Screw)
Note
• The bobbin case that is used differs depending
on the embroidery bobbin thread that is used.
Only the alternate bobbin case allows the
bobbin thread tension to be adjusted. For
details, refer to “Embroidering Attractive
Finishes” on page 132.
IMPORTANT
• Do not adjust the position of the phillips (+) screw on the
alternate bobbin case as this may result in damage to
the bobbin case, rendering it unusable.
• If the slotted screw (-) is difficult to turn, do not use force.
Turning the screw too much or providing force in either
(rotational) direction may cause damage to the bobbin
case. Should damage occur, the bobbin case may not
maintain proper tension.
Note
• When adjusting the alternate bobbin case, be
sure to remove the bobbin from the alternate
bobbin case.
a Right side
b Wrong side
a Right side
b Wrong side
a Right side
b Wrong side
Using the Memory Function (Embroidery)
Basic Embroidery
167
4
1 Touch when the pattern you want to
save is in the embroidery screen.
2 When saving the embroidery pattern in a
USB media, insert the USB media into the
USB port on the machine.
a USB ports
3 Select the destination to start saving.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
a Save to the machine’s memory.
b Save to the USB media.
The pattern is saved in a folder labeled [bPocket].
c Save to the wireless function pocket.
For the detailed procedure, refer to the manual for
PE-DESIGN (version 11 or later).
Using the Memory
Function (Embroidery)
Memo
• For more information about the memory
function, refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
Saving Embroidery Patterns
Memo
• You can also save the pattern by touching
in the embroidery edit screen.
IMPORTANT
• Do not insert anything other than USB media into
the USB media port. Otherwise, damage to the
machine may result.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Saving…] screen is displayed. You will lose
the pattern you are saving.
c
a
b
Using the Memory Function (Embroidery)
168
1 When retrieving the embroidery pattern
from a USB media, insert the USB media
into the USB port on the machine.
* For details on supported file extensions, refer to
“Specifications” on page 271.
a USB ports
2 Touch .
3 Touch the desired source.
a Retrieve from the machine’s memory.
b Retrieve from a USB media.
If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
c Retrieve embroidery patterns uploaded to the
wireless function pocket via wireless network.
For the detailed procedure, refer to the manual for
PE-DESIGN (version 11 or later) or Design
Database Transfer.
d Retrieve from Artspira App. (page 225)
4 Touch the key of the pattern you want to
retrieve.
* Touch to return to the previous folder.
5 Touch [Set].
Retrieving Embroidery Patterns
Memo
• If the embroidery pattern to be retrieved is in a
folder of the USB media, touch the key for that
folder.
adcb
Memo
• By touching , the selected patterns can be
deleted or saved to the machine’s memory.
a Select all patterns.
b Deselect all patterns.
c Delete the selected patterns.
d Save the selected patterns to the machine.
a b c d
Editing Colors
169
Advanced Embroidery
5
1 Touch [Edit], and then touch .
2 Touch the color of the part to be changed
and then select a new color from the
color palette.
a Switch between selecting a single color and
selecting all colors.
b Select the thread brand.
c Revert to the original color.
d Selected thread color image
3 Touch [OK].
With the color shuffling function, the machine
suggests new color schemes for the embroidery
pattern that you have selected.
1 Touch [Edit], and then touch .
2 Touch .
3 Select the thread brand for colors and the
number of colors you want to create the
pattern with. And then select the desired
effect.
a Thread brand for colors
b Number of colors to be used.
c Effects for schemes
* If you select [Vivid] or [Soft], proceed to step 5 .
Chapter 5
Advanced Embroidery
Editing Colors
Changing the Thread Color
Memo
• Touch [Number] to find a thread color by
entering its number. If you enter the wrong
number, touch [C].
a
b
c
d
Find New Color Schemes with the
Color Shuffling Function
Memo
• This function may not be available depending
on the pattern you select (ex. a bordered
embroidery pattern, licensed pattern).
c
b
a
Editing Colors
170
4 If you select [Random] or [Gradient],
select [Auto], and then touch [OK].
5 Touch the desired color scheme from
samples.
* Touch [Refresh] to display the new schemes.
a Touch to temporarily register your favorite
schemes. To release a favorite color scheme,
touch again.
b Touch to display the color scheme favorites
screen. Touch to remove the color scheme on
color scheme favorites screen.
c Touch to review the previous schemes.
6 Touch [Set] to select the displayed color
scheme.
This function allows you to embroider while
replacing the thread spool a minimal number of
times.
1 Touch [Layout] in the embroidery screen.
2 Touch .
* Touch the key again to return to the original
setting.
The embroidery color order is rearranged and
sorted by thread colors.
Memo
• To specify the thread colors of the color
scheme, select [Manual].
You can select up to six colors to be used with
the [Random] effect. The selected thread
colors will generate a random color scheme.
You can select one color to be used with the
[Gradient] effect. A gradient is generated with
the selected thread color.
a Select a color from the palette.
b Selected color is displayed.
a
b
c
b
a
Thread Color Sorting
Memo
• This function does not work on overlapping
designs.
Various Embroidering Functions
171
Advanced Embroidery
5
A selected pattern can be stitched out in one
color instead of multicolor. The machine will
continue stitching without stopping for thread
changes until the pattern is completed.
1 In the embroidery screen, touch [Layout].
2 Touch , and then touch [Layout].
* Touch the key again to return to the original
setting.
The thread color displayed on the screen will be
grayed out.
No sew setting (which specifies that a thread
color will not be embroidered) can be applied to a
part of the pattern with a specific color.
1 Touch in the embroidering edit
screen.
2 From the thread color sequence display,
select the thread color that will not be
embroidered.
The selected thread color is highlighted in blue.
Uninterrupted Embroidering
(Using a Single Color)
Various Embroidering
Functions
No Sew Setting
Various Embroidering Functions
172
3 Touch .
The mark appears to indicate that the selected
thread color will not be embroidered.
The parts of the pattern that will not be
embroidered are hidden in the pattern preview
screen.
4 If necessary, repeat steps 2 and 3 for all
thread colors that will not be
embroidered.
5 After specifying the desired settings,
touch [OK].
6 Touch and then touch to check an
enlarged image of the finished
embroidery.
* After deselecting a region, check the image to be
sure no previously hidden stitches are visible.
The embroidering order of combined patterns
can be changed.
1 Select a pattern, add additional
pattern(s), adjust the layout of the
patterns, and then display the [Edit]
window.
2 If necessary, touch to ungroup the
pattern.
3 Touch .
Memo
• To cancel the setting, select the thread color
and touch .
Memo
• When a pattern with the deselect region
setting applied is saved, the deselect region
setting is also saved. However, the pattern
cannot be saved if the deselect region setting
is applied to all thread colors.
• The parts with the deselect region setting
applied are merely not displayed; they are not
deleted. The embroidering area required to
embroider the pattern is the same as for the
original pattern.
Changing the Embroidering Order
of Combined Patterns
Memo
• The embroidering order for grouped patterns
is changed group by group. To change the
embroidering order of a pattern within a group,
ungroup the pattern first.
Various Embroidering Functions
173
Advanced Embroidery
5
4 Select the pattern whose order is to be
changed, and then touch a key to change
its position in the embroidering order.
a Selected pattern
b Move the selected pattern back one position in the
embroidery order.
c Move the selected pattern ahead one position in
the embroidery order.
d Move the selected pattern to the beginning of the
embroidery order.
e Move the selected pattern to the end of the
embroidery order.
f Revert to the original embroidering order.
5 Touch [OK].
Before embroidering, basting stitches can be
sewn along the outline of the pattern. This is
useful for embroidering fabric that cannot have
stabilizer material affixed with an iron or
adhesive.
1 Touch to display [Embroidery Basting
Distance] of the settings screen.
2 Specify the distance from the pattern to
the basting stitching.
3 Touch [OK].
4 Touch [Layout], and then touch to
select the basting setting.
* Touch the key again to cancel the setting.
Basting is added to the beginning of the
embroidering order.
Memo
• The positions of overlapping patterns can be
checked in the preview on the right side of the
screen.
a
c
d
f
b
e
Basting Embroidery
Note
• It is recommended to finish combining and
editing the pattern before selecting the basting
setting. If the pattern is edited after selecting
the basting setting, the basting and pattern
may become misaligned.
Various Embroidering Functions
174
Follow the procedure described below to
embroider linked characters in a single row when
the entire pattern extends beyond the embroidery
frame.
Example: Linking “DEF” to the characters “ABC”
using embroidery frame 10 cm × 10 cm (approx.
4 inches × 4 inches)
1 Select the character patterns for “ABC”.
2 On the embroidery screen, touch .
3 Touch and then touch [OK].
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame will move to the
specified needle position.
4 Touch .
5 Touch to turn off the thread cutting
function and then touch [OK]. (page 141)
6 Press the “Start/Stop” button.
7 After the characters are embroidered, cut
the threads to a generous length, remove
the embroidery frame.
a End of the embroidering
8 Reposition the fabric in embroidery
frame so that the right side of the letter
“C” will be partially inside the embroidery
frame; being careful so letters remain
straight and level. Then reattach frame
again so that the remaining characters
(“DEF”) can be embroidered.
9 As in step 1, select the character
patterns for “DEF”.
10 Touch and then touch .
The carriage moves so that the needle is
positioned in the lower-left corner of the pattern.
You will need to match this point to the end of
embroidering for the previous pattern.
11 Touch [OK].
12 Touch [Layout], then to align the
needle with the end of embroidering for
the previous pattern.
* Touch so that the pointer of the projector
indicates the needle drop point onto the fabric.
(page 139)
Embroidering Linked Characters
Various Embroidering Functions
175
Advanced Embroidery
5
13 Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering the remaining character
patterns.
Completed embroidery patterns combined with
printed designs are built into this machine.
Beautiful three-dimensional embroidered designs
can be created by ironing a background onto
fabric or printing it onto printable fabric, then
doing complementary embroidery on top of the
background.
Example: Using iron-on paper
Exporting the Background Image
and Positioning Image
Patterns with “P” in the lower-left corner of their key
can be combined with printing.
1 Select a pattern that can be combined
with a printed design, and then touch .
Only the embroidery pattern (not the background
image of the selected embroidery pattern) is
displayed.
2 Select the pattern, and then touch .
a An image of the pattern combined with the
background appears.
b Touch to change the background color.
3 Touch the key for the corresponding
media to save the files.
Two files of the background image only and one
file for aligning embroidery into position are copied
(PDF format) onto the USB media.
Print and Stitch Function
Memo
• Refer to the “Embroidery Design Guide” for the
detail of patterns which enable this function.
a
b
Various Embroidering Functions
176
• ___r.pdf
An image flipped on a vertical axis (for an
iron-on transfer)
• ___n.pdf
An image that is not flipped (for printing on
printable fabric)
• ___p.pdf
An image that is not flipped, but has
positioning marks attached (for positioning)
4 Touch .
Printing the Background and
Embroidery Position Sheet
Print the PDF files of the background and
embroidery position sheet. The background file
that is printed differs depending on whether iron-on
paper or printable fabric is used.
1 Open the PDF file to be printed.
2 Print the background image.
* When printing onto iron-on paper, print the file
named “___r.pdf” (an image flipped on a vertical
axis). When printing onto printable fabric, print the
file named “___n.pdf” (an image that is not flipped).
3 Print the embroidery position sheet (file
named “___p.pdf”) onto plain paper.
4 If an iron-on transfer sheet is used,
transfer the image onto fabric.
Embroidering Patterns
1
Hoop in the embroidery frame the fabric
with the background image.
Note
• Print the background and embroidery position
sheet in their original dimensions. If an image
is printed in a different size, the sizes of the
embroidery pattern and background may not
match. In addition, the built-in camera cannot
detect the embroidery position mark. Make
sure that the print settings are correctly
specified.
Note
• Before printing onto iron-on paper or printable
fabric, we recommend performing a test print
to check the print settings.
• For details on how to use iron-on transfer
sheets or printable fabric, refer to the
instructions for the iron-on transfer sheets and
printable fabric.
• Some printers will automatically print an image
flipped if an iron-on transfer sheet is selected
as the paper. For details, refer to the
instructions for the printer being used.
Note
• When printing the PDF file for the embroidery
position sheet, specify the highest image
quality possible for full-color printing. In
addition, we recommend printing on matte
paper. If this is not done, the built-in camera
may not be able to correctly detect the
embroidery positioning mark.
Picture Play Embroidery Function
177
Advanced Embroidery
5
2 Cut the embroidery position sheet so it
can easily be positioned aligned with the
background image on the fabric.
* Lines or color changes in the image can help you
find the correct alignment position.
3 Place the paper printed with the
positioning image on top of the fabric so
that the pattern is aligned, and then affix
the paper to the fabric with cellophane
tape to prevent the paper from moving.
a Cellophane tape
4 After checking that a pattern is selected,
touch [Embroidery].
5 Align the embroidering position
according to steps
1 through 7 of “Using
the Embroidery Positioning Sticker” on
page 159.
* With this function, the fabric will be aligned with the
mark on the embroidery position sheet (instead of
the embroidery positioning sticker) affixed to the
fabric. When performing step
3 of “Using the
Embroidery Positioning Sticker”, use the center of
the pattern as the reference point. In step
4, skip
affixing the embroidery positioning sticker.
6 Remove the positioning sheet and press
the “Start/Stop” button to begin
embroidering.
A photo can be converted into embroidery data.
1 Save the picture to be converted into
embroidery data onto a USB flash drive
or transfer to the machine using “My
Design Snap App”. (page 225)
2 Touch [Picture Play Embroidery].
3 Touch the desired source.
* For details on available image data files, refer to
“Specifications” on page 271.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
a Retrieve from a USB media.
b Retrieve image data sent from My Design Snap
App. (page 225)
Note
• Before embroidering, check that the
embroidery position sheet is perfectly aligned
with the background.
Picture Play Embroidery
Function
Note
• The auto background removal and style
conversion functions utilize Artificial
Intelligence (AI) technology. While we strive
for accuracy and quality, please note that the
output generated may vary.
Adjusting the Imported Image
Memo
• Photos that show an enlargement of the object
to be embroidered or are bright and sharp are
most appropriate for conversion.
• The following types of photos are not
appropriate for creating embroidery patterns.
- Photos where the subject is small, such as in
photos of gatherings
- Photos where the subject appears dark,
such as photos taken in a room or taken with
backlighting
b
a
Picture Play Embroidery Function
178
4 Select the image to be retrieved, and then
touch [Set].
5 Check the embroidery pattern size and
adjust it.
a Change the size of the image data file. In order to
return to its original size, touch .
b Rotate the image data file 90 degrees.
c Change the size to fit the embroidery frame size.
(Refer to step
7)
d Frame an area of the image. (Refer to “Framing the
Image” on page 179)
e Remove the background. (Refer to step
6)
6 If necessary, remove the background.
Touch , select [Auto (AI)], and then
switch on [Background removal]. Touch
[Preview] to confirm the cropping area,
and then touch [OK].
* If [Auto (AI)] is selected and [Background removal]
is set to on, the machine will automatically remove
the background. If the desired results are not
achieved, refer to “Removing the Background in
[Custom] Mode” on page 179.
7 If necessary, touch to change the size
of the pattern to fit the selected
embroidery frame size.
* The embroidery frames that can be used with this
function are listed.
Memo
• The recommended sizes of embroidery
patterns are listed below.
- Face only: 100 × 100 mm (approx. 4 inches
× 4 inches) or larger
- Head and face: 130 × 180 mm (approx. 5
inches × 7 inches) or larger
- The subject for detailed embroidery: 75 × 75
mm (approx. 3 inches × 3 inches) or larger
• The image framing functions (4) and the
background removal (5) cannot be used at
the same time.
b
d ce
a
Picture Play Embroidery Function
179
Advanced Embroidery
5
8 After editing of the image is finished,
touch [Next].
Proceed to “Selecting the Conversion Method” on
page 181.
Framing the Image
1
Follow steps 2 through 5 of “Adjusting
the Imported Image” on page 177.
2 Touch . Select the image area to be
framed, and then touch [OK].
a Drag to select the image area to be framed.
b Select a shape to frame the image with.
3 Follow steps 7 through 8 of “Adjusting
the Imported Image” on page 177.
Removing the Background in
[Custom] Mode
For this example, the background will be removed
from a photo of a flower.
1 Touch [Custom] in step 6 of “Adjusting
the Imported Image” on page 177.
For this example, first touch [Preview] to
display the cropping area.
The cropping area is highlighted in cyan.
b
a
Memo
• The results from using [Custom] mode to
detect the cropping area without first
specifying it may differ from the results from
using [Auto (AI)] mode to remove the
background.
Picture Play Embroidery Function
180
2 With the pens, mark the areas to be, and
not to be, extracted. And then touch
[Preview] to confirm the cropping area.
a With the pink pen, mark the areas to be extracted
(will be added to the cropping area).
b With the yellowish green pen, mark the areas not
to be extracted (will be removed from the cropping
area).
c Trace over lines drawn with 1 or 2 above in order
to erase the drawn line.
d Erases all drawn lines.
e Hide all lines drawn with pen 1 or 2.
f To undo the previous operation.
g To redo the last operation that was undone.
*1
Select , and then use the yellowish green
pen to mark areas not to be extracted.
3 Continue drawing lines and touching
[Preview] until the desired cropping area
is achieved.
a Select , and then use the pink pen to mark
areas to be extracted.
4 Touch [OK].
* Touch to hide all lines drawn with pens.
5 Touch [Next].
Memo
• When selecting areas to be added to or
removed from the cropping area, the entire
area does not need to be completely filled with
pen marks.
f g
a
b
e
d
c
*1
a
Picture Play Embroidery Function
181
Advanced Embroidery
5
Using the Original Image (No
Style Conversion)
The displayed image can be converted directly to
embroidery data, without using style conversion.
The image can be adjusted as necessary before it
is converted to embroidery data.
1 Make sure that [Original] is displayed in
the box.
a Box
2 Touch to adjust the image brightness,
etc.
Touch [OK] to apply the settings.
a Adjust the amount of emphasis applied to the
outline of the image. Touching repeatedly
makes the boundaries between bright and dark
areas clearer.
b Adjust the image brightness.
c Adjust the image contrast.
d Adjust the image saturation.
3 Touch [Next].
Proceed to “Selecting Appropriate Thread Colors
and Density” on page 183.
Using the [Built-in] Style
By applying any of the various built-in styles to an
image, you can create a variety of new images that
have a different impression from the original, then
convert them to embroidery data.
For this example, a photo of a flower will be
converted.
1 Swipe until your image with the desired
[Style] appears in the box. Switch on
or off. And then touch [Preview].
Memo
• To specify the cropping area before it is
detected, perform step
1 without touching
[Preview]. Roughly mark the areas to be and
not to be extracted in step
2, and then touch
[Preview]. And then continue with step
3.
a Select , and then use the pink pen to
mark areas to be extracted.
b Select , and then use the yellowish
green pen to mark areas not to be extracted.
Selecting the Conversion Method
a
b
a
a
b
c
d
Picture Play Embroidery Function
182
2 Check the image, and then touch [Next].
Proceed to “Selecting Appropriate Thread Colors
and Density” on page 183.
Using the [Custom] Style
By selecting any desired image as the style image,
you can create a unique style conversion image.
For this example, a photo of a mountain will be
converted.
1 Save to USB media the image to be used
as the style as well as the photo to be
converted into the embroidery data.
2 Adjust the imported Image. (page 177)
3 Touch [Custom]. Touch , and
then select the saved image. Switch
on or off. And then touch [Preview].
4 Check the image, and then touch [Next].
a When switched off, style conversion is applied
using the colors from the original photo. For
details, refer to “Using the [Built-in] Style” on
page 181.
Proceed to “Selecting Appropriate Thread Colors
and Density” on page 183.
Memo
• If is switched off, style conversion is
applied using the colors from the original
photo.
a Sample image (without style conversion)
b Style image
c Sample image (with style conversion using
the colors from the style image)
d Sample image (with style conversion using
the colors from the original photo)
dca
b b
a
Picture Play Embroidery Function
183
Advanced Embroidery
5
1 Check the conversion results, and then, if
it is acceptable, touch [Set] to continue
with step
3. If necessary, specify the
maximum number of thread colors, the
thread colors that must be used, and the
thread density.
a Specify the maximum number of thread colors.
b Specify the thread brand.
c Change the magnification ratio for displaying the
image.
d This indicates that a magnified image can be
repositioned (no action is required).
e Preview the converted embroidery data.
f Specify the thread color list. The thread colors
being used can be changed.
When (pin thread color key) is blue, the thread
color on the key beside it is kept for converting the
image to embroidery data. Touch (gray) to
keep the thread color beside the key. Touch
(blue) to no longer keep the thread color beside the
key.
Touch to keep the thread colors of all thread
spools. Touch the key again to no longer keep all
thread colors.
Touch , select a thread color, and then touch
[OK] to add the selected thread color to the list.
Select a thread color in the thread color list, and
then touch to remove the selected thread
color.
g Adjust the thread density.
h Save the embroidery pattern.
2 For this example, we will convert the
image with a maximum number of 12
colors and keep two thread colors. Touch
[Preview] to apply the settings to the
pattern.
a Maximum number of thread colors.
b Kept thread colors (blue pins)
3 Check the conversion results, and then
touch [Set].
The following message appears. Touch [OK] to
display the converted pattern in the embroidery
edit screen.
Selecting Appropriate Thread
Colors and Density
f
g
c
a
h
b
e
d
Note
• Since converted embroidery pattern has a
high thread density, it may shrink when it is
embroidered. Hoop the fabric firmly secured in
the embroidery frame before embroidering.
For Picture Play embroidery function, we
recommend using the separately sold
magnetic frame, which offers more strength for
holding fabric taut.
b
a
Appliqué and Couching
184
Appliqué pieces can be created from the built-in
patterns and imported patterns. This is
convenient for fabrics that cannot be
embroidered or when you wish to attach an
appliqué to a garment.
Creating an Appliqué Piece
1
Select the pattern, and edit it if
necessary.
2 Touch [Edit], and then touch .
3 Specify the distance between the pattern
and the appliqué outline, and then touch
[OK].
The pattern and appliqué outline are grouped.
4 Touch [Embroidery].
The steps for creating the appliqué piece are
added to the embroidering order.
Appliqué and Couching
Creating an Appliqué Piece
Note
• Felt or denim fabrics are recommended to
make the appliqué piece. Depending on the
pattern and fabric used, lighter weight fabrics
may cause the stitching to appear smaller.
• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer
material for embroidering.
Note
• Finish combining and editing the pattern
before selecting the appliqué setting. If the
pattern is edited after selecting the appliqué
setting, the appliqué stitching and pattern may
become misaligned.
• Since an outline is added, the pattern for an
appliqué piece (when the appliqué setting is
selected) will be larger than the original
pattern. First, adjust the size and position of
the pattern as shown below.
a Embroidering area
b About 1 cm (approx. 3/8 inch)
c Pattern size
Memo
• Three steps are added to the embroidering
order: appliqué cutting line, position of pattern
placement on the garment, and appliqué
stitching.
a Cutting line for appliqué
b Position of pattern placement on garment
c Appliqué stitching
• When setting the [Thread color] to [#123]
(thread number) in the settings screen, the
following screen is displayed.
a
b
c
Appliqué and Couching
185
Advanced Embroidery
5
5 Fuse or stick a piece of stabilizer to the
back of the felt or denim fabric to be used
as the appliqué piece.
6 Hoop the appliqué fabric in the
embroidery frame, attach the embroidery
frame to the machine, and then start
embroidering.
7 After the pattern is embroidered, thread
the machine with the thread for the
cutting line, and then sew the cutting line
(APPLIQUE MATERIAL).
a Cutting line for appliqué
8 Remove the appliqué material from the
embroidery frame, and then carefully cut
along the stitching. After cutting,
carefully remove all of the cutting line
thread.
9 Hoop two layers of non-woven water
soluble stabilizer in the embroidery
frame.
10 Thread the machine with the thread for
the outline from step
12, and then sew
the placement line for the appliqué
position (APPLIQUE POSITION).
a Pattern placement line
Note
• An appliqué piece cannot be created if the
pattern is too large or too complicated or a
combined pattern is separated. Even if the
selected pattern fits within the embroidering
area, the entire appliqué pattern may exceed
the embroidering area when the outline is
added. If an error message appears, select a
different pattern or edit it.
Memo
• We recommend using thread for the cutting
line that is closest to the color of the fabric.
Note
• Depending on the pattern density and fabric
used, there may be shrinking of the pattern or
the appliqué may be misaligned with the
placement line. We recommend cutting slightly
outside of the cutting line.
• When using patterns that are vertically and
horizontally symmetrical, use a chalk pencil to
indicate the pattern orientation before cutting it
out.
• Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline you
just sewed. Do not cut inside the cutting line,
otherwise the appliqué fabric will not be caught
by the appliqué stitch.
Note
• Put together two layers of water soluble
stabilizer, otherwise the stabilizer material may
tear during embroidering.
Appliqué and Couching
186
11 Lightly apply glue and paste the appliqué
piece so that it aligns with the placement
line.
12 With the machine threaded using the
thread for the outline from step
10,
embroider the outline (APPLIQUE).
a Outline of appliqué piece
13 After embroidering is finished, remove
the stabilizer material from the
embroidery frame.
14 Use scissors to cut the excess water
soluble stabilizer from outside the
appliqué outline.
15 Soak the appliqué piece in water to
dissolve the water soluble stabilizer.
* For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
water soluble stabilizer.
16 Dry the appliqué piece, and then iron it if
necessary.
Using a Frame Pattern for the
Outline
Using a frame pattern, the desired shape can be
added as the outline of the appliqué. To select the
desired frame, refer to “Selecting Frame Patterns”
on page 136.
1 Select the pattern and edit, if necessary.
And then touch [Add].
2 Select the desired frame shape and
pattern, and add it to the appliqué
pattern.
3 Touch [Edit] to edit the frame pattern to
fit the size of the appliqué pattern.
4 Touch .
5 Specify the distance between the frame
pattern and the appliqué outline, and
then touch [OK].
6 Touch to ungroup the patterns.
Note
• Before pasting the appliqué piece down, make
sure the appliqué piece is positioned correctly
within the placement line.
Memo
• The outline is sewn using satin stitching.
• Some glue may get onto the embroidery foot,
needle, and needle plate at this time. Finish
embroidering the appliqué pattern, and then
clean off the glue.
Note
• Do not apply a strong force when ironing,
otherwise the stitching may be damaged.
Appliqué and Couching
187
Advanced Embroidery
5
7 Use to select the frame pattern,
and then touch and [OK].
The frame pattern is deleted.
8 Touch [Embroidery].
9 Continue with step 5 of “Creating an
Appliqué Piece” on page 184 to complete
the appliqué piece.
This machine can embroider patterns that
contain an appliqué. If selecting an embroidery
pattern that contains an appliqué, the steps for
appliqué appear in embroidery color order
display. The display will change depending on
the [Thread color] setting. (page 25)
a When [Name of Color] is selected.
b When [#123] (thread number) is selected.
Required materials
• Fabric for the appliqué piece
• Fabric for the appliqué base
• Stabilizer material
• Craft glue
• Embroidery thread
Embroidering the Appliqué
Patterns
Note
• Refer to “Embroidery Design Guide” to review
the recommended method for built-in appliqué
patterns. Some appliqué patterns differ from
the procedure described in this manual.
12
Memo
• The specific names and numbers of the thread
colors to be used when creating and attaching
the appliqué piece will not appear in the
embroidery color order display. Use thread
colors that coordinate with the appliqué
pattern and fabrics.
Appliqué and Couching
188
1. Creating the Appliqué Piece
1
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong
side of the appliqué fabric.
2 Sew the cutting line of the appliqué
piece. Remove the fabric for the appliqué
piece from the embroidery frame, and
then carefully cut along the sewn cutting
line.
a Cutting line for appliqué piece
b Fabric for appliqué piece
2. Sewing the Appliqué Position
on the Base Fabric
1
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong
side of the fabric for the appliqué base.
2 Sew the appliqué position.
a Appliqué position
b Base fabric
3 Remove the embroidery frame from the
embroidery unit.
3. Affixing the Appliqué Piece to
the Base Fabric
1
Lightly apply craft glue to the back of the
appliqué piece, and then attach it to the
base fabric within the outline of the
position sewn in step
2 of “2. Sewing the
Appliqué Position on the Base Fabric” on
page 188.
Note
• If the appliqué piece is cut out along the inside
of the cutting line, it may not be correctly
attached to the fabric. Therefore, carefully cut
out the appliqué piece along the cutting line.
• After cutting out the appliqué piece, carefully
remove the thread.
Note
• Do not remove the base fabric from the
embroidery frame until all embroidering is
finished.
Note
• If the appliqué piece cannot be attached to the
base fabric with craft glue, securely baste it in
place with basting stitches.
• If thin fabric is used for the appliqué piece,
reinforce and secure it in place with an iron-on
adhesive sheet. An iron can be used to attach
the appliqué piece to the appliqué location.
Appliqué and Couching
189
Advanced Embroidery
5
2 After the appliqué piece is attached,
attach the embroidery frame to the
machine.
3 Thread the machine with the embroidery
thread, lower the presser foot, and then
press the “Start/Stop” button to
embroider the appliqué.
4. Embroidering the Remainder of
the Pattern
1
Change the embroidery thread according
to the embroidery color order display,
and then finish embroidering the
remainder of the pattern.
Method 1
You can use framed patterns of the same size and
shape to create an appliqué. Embroider one
pattern with a straight stitch and one pattern with a
satin stitch.
1 Select a straight stitch frame pattern.
Embroider the pattern onto the appliqué
material, then cut neatly around the
outside of the shape.
2 Embroider the same pattern from step 1
onto the base fabric.
3 Apply a thin layer of fabric glue or a
temporary spray adhesive to the rear of
the appliqué created in step
1. Attach the
appliqué to the base fabric matching the
shapes.
Memo
• Since glue may become attached to the
embroidery foot, needle or needle plate, clean
off any glue off after finishing embroidering the
appliqué pattern.
• For best results, trim all excess threads each
time the thread color is changed.
Using a Frame Pattern to Make an
Appliqué
Note
• If you change the size or position of the
patterns when making an appliqué, make a
note of the size and the location.
Appliqué and Couching
190
4 Select the satin stitch frame pattern of
the same shape as the appliqué.
Embroider over the appliqué and base
fabric from step
3 to create the appliqué.
Method 2
1
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and
embroider the pattern onto the base
fabric.
2 Place the appliqué fabric over the pattern
embroidered in step
1 and embroider the
same pattern on the fabric for the
appliqué piece.
* Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers
the stitching.
3 Remove the embroidery frame from the
embroidery unit, and cut around the
outside of the stitches of the fabric for
the appliqué piece. And then, reattach the
embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
4 Select the satin stitch frame pattern of
the same shape as the appliqué and
embroider the satin stitch pattern to
create an appliqué.
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame to cut it. Also, do not pull strongly on the
fabric. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
embroidery frame.
Appliqué and Couching
191
Advanced Embroidery
5
Couching patterns can be embroidered using
yarn.
Preparing for Embroidery
Couching
1
Turn off the machine.
Attach the embroidery unit.
2 Install a bobbin wound with embroidery
bobbin thread.
3 Turn on the machine.
4 Touch [Embroidery] in the home page
screen, and then touch .
5 Select the desired pattern from the
desired category.
And then touch [Set].
a Couching patterns
b Fill couching embroidery font
6 Touch to lock all keys and buttons,
and then raise the presser foot lever.
7 Attach embroidery couching foot “Y”.
8 Rotate the handwheel and check that the
needle is in the left half of the hole in
embroidery couching foot “Y”.
If the needle is not in the left half, use the multi-
purpose screwdriver to turn the screw of embroidery
couching foot “Y” to adjust the position of the
embroidery foot. Turn the screw toward you to move
the embroidery foot to the right. Turn the screw toward
the back to move the embroidery foot to the left.
After making adjustments, rotate the handwheel and
check that the needle does not touch the presser foot.
Embroidering Couching Patterns
CAUTION
• When using yarn, we recommend selecting yarn of
weight 4 (MEDIUM ). Medium yarn is often referred
to as worsted weight, 20 knitted stitches per 10 cm, or 9-
11 wraps per inch. The diameter of the yarn is
approximately 2-3 mm (approx.1/12-1/8 inch). If the yarn
is extremely thin or thick, has an unusual shape (flat or
furry), or more than 2 yarns, the best finishing results
may not be achieved, or injuries or damage may result.
Note
• Before embroidering your project, do trial
embroidery on a scrap piece of fabric that is
the same as that used in your project.
CAUTION
• When using embroidery couching foot “Y”, make sure
the machine is in embroidery mode. Otherwise, the
needle will strike the embroidery couching foot, causing
the needle to break and possibly causing injury.
a b
Appliqué and Couching
192
9 Attach the spool stand to the machine.
At this time, do not raise the telescopic thread guide
shaft.
* Refer to “Using the Spool Stand” on page 45.
10 Insert the yarn guide into the slot on the
top left of the machine.
11 Pass the yarn through the telescopic
thread guide and the yarn guide (1) to
(2).
12 Pass the yarn through the guide on
embroidery couching foot “Y”.
13 Thread the yarn through embroidery
couching foot “Y”.
Pass the yarn through the loop in the
yarn threader, and then pass the threader
from top to bottom through the hole in
embroidery couching foot “Y”. Pull the
yarn to the front of the machine.
14 Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
15 Thread the machine with the upper
thread by using the spool pin. (page 42)
16 Press (Presser foot lifter button)
twice to raise the presser foot and then
attach the embroidery frame to the
embroidery unit.
Note
• Pull off an appropriate amount of yarn from the
ball so that the yarn does not become taut.
• Make sure that the yarn does not become
entangled as you work.
Memo
• Place a sheet of paper under the presser foot
to smoothly pass the yarn threader through the
hole in embroidery couching foot “Y”.
Note
• Do not use the spool stand for upper thread.
Otherwise thread may tangle with yarn.
Memo
• For best results, use an upper thread that is
the same color as the yarn.
Appliqué and Couching
193
Advanced Embroidery
5
Embroidering a Couching Pattern
1
Touch [Embroidery].
2 Make sure that about 20 cm (approx.
8 inches) of yarn is pulled to the front of
the machine.
3 While holding the yarn in your hand in
front of you, press the “Start/Stop”
button.
4 After embroidering several stitches,
release the yarn.
When embroidering is finished, the machine will
automatically trim the threads and stop.
5 Cut the yarn, leaving about 20 cm
(approx. 8 inches).
6 Punch a hole through the fabric with an
awl or tapestry needle and then use the
yarn threader to pull the excess yarn to
the wrong side of the fabric.
7 Tie the end of the yarn so it cannot be
pulled out, and then use scissors to cut
off any excess yarn.
CAUTION
• Pulling the yarn upwards may cause it to catch on the
needle, causing it to break. Be careful not to allow the
yarn to catch on the needle.
Note
• Before embroidering, make sure that there is
enough yarn, upper thread and bobbin thread.
• Make sure that the yarn passes smoothly
through the guides. Unravel as much yarn
from the ball as necessary so that the yarn
does not become taut.
• Use yarn that has no knots.
Memo
• When using a high-density yarn, the upper
thread tension may be disturbed. If this
happens, it is possible to improve it by raising
the [Embroidery Foot Height] by about 1 mm
on the settings screen.
Embroidering Quilting
194
Stippling, echo quilting, and decorative fill
patterns can be created around the machine’s
built-in patterns or original embroidery data
without using My Design Center.
1 Select the pattern that stippling will be
added around.
* To select multiple patterns, refer to “Selecting
Multiple Patterns at the Same Time” on page 148.
2 Touch in the embroidery edit screen.
Stippling is automatically applied around the
selected pattern.
3 After specifying the stitch settings for the
stippling, touch [OK].
a The stippling is added within the area of the
selected embroidery frame size. If the pattern is
larger than the selected embroidery frame size, the
area indicating the embroidery frame size will
appear in gray, and stippling will not be added.
b Specify the distance from the outline of the pattern
to the stippling.
c Specify the spacing for the stippling.
Embroidering Quilting
Creating Quilting Patterns around
a Design
Memo
• If this function is used with batting sandwiched
between two layers of fabric, the embroidery
pattern and stippling may become misaligned.
Stippling can be added in My Design Center
after the pattern is embroidered. For details,
refer to “Decorative Stitching Around a
Pattern” on page 249.
Memo
• Touch to create an echo quilting pattern.
Touch to create a decorative fill pattern.
*1
Echo quilting pattern
*2
Decorative fill pattern
a
b
c
*1 *2
Embroidering Quilting
195
Advanced Embroidery
5
Connect quilting patterns to embroider from edge
to edge of a specified area. By rehooping a large
piece of fabric, you can continue embroidering
the quilting pattern across the entire fabric.
Creating Edge-to-Edge Quilt Data
1
Determine the area of the fabric to be
embroidered, and then draw a line
around it with a chalk pencil. Measure the
width and height.
a Embroidering area
2 Touch , and then touch .
3 Select the pattern that you want to
embroider, and then touch [Set].
4 Specify 1 to 4, and then touch [Next].
a Width
b Height
* After entering a value, touch [Set] to apply the
value. To clear the entered value, touch [C].
c Touch or to select the embroidery frame
size.
d Touch [Select] to flip every other pattern. Select
the desired flip arrangement (no flipping, left/right
flipping, up/down flipping, left/right and up/down
flipping) from the flip keys, and then touch [OK].
5 Check the pattern, and then touch
to save it.
a The thread color can be changed.
b Select single stitching or triple stitching.
Embroidering a Quilting Pattern
Across the Entire Fabric (Edge-to-
Edge Quilt Function)
Note
• Make sure that the chalk pencil line is within
the embroidering area when the fabric is
hooped.
a
d
b
c
a
b
a
Embroidering Quilting
196
6 After the following message appears,
touch [OK].
A screen appears so that a pattern from the
machine’s memory can be selected.
Embroidering the Edge-to-Edge
Quilt Pattern
1
In the screen for selecting a pattern from
the machine’s memory, select the saved
data.
2 For this example, since we will embroider
the edge-to-edge quilt pattern according
to the on-screen instructions, select the
thumbnail for the entire edge-to-edge
quilt pattern. And then touch [Set].
a Touch this key to embroider the edge-to-edge quilt
pattern according to the on-screen instructions.
The number in the lower-left corner indicates the
total number of segments for the edge-to-edge
quilt pattern.
b To embroider by visually aligning the pattern
sections, touch each pattern section to be
embroidered.
You can check where and how many times the part
will be embroidered with the codes written on each
key.
“A” refers to rows other than the last one, “Z” refers
to the last row, and the numbers indicate the order
in which the patterns are to be connected.
Example: When connecting patterns in 2 rows and
3 columns
Example: When connecting patterns in 4 rows and
4 columns
3 Hoop the quilt in the embroidery frame so
that the marked upper-left corner of the
edge-to-edge quilt pattern is in the
embroidering area, and then attach the
embroidery frame.
b
a
Embroidering Quilting
197
Advanced Embroidery
5
4 Use the move pattern keys to align the
upper-left corner of the chalk reference
lines previously drawn on the quilt with
the upper-left corner of the part projected
by the projector. Then, touch [OK].
a Upper-left corner
5 Rotate the pattern to align the upper-right
corner with the chalk reference line.
a Upper-right corner
6 Touch [OK] to display the embroidery
screen.
7 Press the “Start/Stop” button to
embroider the first part.
a
Memo
• To readjust the position or angle of the pattern,
touch [Layout], and then touch or .
a
Embroidering Quilting
198
8 When embroidering is finished and the
following message appears, touch [OK].
The next part to be embroidered appears.
9 Position each part and embroider it
according to the on-screen instructions.
You will be prompted to align the starting
point and to rehoop the quilt when
necessary.
a Second column of first row ( )
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point with the end
point of the previous pattern.
Rotate the pattern to align the upper-right corner with the chalk
reference line.
b Rightmost column of first row ( )
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point with the end
point of the previous pattern.
To align the upper-right corner with the chalk reference lines,
adjust the angle and width of the pattern.
*1
Touch to change the angle of the pattern.
*2
Touch to change the width of the pattern.
Note
• For precise positioning of the start point, rotate
the handwheel toward you to check the exact
needle drop point. After checking the needle
position, be sure to use the needle up/down
key to return the needle to its highest position.
a b
dc e
*1
*2
Embroidering Quilting
199
Advanced Embroidery
5
c Leftmost column of second row (last row) ( )
Use the move pattern keys to align the upper-left corner with the
thread mark of the embroidered pattern above.
To align the upper-right corner with the thread mark of the
embroidered pattern above, adjust the angle and width of the
pattern.
*1
Touch to change the angle of the pattern.
*2
Touch to change the width of the pattern.
Touch , and then adjust the length to align the pattern with
the chalk reference line.
d Second column of the second row (last row)
()
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point with the end
point of the previous pattern.
To align the upper-right corner with the thread mark of the
embroidered pattern above, adjust the angle and width of the
pattern.
Touch , and then adjust the length to align the pattern with
the chalk reference line.
*1
*2
Embroidering Quilting
200
e Rightmost column of second row (last row) ( )
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point with the end
point of the previous pattern.
To align the upper-right corner with the thread mark of the
embroidered pattern above, adjust the angle and width of the
pattern.
Touch , and then adjust the length to align the pattern with
the chalk reference line.
10 Remove the thread marks.
Memo
• If you need to restitch a segment or skip a
segment, you can touch in the embroidery
screen to continue to the next pattern or return
to the previous pattern. Select the desired
pattern in the embroidering order, and then
touch [OK].
a Return to the previous pattern.
b Embroidering order of current pattern/Total
number of segments
c Continue to the next pattern.
a b c
Embroidering Quilting
201
Advanced Embroidery
5
Quilting border patterns up to 890 mm × 550 mm
(approx. 35-3/64 inches × 21-21/32 inches) can
be split into four sections to be stitched in the
selected embroidery frame. The built-in camera
will assist with placement.
It is recommended to measure the size of quilting
border you want to embroider in the beginning.
1 Touch .
2 Select one of the rectangular quilting
border categories. For this example,
select single-color rectangular quilting
border patterns.
a Single-color rectangular quilting border patterns
b Two-color rectangular quilting border patterns
c Hexagonal quilt border patterns
d Edge-to-Edge quilt patterns
3 Select the quilt border pattern, and then
touch [Set].
4 Select how to divide the pattern. For this
example, select “Auto split quilt sash”.
a Auto split quilt sash
b Semi-Auto split quilt sash
For details, refer to “Embroidering Quilting Border
Patterns (Semi-Auto Split Quilt Sash)” on page 203
5 Specify the size of embroidery frame to
be used. Enter values for the width and
height of the sash and quilting border,
and then touch [Set]. After entering all
three values, touch [Next].
a Embroidery frame size
b Width
c Height
d Quilting border width
* To clear the value, touch [C].
The pattern appears with the specified settings
applied.
Embroidering Quilting Border
Patterns (Auto Split Quilt Sash)
Memo
• The hexagonal quilt borders patterns and
edge-to-edge quilt patterns are not available
for this function.
a b dc
Note
• The size of item that can be created differs
depending on the type of split that was
selected. Check the layout of “Auto split quilt
sash”, and then select “Semi-Auto split quilt
sash” if the layout did not appear as desired.
a b
d
c
b
a
Embroidering Quilting
202
6 Check the split pattern, and then touch
.
a You can change the thread color.
b Select single stitching or triple stitching.
The data for the split embroidery pattern is saved
on the machine.
7 To embroider the pattern, touch [OK].
8 Select the embroidering method, and
then touch [Set].
a To embroider using the built-in camera for aligning
the embroidering position, touch the key showing
the entire pattern.
b To embroider by visually aligning the pattern
sections, touch the pattern section to be
embroidered.
* This manual shows method 1. For method 2,
refer to “Connecting the Pattern Sections
Manually” on page 215.
9 Touch [Embroidery].
10 Attach the embroidery frame along with
the first section being embroidered, and
scan the embroidery frame. For scanning
the background, refer to “Display the
Fabric on the Screen” on page 157.
11 Move and rotate the pattern to align with
the background.
• For moving or rotating the pattern, refer to
“[Layout] Window” on page 145.
12 Embroider the first section.
13 After embroidering the first section, the
following message appears. Touch [OK].
Memo
• The data for the split embroidery pattern
cannot be saved on external media such as
USB media.
a
b
ba
Embroidering Quilting
203
Advanced Embroidery
5
14 Touch .
15 Touch [OK].
16 Embroider the remaining sections
following step
13 through 19 of
“Aligning Pattern Edges” on page 217.
By rehooping the fabric to embroider connecting
patterns, a quilting border of up to 3 m × 3 m
(approx. 118 inches × 118 inches) can be
created. The pattern is positioned manually.
Creating Quilting Border Data
1
With a chalk pencil, mark the quilt top
with the inner outline of the quilting
border to be embroidered.
Measure the size of the quilting border.
a Inner outline (used for positioning)
b Width (includes the width of borders)
c Height (includes the height of borders)
d Width of quilting border
2 Touch .
Embroidering Quilting Border
Patterns (Semi-Auto Split Quilt
Sash)
Memo
• Be sure to cut the quilt layers (quilt top,
batting, and quilt backing) with an excess of
about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) so that the
quilt will extend to the edges of the embroidery
frame.
b
c
d
a
Embroidering Quilting
204
3 Select a sub-category.
For this example, select two-color
rectangular quilting border patterns.
a Single-color rectangular quilting border patterns
b Two-color rectangular quilting border patterns
4 Select the pattern that you want to
embroider, and then touch [Set].
5 Select how to divide the pattern. For this
example, select “Semi-Auto split quilt
sash”.
a Auto split quilt sash
For details, refer to “Embroidering Quilting Border
Patterns (Auto Split Quilt Sash)” on page 201
b Semi-Auto split quilt sash
6 Specify the size of embroidery frame to
be used and the size of the quilting
border, and then touch [Next].
a Touch or to select the embroidery frame
size.
b Specify the width (A), height (B) and quilting border
width (C), and then touch [Set].
a b
a b
Memo
• Mark the upper-right corner of the quilt border
with a chalk pencil. On the machine’s screen,
enter the horizontal and vertical
measurements to match the orientation of the
quilt with the marked corner positioned in the
upper right.
a
A
B
C
b
Embroidering Quilting
205
Advanced Embroidery
5
7 Check the pattern, and then touch
to save it.
a The thread colors can be changed.
b Select single stitching or triple stitching.
8 After the following message appears,
touch [OK].
A screen appears so that a pattern from the
machine’s memory can be selected.
Embroidering a Quilting Border
1
In the screen for selecting a pattern from
the machine’s memory, select the saved
data.
A thumbnail of the entire quilting border and
thumbnails of the parts in each section appear.
2 For this example, since we will embroider
the quilting border according to the on-
screen instructions, select the thumbnail
for the entire quilting border. And then
touch [Set].
a Touch this key to embroider the quilting border
according to the on-screen instructions. The
number in the lower-left corner indicates the total
number of segments for the quilt border.
b To embroider by visually aligning the pattern
sections, touch each pattern section to be
embroidered.
You can check where and how many times the part
will be embroidered with the codes written on each
key.
C: Corner
V1: The first part of the vertical side
V2: The second part of the vertical side
H1: The first part of the horizontal side
3 Hoop the quilt in the embroidery frame so
that the marked upper-right corner of the
quilting border is in the embroidering
area, and then attach the embroidery
frame.
Memo
• The edges of the pattern may be shortened
when they are displayed.
b
a
b
a
Embroidering Quilting
206
4 Align the position for the part in the
upper-right corner.
With selected, move the needle to the inner
corner. Use the move pattern keys to align the inside
upper-right corner of the reference lines previously
drawn on the quilt with the inner corner of the part
projected by the projector.
a Inner corner
5 Touch [OK] to display the embroidery
screen.
6 Press the “Start/Stop” button to
embroider the first part.
7 When embroidering is finished and the
following message appears, touch [OK].
The next part to be embroidered appears.
8 Position each part and embroider it
according to the on-screen instructions.
You will be prompted to align the starting point, rotate
the design, and to rehoop the quilt when necessary.
a When embroidering the edge part
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
Memo
• The needle drop point projected by the
projector can be corrected on the settings
screen. For the procedure, refer to “Needle
Calibration for Camera/Projector” on
page 257.
• If necessary, rotate the pattern so that it is
aligned between the chalk reference lines.
a
Note
• For precise positioning of the start point, rotate
the handwheel toward you to check the needle
drop point. After checking the needle position,
be sure to use the needle up/down key to
return the needle to its highest position.
Memo
• If the next pattern can be embroidered without
rehooping the project, the on-screen
instructions to align the start point of the
pattern will not be displayed as the pattern will
automatically be aligned with the start point.
b
a
b
d
b
c
c
a
c
Embroidering Quilting
207
Advanced Embroidery
5
Rotate the pattern to align the corner with the reference line,
and then touch [OK].
b When embroidering the edge part immediately
before a corner
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
Then, align the lower-left point (inner corner of the next pattern
to be embroidered) with the lower-left corner of the reference
lines. If the pattern is not angled correctly, rotate it. If the length
of the pattern does not match, enlarge or reduce the pattern so
that the lower-left point is at the lower-left corner of the
reference lines.
After making adjustments, touch [OK].
*1
Inner corner of next pattern to be embroidered
c When embroidering the corner part
Rotate the quilt 90 degrees counterclockwise, rehoop it, and
then attach the embroidery frame to the machine.
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
Then, align the inner corner of the pattern with the corner of the
reference lines.
d When embroidering the last edge part
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
*1
Memo
• The width of the corner segment can be
adjusted to best fit the inner corner. However,
make adjustments so that the shape is not
deformed.
Embroidering Quilting
208
Then, align the end point of the part with the start point of the
first part. If the pattern is not angled correctly, rotate it. If the
length of the pattern does not match, enlarge or reduce the
pattern.
After making adjustments, touch [OK].
Creating Quilting Border Data
1
With a chalk pencil, mark the quilt top
with the inner outline of the quilting
border to be embroidered.
Measure the longest diagonal of the inner
outline and the width of the quilting
border.
a Inner outline (used for positioning)
b Longest diagonal
c Width of quilting border
2 Touch .
3 Touch .
4 Select the pattern that you want to
embroider, and then touch [Set].
Memo
• If you need to restitch a segment or skip a
segment, you can touch in the embroidery
screen to continue to the next pattern or return
to the previous pattern. Select the desired
pattern in the embroidering order, and then
touch [OK].
a Return to the previous pattern.
b Embroidering order of current pattern/Total
number of segments
c Continue to the next pattern.
a b c
Hexagonal Quilting Borders
Memo
• Be sure to cut the quilt layers (quilt top,
batting, and quilt backing) with an excess of
about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) so that the
quilt will extend to the edges of the embroidery
frame.
• Hexagonal patterns can be embroidered with
a diagonal width of maximum 2600 mm
(approx. 102 inches) and a quilting border
width of maximum 100 mm (approx. 4 inches).
ab
c
Embroidering Quilting
209
Advanced Embroidery
5
5 Specify the size of embroidery frame to
be used and the measurements for the
quilting border, and then touch [Next].
a Touch or to select the embroidery frame
size.
b Specify the length of the longest diagonal for the
inner outline (A) and the quilting border width (B),
and then touch [Set].
6 Check the pattern, and then touch
to save it.
a The thread colors can be changed.
b Select single stitching or triple stitching.
7 After the following message appears,
touch [OK].
A screen appears so that a pattern from the
machine’s memory can be selected.
Embroidering a Quilting Border
1
In the screen for selecting a pattern from
the machine’s memory, select the saved
data.
A thumbnail of the entire quilting border and
thumbnails of the parts in each section appear.
Memo
• The edges of the pattern may be shortened
when they are displayed.
a
A
B
b
b
a
Embroidering Quilting
210
2 For this example, since we will embroider
the quilting border according to the on-
screen instructions, select the thumbnail
for the entire quilting border. And then
touch [Set].
a Touch this key to embroider the quilting border
according to the on-screen instructions. The
number in the lower-left corner indicates the total
number of segments for the quilt border.
b To embroider by visually aligning the pattern
sections, touch each pattern section to be
embroidered.
You can check where and how many times the part
will be embroidered with the codes written on each
key.
C: Corner
S: Side
3 Hoop the quilt in the embroidery frame so
that the one of the corners of the quilting
border is in the embroidering area, and
then attach the embroidery frame.
4 Align the position for the part in the
corner.
Use the move pattern keys to align the inside corner of
the reference lines previously drawn on the quilt with
the inner corner of the part projected by the projector.
a Inner corner
5 Touch [OK] to display the embroidery
screen.
6 Press the “Start/Stop” button to
embroider the first part.
7 When embroidering is finished and the
following message appears, touch [OK].
The next part to be embroidered appears.
b
a
C
C
S2
S1
C
S2
S1
S2
S1
C
C
S2
S1
C
S2
S1
S2
S1
Memo
• The needle drop point projected by the
projector can be corrected on the settings
screen. For the procedure, refer to “Needle
Calibration for Camera/Projector” on
page 257.
• If necessary, rotate the pattern so that it is
aligned between the chalk reference lines.
a
Embroidering Quilting
211
Advanced Embroidery
5
8 Position each part and embroider it
according to the on-screen instructions.
You will be prompted to align the starting point, rotate
the design, and to rehoop the quilt when necessary.
a When embroidering the edge part
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
Rotate the pattern to align the corner of the projected segment
with the reference line on the quilt, and then touch [OK].
b When embroidering the edge part immediately
before a corner
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
Then, align the lower-left point (inner corner of the next pattern
to be embroidered) with the lower-left corner of the reference
lines. If the pattern is not angled correctly, rotate it. If the length
of the pattern does not match, enlarge or reduce the pattern so
that the lower-left point of the segment is at the lower-left corner
of the reference lines on the quilt.
After making adjustments, touch [OK].
*1
Inner corner of next pattern to be embroidered
c When embroidering the corner part
Rotate the quilt counterclockwise, rehoop it, and then attach the
embroidery frame to the machine.
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
Then, align the inner corner of the pattern with the corner of the
reference lines.
Note
• For precise positioning of the start point, rotate
the handwheel toward you to check the needle
drop point. After checking the needle position,
be sure to use the needle up/down key to
return the needle to its highest position.
Memo
• If the next pattern can be embroidered without
rehooping the project, the on-screen
instructions to align the start point of the
pattern will not be displayed as the pattern will
automatically be aligned with the start point.
b
c
a
b
c
c
a
a
d
a
c
b
a
b
b
a
c
Memo
• To maintain the overall shape of the hexagon,
it is important to carefully check and adjust the
length of the pattern that is stitched
immediately before the corner.
*1
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
212
d When embroidering the last edge part
Use the move pattern keys to align the start point projected by
the projector with the end point of the previous pattern, and then
touch [OK].
Then, align the end point of the part with the start point of the
first part. If the pattern is not angled correctly, rotate it. If the
length of the pattern does not match, enlarge or reduce the
pattern.
After making adjustments, touch [OK].
This machine has several built-in large-size split
embroidery patterns.
Split embroidery patterns are large patterns that
are divided into multiple sections. A large pattern
can be created by embroidering the connected
pattern sections one after the other.
Additional split embroidery patterns can be
created in PE-DESIGN version 7 or later. For
details, refer to the manual for PE-DESIGN.
There are two methods: one uses the built-in
camera to connect the patterns and the other
connects the patterns manually.
Connecting the Pattern Sections
with the Camera
1
Touch and then select a pattern.
* To ensure the entire large-connect pattern can be
successfully embroidered, prepare fabric and
stabilizer at least 300 mm (approx. 12 inches)
longer and wider than total design size.
a Size of the entire pattern
Memo
• The width of the corner segment can be
adjusted to best fit the inner corner. However,
make adjustments so that the shape is not
deformed.
Memo
• If you need to restitch a segment or skip a
segment, you can touch in the embroidery
screen to continue to the next pattern or return
to the previous pattern. Select the desired
pattern in the embroidering order, and then
touch [OK].
a Return to the previous pattern.
b Embroidering order of current pattern/Total
number of segments
c Continue to the next pattern.
a b c
Using the Camera to
Connect Patterns
Embroidering Split Embroidery
Patterns
a
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
213
Advanced Embroidery
5
2 Touch the whole pattern icon to connect
the pattern sections with the camera. And
then touch [Set].
3 Embroider the first pattern.
4 Touch [OK].
5 Touch .
6 Check the pattern arrangement, and then
touch [OK].
* Since each built-in pattern has been properly
arranged, there is no need to move it.
Memo
• Printable templates of each large-connect
design can be downloaded from https://
s.brother/cmdkd/ . These templates will assist
with positioning the patterns. Do not enlarge or
shrink the page.
• To embroider split embroidery patterns
created with PE-DESIGN, retrieve the pattern
from USB media and so on. For details on
recalling patterns, refer to “Retrieving
Embroidery Patterns” on page 168. Check the
entire pattern size with PE-DESIGN.
Memo
• To connect the pattern sections without using
the camera, refer to “Connecting the Pattern
Sections Manually” on page 215.
[A:a] [A:b] [A:c]
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame.
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
214
7 Touch [OK].
8 Affix the first embroidery positioning
sticker onto the fabric within the red lines
by using both hands to press down on
each corner of the sticker. Affix the
sticker with the large circle to the top as
shown on machine. Then, touch [Scan].
The camera detects the first embroidery
positioning sticker.
9 Affix the second embroidery positioning
sticker to the fabric as described in step
8, and then touch [Scan].
The camera detects the second embroidery
positioning sticker.
10 While making sure that the two
embroidery positioning stickers do not
peel off, remove the embroidery frame
from the machine, and then rehoop the
fabric.
* Be sure to hoop the fabric so the next pattern and
both the embroidery positioning stickers are within
the embroidery area.
a Embroidery area
b If a built-in large-size split embroidery pattern is
selected, and depending on the embroidery frame
size being used, a scale may appear on the
screen.
c Embroidery positioning stickers
d Distance between the embroidery positioning
stickers
Note
• If any of the following messages appear,
reattach the embroidery positioning sticker
firmly in the correct position.
d
b
a
c
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
215
Advanced Embroidery
5
11 Reattach the embroidery frame and touch
[Scan].
12 Touch [OK], and then remove the
stickers.
13 Embroider the second pattern.
14 Embroider the remaining patterns in the
same way.
Connecting the Pattern Sections
Manually
1
Touch and then select a pattern.
2 Select section to be embroidered.
* Select the sections in alphabetical order.
Memo
• In order to cleanly connect the first and second
patterns, make sure that the distance between
the embroidery positioning stickers (distance
between the centers of the large circles) is the
same before and after rehooping the fabric. If
the distance is not the same, the fabric may
not be taut. At this time, do not correct the
distance by moving a sticker.
• If the following message appears after step
11, rehoop the fabric so that the distance is
the same as that displayed. And then touch
[Scan].
• If the following message appears, rehoop the
fabric so that the next pattern and both the
embroidery positioning stickers are within the
embroidery area as indicated in the screen.
If problem persists, the machine may not
detect the embroidery positioning stickers.
Check the following:
- Make sure nothing obstructs the embroidery
positioning sticker.
- Set the fabric into the embroidery frame
correctly.
- Adjust the brightness of the lighting in the
room or the machine.
• For best results, if fabric puckers, iron the
wrong side of the fabric to smooth out before
rehooping. At this time, do not iron over or
remove the embroidery positioning stickers.
Memo
• With a built-in large-size split embroidery
pattern, if the distance between the
embroidery positioning stickers (distance
between the centers of the large circles) differs
by a few millimeters before and after the fabric
is rehooped, the pattern will be automatically
resized.
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
216
3 Touch [Embroidery] to display the
embroidery screen.
4 Embroider the first pattern.
The pattern and alignment stitching are
embroidered.
5 Touch [OK].
6 Select the next pattern, and then touch
[Embroidery].
7 Rehoop the fabric. Adjust the position
and angle for the next pattern so that the
alignment stitching embroidered with the
first pattern and the needle position for
the next pattern are aligned. For this
example, touch , select the upper-left
needle position, and then touch [OK].
Memo
• For best results, if fabric puckers, iron the
wrong side of the fabric to smooth out before
rehooping.
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
217
Advanced Embroidery
5
8 Touch [Layout], and then adjust the
position and angle for the next pattern so
that the needle position is aligned with
the alignment stitching embroidered with
the first pattern.
* To adjust the position of the pattern, touch .
* To adjust the angle of the pattern, touch .
a Alignment stitching
9 In the same way, select the lower-left
needle position, and then adjust the
position and angle of the next pattern so
that the needle aligns with the thread
mark embroidered with the first pattern.
10 Embroider the second pattern.
11 Embroider the remaining patterns in the
same way as with the second pattern.
12 Remove the thread marks.
Instead of using thread marks, the camera can
be used to connect patterns in the embroidery
screen.
Select the appropriate embroidery frame
depending on the size of the embroidery. The
distance between the pattern and the embroidery
area of the embroidery frame must be at least
3 cm (approx. 1-3/16 inches). The small
embroidery frame (2 cm × 6 cm (approx. 1 inch ×
2-1/2 inches)) cannot be used with the camera
function.
Example:
a Pattern A
b Pattern B
c Pattern C
1 Select the first pattern A, and then touch
[Set].
* To select the desired frame pattern, refer to
“Selecting Frame Patterns” on page 136.
2 Thread the machine with the upper
thread and the bobbin thread.
a
Aligning Pattern Edges
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
218
3 Hoop fabric in the embroidery frame, and
then attach the frame to the machine. For
this example, we will use the 18 cm × 13
cm (approx. 7 inches × 5 inches)
embroidery frame.
4 Touch [Embroidery] to display the
embroidery screen.
5 Touch [Layout].
6 Touch .
appears above the [Return] key, and then
changes to .
7 Lower the embroidery foot, and then
embroider the first pattern.
8 After embroidering of the first pattern is
finished, the following message appears.
Touch [OK].
9 When the following message appears,
touch [OK].
10 Select the second pattern B, and then
touch [Set].
11 Touch , and then select how the
patterns will be connected.
The pattern connection setting screen appears.
Memo
• can be touched while embroidering.
• A pattern cannot be saved in the machine’s
memory while patterns are being connected.
Memo
• You can edit the second pattern in this screen.
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
219
Advanced Embroidery
5
12 Select the position of the second pattern
by touching on the screen. Touch [OK]
after specifying the position.
a Connecting point
b First pattern A
c Second pattern B
* You can adjust the position of the second pattern
using the keys described below.
Message appears on screen and carriage will
move after touching [OK].
13 Prepare two embroidery positioning
stickers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to affix the two stickers to
the fabric so that the positioning marks
can be detected by the camera.
14 Affix the first embroidery positioning
sticker onto the fabric within the red lines
that now appear on the screen of the
machine by using both hands to press
down on each corner of the sticker. Affix
the sticker with the large circle to the top
as shown on machine. Then, touch
[Scan].
The camera detects the first embroidery
positioning sticker.
Touch to rotate the second pattern in a clockwise
arc referring the first pattern as a center.
Touch to rotate the second pattern in a
counterclockwise arc referring the first pattern as a
center.
Rotate the second pattern 90 degrees in a
clockwise arc.
Memo
• The second pattern will be automatically
connected to the first pattern without
adjustment. Change the position of the second
pattern manually using .
• The position of the second pattern can also be
moved by dragging on the screen.
Note
• Use the embroidery positioning stickers
included with this product or purchase
replacement stickers from your authorized
Brother dealer. If any other sticker is used, the
camera may not recognize it.
a
b
c
Note
• Do not peel off the first embroidery positioning
sticker to use it for the second embroidery
positioning mark.
• Use new embroidery positioning stickers. If a
sticker is reused, it may easily peel off. If the
sticker peels off during this procedure, the
patterns cannot be connected.
• Use your fingers to apply pressure to the
corners of the embroidery positioning sticker
to firmly affix it to the fabric. If the sticker is not
firmly attached, the camera may incorrectly
detect the sticker.
• If any of the following messages appear,
reattach the embroidery positioning sticker in
the correct position. Make sure that the sticker
is affixed with the large circle at the top.
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
220
15 Use both hands to affix the second
embroidery positioning mark within the
red lines that now appear on the machine
by pressing down on each corner of the
positioning mark onto the material and
then touch [Scan].
The camera detects the second embroidery
positioning sticker. After the two embroidery
positioning stickers have been detected, the
following message appears.
a Embroidering area
b Distance between the embroidery positioning
stickers (Refer to “Memo” of step
10 of
“Connecting the Pattern Sections with the Camera”
on page 212)
16 While making sure that the two
embroidery positioning stickers do not
peel off, remove the embroidery frame
from the machine, and then rehoop the
fabric. Be sure to hoop the fabric so the
next pattern and both the embroidery
positioning stickers are within the
embroidery area. Reattach the
embroidery frame and touch [Scan].
a Pattern to be embroidered next
b Centers of large circles for stickers
The camera detects the two embroidery
positioning stickers.
a
b
a
b
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
221
Advanced Embroidery
5
17 After the embroidery positioning stickers
have been detected, touch [OK], and then
remove the stickers.
18 Lower the embroidery foot, and then
embroider the second pattern.
When embroidering is finished, the following
message appears.
To connect a third pattern, touch [OK].
19 When the following message appears,
touch [OK].
20 Select the third pattern C, and touch
[Set].
21 Touch , and then select how the
patterns will be connected.
The pattern connection setting screen appears.
Note
• If either of the following messages appear,
rehoop the fabric so that the next pattern and
both the embroidery positioning stickers are
within the embroidery area as indicated in the
screen.
Touch [Scan] to detect the embroidery
positioning stickers.
• If the machine detects that the next pattern
and the centers of the large circles of the two
embroidery positioning stickers do not fit within
the embroidering area, the operation will be
paused. Follow the on-screen instructions to
reposition the embroidery positioning stickers.
Refer to “Changing the Position of a Sticker”
on page 222 to reposition the stickers.
• If the sticker peels off during this procedure,
the patterns cannot be connected. If this
occurs, restart the procedure from the
beginning.
• To quit positioning, touch [Cancel].
Memo
• You can edit the pattern before selecting
.
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
222
22 Specify the position of the third pattern
referring to the screen display.
In this example, touch 2 times to select the
connection point, and then touch . Touch [OK]
after specifying the position.
a Connecting point
b Second pattern B
c Third pattern C
Message appears on screen and carriage will
move after touching [OK].
Follow steps
14 through 17 of “Aligning Pattern
Edges” on page 217 to position the next pattern.
23 Lower the embroidery foot, and then
embroider the third pattern.
When embroidering is finished, the following
message appears. When finished connecting
patterns, touch [Cancel].
After embroidering is finished, is no longer
located above the [Return] key.
The three patterns have been connected.
Changing the Position of a
Sticker
If the selected pattern or embroidery positioning
stickers for connecting the next pattern do not
easily fit in the embroidering area, follow the on-
screen instructions that appear after step
15 of
“Aligning Pattern Edges” on page 217 in order to
move the embroidery positioning stickers.
For an example, the on-screen instruction appears
when you use the embroidery frame with a size of
10 cm × 10 cm (approx. 4 inches × 4 inches) to
connect patterns as shown below.
a Pattern A
b Pattern B
1 Refer to steps 1 through 15 of “Aligning
Pattern Edges” on page 217 using the
embroidery frame with a size of 10 cm ×
10 cm (approx. 4 inches × 4 inches) to
embroider the first pattern and to
connect the second pattern.
a
b
c
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
223
Advanced Embroidery
5
2 Following message appears in step 16 of
“Aligning Pattern Edges” on page 217 if
the next pattern or affixed embroidery
positioning stickers are close to being
out of the embroidering area. Follow the
instructions and then touch [Scan].
a Embroidering area
*1
First pattern that was embroidered
*2
Pattern to be embroidered next
3 After the sticker position is detected,
touch [OK], and then remove the stickers.
4 Affix the two embroidery positioning
stickers again according to the on-screen
instructions so that the next pattern or
positioning marks can fit in the
embroidery area. Affix the first sticker
and then touch [Scan].
The camera detects the first embroidery
positioning sticker.
5 Affix the second sticker and then touch
[Scan].
The camera detects the second embroidery
positioning sticker.
Note
• If the following message appears, rehoop the
fabric as indicated in the screen, and then
touch [Scan].
a
*1
*2
Using the Camera to Connect Patterns
224
6 After the two embroidery positioning
stickers have been detected, the
following message appears. While
making sure that the embroidery
positioning stickers do not peel off,
rehoop the fabric according to the
example displayed on the on-screen
instruction.
a Embroidering area
a Pattern to be embroidered next
7 Continue the operation from step 17 of
“Aligning Pattern Edges” on page 217
after touching [OK].
Resume Feature
If the machine is turned off while the pattern
connecting function is being used, the machine will
return to the operation indicated below when it is
turned on again. The machine operation will differ
depending on when it is turned off.
Example: When connecting two patterns
a
a
Select the first pattern. Touch the pattern connection key .
Begin embroidering the first pattern.
Finish embroidering the first pattern. (A)
If the machine is turned off during any operation in this box, the
machine will return to (A) when it is turned on again.
Select the second pattern.
Touch .
Specify the reference point for connecting the pattern.
Start detecting embroidery positioning stickers (2 locations).
Finish detecting embroidery positioning stickers. (B)
If the machine is turned off during any operation in this box, the
machine will return to (B) when it is turned on again.
Rehoop the fabric.
Finish detecting embroidery positioning stickers (2
locations).
Begin embroidering the second pattern.
Finish embroidering the second pattern.
Using a Mobile App
225
Advanced Embroidery
5
With the My Stitch Monitor App installed on your
mobile device and the machine and mobile
device connected to the same wireless network,
you can check the operating status of the
machine. In addition, you can receive
notifications when the machine stops.
Installing the App
1
Use your smart device to scan the
appropriate QR code below to visit
Google Play or the App Store.
2 Install [My Stitch Monitor].
Monitoring
1
Connect the machine to your wireless
network.
* Refer to “Wireless Network Connection Functions”
on page 31.
2 Confirm that your mobile device and your
machine are connected to the same
network.
3 Tap the icon for [My Stitch Monitor] on
the mobile device to start the app.
4 Follow the instructions that appear in the
app to connect the app to your machine.
* Select the name that appears beside [Machine
name] in the settings screen on your machine.
The machine can now be monitored.
You can transfer content published on the app to
the machine and enjoy creating original works
using the functions on the app.
For more information about the app, refer to the
official website.
For details on how to operate the machine using
the app, see the Artspira Quick Guide on Artspira
support page.
Images saved on a mobile device can be
transferred to the machine so that an embroidery
pattern can be created.
Installing the My Design Snap
App
1
Use your smart device to scan the
appropriate QR code below to visit
Google Play or the App Store.
Using a Mobile App
My Stitch Monitor App
https://s.brother/cadke/
My Stitch Monitor
Memo
• To download and install the app, you can also
search for [My Stitch Monitor] in Google Play
or the App Store.
• Visit the following web site for support
information on the app.
https://s.brother/cpdae/
Memo
• The app will be updated from time to time. The
following descriptions may differ from the
actual screens and operations.
Artspira App
https://s.brother/cadkg/
My Design Snap App
https://s.brother/cadkf/
Using a Mobile App
226
2 Install [My Design Snap].
Transferring an Image from a
Mobile Device to the Machine
1
Connect the machine to your wireless
network.
* Refer to “Wireless Network Connection Functions”
on page 31.
2 Confirm that your mobile device and your
machine are connected to the same
network.
3 Tap the icon on the mobile device for [My
Design Snap] to start the app.
4 Follow the instructions that appear in the
app to connect the app to your machine.
* Select the name that appears beside [Machine
name] in the settings screen on your machine.
5 Tap .
a This icon is not available for your machine. It is for
machines that are not equipped with a camera.
Your machine will use the built-in camera to align
embroidery patterns. For details, refer to “Display
the Fabric on the Screen” on page 157.
b This icon is not available for your machine. It is for
machines that are not equipped with a camera.
Your machine will use the built-in camera to create
embroidery patterns in My Design Center. For
details, refer to “Create the Pattern Using Scanned
Images or Image Data Files” on page 241.
c This icon allows you to transfer an image from the
mobile device to the machine to create a design.
6 Select the image, then select [Send to the
Machine] to transfer it from the mobile
device to the machine.
You will receive confirmation in the app that the
image was successfully sent to the machine.
My Design Snap
Memo
• To download and install the app, you can also
search for [My Design Snap] in Google Play or
the App Store.
• Visit the following web site for support
information on the app.
https://s.brother/cpdae/
Memo
• The app will be updated from time to time. The
following descriptions may differ from the
actual screens and operations.
Memo
• To retrieve the transferred images, refer to
each function.
- Picture Play embroidery function (page 177)
- My Design Center (page 241)
c
b
a
About My Design Center
227
My Design Center
6
With My Design Center, you can use the
functions listed below:
• Creating embroidery patterns by drawing on
the LCD screen or by using built-in stamps or
shapes.
• Creating embroidery patterns by not only
scanning drawings /illustrations with built-in
camera, but also importing data from USB
media.
• Creating embroidery patterns by sending
images from your mobile device to your
machine
• Setting the stitch types, fill stitch types and
colors for created patterns.
• Combining patterns that you have created
with the machine’s built-in patterns.
Start My Design Center by touching [My Design
Center] in the home page screen or touching [My
Design Center] in the embroidery pattern
selection screen.
The pattern preview displays the design smaller
than the actual size. You can view the actual
pattern size by setting the [Embroidery Frame
Display].
1 Touch to display [Embroidery Frame
Display] of the settings screen.
2 Select the grid line and embroidery
frame.
a Embroidery frame types
b Grid types
Example:
1 Start [My Design Center] and touch .
* For details on this screen, refer to “Pattern Drawing
Screen” on page 230.
2 Touch and select the frame
embroidering area. And then touch [OK].
* You can also select the various shapes by
touching .
* For details on this screen, refer to “Using the
Stamp Key” on page 231.
3 Touch .
Chapter 6
My Design Center
About My Design Center
Before Creating Designs
a
b
Create a Stippling Design
with the Basic Procedure
Create a Stippling Design with the Basic Procedure
228
4 Select the desired shape, and then touch
[OK].
5 Touch .
6 Select the direction in which to change
the size, and then touch [OK].
* For details on this, refer to “Using the Size Key” on
page 236.
7 Touch .
8 Select the stitch type and the stitch color,
and then touch [OK].
* For details on this screen, refer to “Setting the Line
Types, Stitch Types and Colors” on page 233.
9 Touch and then touch the shape.
a Shape
10 To set the stippling stitch color and fill
stitch type, touch .
a
Create a Stippling Design with the Basic Procedure
229
My Design Center
6
11 Touch , and then select the stitch
color. And then touch [OK].
* For details on this screen, refer to “Setting the
Brush Types, Fill Stitch Types and Fill Colors” on
page 234.
12 Touch and then touch the area you
want to set stippling effect.
a Area where stippling is applied
13 Touch [Next].
14 Adjust the stippling settings, and then
touch [Set].
* For details, refer to “Region Settings” on page 240.
The embroidery edit screen appears after touching
[OK].
15 If necessary, touch [Edit] to edit the
selected pattern. (page 142)
16 Touch [Embroidery]. And then start
embroidering. (page 140)
a
Key Functions (My Design Center)
230
* Pattern drawing area
Key Functions (My Design
Center)
Pattern Drawing Screen
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Magnify the pattern. —
Magnify key
Move the canvas when it is
magnified.
—
Hand tool key
Create patterns using scanned
images, line drawings,
illustrations, and data files of
images.
241
Scan/Design key
Recall pattern drawing data
created with My Design Center
from the machine’s memory, or
USB media.
—
Recall key
a
u
c
d
f
h
j
l
t s r q
*
e
p
b
o
n
g
i
k
m
Display the color and stitch type
specified in the [Line Property]
screen.
233
Line display
Draw lines. Specify the line type
in the [Line Property] screen.
232
Line tool key
Apply the color and stitch type
specified in the [Line Property]
screen to the selected line.
233
Bucket tool key
for line
Pick up the color and stitch type
from a line in the pattern. The
picked-up color and stitch type
are reflected in the [Line
Property] screen.
—
Dropper tool key
for line
Display the [Line Property]
screen. Set the line type, stitch
type, and color.
233
Line Property key
Display the fill color and fill
stitch type specified in the
[Region Property] screen.
234
Region display
Paint with a brush. Specify the
brush shape and size in the
[Region Property] screen.
232
Region tool key
Apply the color and fill stitch
type set in the [Region
Property] screen to brush lines
and the closed area made from
the lines.
234
Bucket tool key
for region
Pick up the fill color and fill
stitch types from a region in the
pattern. The picked-up fill color
and fill stitch type are reflected
in the [Region Property] screen.
—
Dropper tool key
for region
Display the [Region Property]
screen. Set the brush type, fill
stitch type, and fill color.
234
Region Property
key
Erase lines and shapes that
have been drawn. You can
select the size/shape of the
eraser.
235
Eraser key
Select the stamp shape for
pattern drawing.
231
Stamp shapes
key
Change the size of the selected
section.
236
Size key
Rotate the selected section. —
Rotate key
Flip the selected section
horizontally.
—
Mirror image key
Duplicate the selected section. —
Duplicate key
Cut out the selected section. —
Cut key
Paste in the previously
duplicated or cut section.
—
Paste key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Key Functions (My Design Center)
231
My Design Center
6
1 Touch .
2 Select a stamp type and stamp shape.
a Stamp shapes
b Stamp types
c Saved outlines
d Frame embroidering areas
•Stamp shapes
• Stamp types (Only for Basic shapes)
• Saved outlines
• Frame embroidering areas
Proceed to the stitch settings
screen. (page 238)
—
Next key
Save the pattern drawing data. —
Memory key
Select a section for editing. 235
Select key
Redo the operation that was
undone with the undo key. Each
touch of this key will redo one
operation.
—
Redo key
Undo the last operation that
was performed and return to
the previous state. Each touch
of this key will undo one
operation.
—
Undo key
Clear all the lines and shapes
and start from the beginning.
The background image is also
cleared.
—
All Clear key
Exit from My Design Center. All
lines and shapes are erased
when you touch this key.
—
Cancel key
Memo
• For information on the file extensions for
pattern drawing data, refer to “Specifications”
on page 271.
Using the Stamp Key
No.
Display
Explanation
Reference
Name
Basic shapes
Closed shapes
Open shapes
Outline
Fill stitch
Outline and fill stitch
Embroidery pattern outlines can be registered
as stamp shapes. When registering stamp
shapes, select from the last 20 embroidery
patterns used. If more than 20 shapes are
registered, the oldest one is automatically
erased. For details on registering a stamp
shape, refer to “Decorative Stitching Around a
Pattern” on page 249.
Select an embroidering area in order to
arrange the pattern to fit an embroidery frame.
If an offset value is specified, a shape offset to
the inside is displayed. When making a frame
pattern using a motif stitch, etc., specify an
offset value according to the pattern size so the
pattern can fit within the embroidering area for
the selected embroidery frame.
c
b
d
a
Key Functions (My Design Center)
232
3 Touch [OK] to set the selected stamp.
4 Edit the design with available keys.
* For details, refer to “Pattern Drawing Screen” on
page 230.
5 Touch [Next], and then specify the stitch
setting.
* For details, refer to “Specifying Individual Stitch
Settings” on page 238.
1 Touch to set the line types, stitch
types and colors. (page 233)
2 Touch the draw key and draw lines.
3 Touch [Next], and then specify the stitch
setting. (page 238)
1 Touch to set the brush types, fill
stitch types and fill colors. (page 234)
2 Touch and draw with brush.
3 Touch [Next], and then specify the stitch
setting. (page 238)
Drawing Lines
Memo
• When the draw key is touched, all regions will
be displayed in the background to clarify the
drawing lines on the screen.
Drawing Regions
Key Functions (My Design Center)
233
My Design Center
6
You can set or change the line types, stitch types
and colors anytime. You can also specify the
settings before drawing lines.
1 Touch to set the line types, stitch
types and colors.
The [Line Property] screen appears.
a Line types
b Stitch types
c Line color selection: touch the color palette to
activate the drawing pen color.
•Line types
• Stitch types
2 Touch [OK] to return to the pattern
drawing screen.
3 Touch then touch on the lines to
change the settings.
a Color
b Stitch type
Setting the Line Types, Stitch
Types and Colors
Freehand line with the end open.
Freehand line closing the end automatically.
Straight line with one stroke.
Straight line changing directions to the point
you select. If the end point is created near the
start point, a closed object will be created.
c
b
a
Zigzag stitch
Running stitch
Triple stitch
Candlewicking stitch
Chain stitch
E stitch
V stitch
Select motif stitches
Displays motif stitch selection screen, where
can be touched to select a pattern.
Appliqué zigzag stitch
Line without stitch for creating a region.
Created region will be defined by the gray line.
Memo
• The appearance of the line does not change
even if the stitch type was changed. The
specified stitch type can be checked in the
stitch settings screen. (page 238)
• Touch to magnify the image when you
cannot touch on the line correctly.
• Touching , then touching a line reflects
the settings for that line in the [Line Property]
screen.
a
b
Key Functions (My Design Center)
234
1 Touch to set the brush types, fill
stitch types and fill colors.
The [Region Property] screen appears.
a Brush types
b Fill stitch types
c Fill color selection: touch the color palette to
activate the paint brush color.
• Brush shapes
To select the brush size, touch or .
• Fill stitch types
2 Touch [OK] to return to the pattern
drawing screen.
3 Touch and touch on the regions to
change fill color and fill stitch types.
a Color
b Stitch type
Setting the Brush Types, Fill Stitch
Types and Fill Colors
Square brush
Round brush
c
a
b
Fill stitch pattern
Stippling pattern
Select decorative fill patterns
Displays a fill pattern selection screen, where
can be touched to select a pattern.
Select this key when you do not want fill
stitches.
Memo
• Touch to magnify the image when you
cannot touch on the fill correctly.
• Touching , then touching a region reflects
the settings for that region in the [Region
Property] screen.
ba
Key Functions (My Design Center)
235
My Design Center
6
You can select the part of the design to move
and/or edit.
1 Touch .
2 Select the method for selecting an area.
And then touch [Close].
3 Select the area you want to edit.
* Create the red box around your selected area to be
edited.
* To select the desired pattern easily, magnify the
image. Touch to magnify the pattern and
use to move the canvas.
4 Edit the design with available keys.
(page 230)
5 Touch [Next], and then specify the stitch
setting. (page 238)
1 Touch .
2 Select the shape of the eraser.
And then drag along the area or line that
you want to erase.
* To select the eraser size, touch or .
3 Touch [OK].
Using the Select Key
Box selection Selects all objects within the
box that is drawn.
Polygonal
shape
selection
Selects all objects within the
polygonal shape that is drawn.
Draw a polygon by touching
the screen to add points, and
then specify the end point by
touching the red square at the
starting point.
Freestyle
curve
selection
Selects all objects within the
curved line that is drawn.
Automatic
selection
Selects the pattern that is
touched. This allows you to
select only a single line or only
the outer pattern of a donut
shape.
Select all Selects all patterns.
Using the Erase Key
Memo
• The area or lines can be erased while the key
appears as .
Key Functions (My Design Center)
236
1 Touch .
2 Select the direction in which to change
the size.
3 Touch [OK].
Motif stitch pattern data or decorative fill pattern
data created in [Programmable Stitch Creator] of
PE-DESIGN can be imported into My Design
Center.
* Motif stitch pattern data can be created on PE-
DESIGN version 4 or later. Decorative fill pattern
can be created on PE-DESIGN version 11 or later.
* For information on the file extensions for motif
stitch pattern data and decorative fill pattern data,
refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
1 Save the motif stitch pattern data and/or
decorative fill pattern data in the USB
media.
2 Insert the USB media into the USB port
on the machine.
3 Touch [My Design Center].
4 To import motif stitch pattern data, touch
. After [Line Property] screen
appears, touch , then [Select].
5 Touch [Custom], then .
Using the Size Key
Memo
• To specify the size by number, touch .
Touch the box for the height or width, specify a
value with the number keys, and then touch
[Set].
a Box for height
b Box for width
a
b
Importing Motif Stitch Pattern Data
or Decorative Fill Pattern Data
Key Functions (My Design Center)
237
My Design Center
6
6 Select the motif stitch pattern data, and
then touch [OK].
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
The motif stitch pattern data is saved to the
machine.
7 Select the motif stitch pattern to be used,
and then touch [OK].
8 To import decorative fill pattern data,
touch . After [Region Property]
screen appears, touch , then [Select].
9 Refer to steps 5 through 7 to select an
imported decorative fill pattern.
10 Edit the pattern. If necessary, touch to
save the pattern.
a Pattern drawing screen
b Stitch settings screen
Memo
• Saved motif stitch patterns are assigned a
pattern number. The pattern number appears
in the upper-left corner of the key.
• Up to 12 motif stitch patterns can be saved to
the machine. When trying to save more motif
stitch pattern data than this maximum, a
message will appear. Follow the on-screen
instructions, and select the pattern number of
the motif stitch pattern data to be replaced.
• Touch [Clear all] to delete all saved motif stitch
pattern data.
12
Memo
• When saving a pattern (that contains an
imported motif stitch pattern or decorative fill
pattern) as pattern drawing data, it can only be
saved in the machine’s memory.
• When recalling a saved design, the motif stitch
pattern or decorative fill pattern currently
saved under the assigned pattern number is
imported. (If the custom stitch pattern that was
assigned to a saved design has been replaced
by another custom stitch pattern, the original
stitch pattern will not be recalled. It will be
replaced with the replacement stitch pattern.)
• If all custom stitch patterns are cleared, the
custom stitch pattern that was assigned to a
saved design will not be recalled. It will be
replaced with a default stitch pattern. Patterns
with deleted custom motif patterns will be
recalled with a zigzag stitch. Patterns with
deleted custom decorative fill patterns will be
recalled with a standard fill stitch.
• If the design is saved on the embroidery edit
screen after touching [Set] on stitch settings
screen, the custom motif and decorative fill
pattern will be preserved.
Stitch Settings Screen
238
After creating the pattern drawing data in the
pattern drawing screen (page 230), you will have
an opportunity to:
• Check and change the stitch settings for each
line and region.
• Save the pattern drawing data.
• Convert the data to an embroidery pattern,
proceed to the embroidery edit screen, and/or
save the embroidery pattern.
Select a pattern in the stitch settings screen to
specify its line and region stitch settings.
1 Use to select the line or region to
be changed.
Each touch of moves the highlighting of
the selected pattern in order.
2 Select the setting to be changed, and
then change the setting in the screen that
appears. (In this example, the
embroidering direction will be changed.)
* For details on each setting, refer to “Line and
Region Settings” on page 239.
3 Touch [Manual], and then use to
change the direction.
4 Touch [OK] to apply the setting.
* Change other settings in the same way.
5 If necessary, touch to save the
pattern.
6 Touch [Set] to convert work into an
embroidery pattern.
The embroidery edit screen appears after touching
[OK].
Stitch Settings Screen
Specifying Individual Stitch
Settings
Memo
• To combine the patterns created in [My Design
Center], touch [Add], and then touch [My
Design Center].
Stitch Settings Screen
239
My Design Center
6
Line Settings
a Shows/Changes the stitch type and color for the
selected line.
b Select the line to be changed.
c Shows/Changes the stitch settings for the selected
line.
d Save the pattern drawing data and embroidery
data.
e Proceed to embroidery edit screen.
f Use the projector to project the pattern. (page 154)
g See detailed information about the pattern.
h Preview the pattern.
Line stitch settings
Zigzag stitch /
Appliqué zigzag stitch
Running stitch /
Triple stitch
Candlewicking stitch
Chain stitch
E stitch
V stitch
Motif stitches
Line and Region Settings
[Zigzag width]
Specifies the width of the stitch.
[Density]
Specifies the density of the stitch.
[Run Pitch]
Specifies the length of the stitch.
[Under sewing]
Select if you need or do not need the under
sewing for the stabilized fabric.
a
c
b
d
e
gf
h
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the candlewicking
stitch.
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Thickness]
Sets repeated embroidering at the same part.
[Stitch Width]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the E stitch.
[Thickness]
Sets repeated embroidering at the same part.
[Flip]
Specifies if the decorative line shows up
inside or outside.
[Stitch Width]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the V stitch.
[Thickness]
Sets repeated embroidering at the same part.
[Flip]
Specifies if the decorative line shows up
inside or outside.
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the motif stitch.
[Flip]
Specifies if the decorative line shows up
inside or outside.
Stitch Settings Screen
240
Region Settings
a Shows/Changes the stitch type and color for the
selected region.
b Select the region to be changed.
c Shows/Changes the stitch settings for the selected
region.
d Save the pattern drawing data and embroidery
data.
e Proceed to embroidery edit screen.
f Use the projector to project the pattern. (page 154)
g See detailed information about the pattern.
h Preview the pattern.
Region Stitch Settings
Fill stitch pattern
Stippling pattern
Decorative fill patterns
a
c
b
d
e
gf
h
[Direction]
Specifies the embroidering direction. Select
[Manual] to change to the desired direction of fill
stitch.
[Density]
Specifies the stitch density of fill stitch.
[Pull
compensation]
Specifies to correct the shrinkage of the pattern by
slightly shortening or lengthening the stitching.
Change the setting after you test embroider the
pattern and can check the shrinkage.
[Under sewing]
Select if you need or do not need the under
sewing for the stabilized fabric.
[Run Pitch]
Specifies the length of a stitch of the stippling
stitch.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing between the stitches
when embroidering the stippling stitch.
[Distance] Specifies the offset from the pattern outline.
[Stitch]
Specifies the stitch type (Single/Triple stitch).
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Direction]
Specifies the rotation angle of the pattern.
[Outline]
Select whether (turned on) or not (turned off)
the outline is also converted to embroidery
data. If turned on, the number of thread
jumps can be reduced.
[Random shift]
Randomly varies the line.
If a setting of 1 or more is specified for
[Random shift], a [Type] setting for the
[Random shift] can be selected.
[Position Offset]
Specifies the reference point for the pattern.
[Thickness]
Sets repeated or single stitching of the pattern.
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
241
My Design Center
6
The same stitch settings can be changed at the
same time for multiple patterns of the same type.
1
Use
to select the stitch whose
settings are to be changed, and then
touch .
a Touch to check various information such as
the thread colors.
The same stitch type areas will be selected at the
same time.
2 Change the settings and convert work
into embroidery pattern. (page 238)
In addition to using built-in shapes and drawing
tools, you can create patterns using scanned
images of fabric, line drawings, illustrations, and
data files of images.
a Touch this key to use the image as a background
image. (page 243, page 244)
b Touch this key to convert a line drawing to
embroidery data. (page 245)
c Touch this key to convert an illustration to
embroidery data. (page 247)
1 Prepare the desired drawing/illustration.
Specifying Global Stitch Settings
a
Create the Pattern Using
Scanned Images or Image
Data Files
Using the Scanning Frame
IMPORTANT
• If, during scanning, the embroidery foot comes into
contact with the material to be scanned (illustration,
etc.), the material to be scanned or embroidery foot may
be damaged. Do not scan materials that may come into
contact with the embroidery foot, such as thick materials
or materials with wrinkles or creases.
Memo
• Only one sheet of paper can be placed in the
scanning frame per scan.
a
b
c
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
242
2 Place the paper to be scanned in the
scanning frame, and then secure the
paper in place with the magnets.
* Place the magnets at six locations around the
paper to secure it, making sure that the line
drawing is not covered.
3 Attach the embroidery unit to the
machine, and then turn on the machine.
* Refer to “Attaching the Embroidery Unit” on
page 126.
4 Press (Presser foot lifter button) to
raise the embroidery foot, and then press
(Needle position button) to raise the
needle.
* The embroidery foot is not raised high enough
when raised with the presser foot lever.
5 After attaching the scanning frame to the
embroidery unit, swing the frame-
securing lever toward you to secure the
scanning frame.
* Refer to “Attaching the Embroidery Frame” on
page 131.
Note
• When placing the paper in the scanning frame,
make sure that the white balance area is not
hidden; otherwise, the drawing cannot be
scanned correctly. At the same time, be sure
to place the scan image within the scan area.
The image out of the scan area will not be
scanned.
a White balance area
b Scan area
• Make sure that the white balance area or the
scan area is not dirty or scratched; otherwise,
the image cannot be scanned correctly.
• Be sure to use the magnets which are
included with the scanning frame.
• Be sure to place the magnets so that they
secure the paper firmly. If the paper is placed
unevenly, the image cannot be scanned
correctly.
• If the scanning frame is dirty, gently wipe it
with a soft cloth that has been soaked in
lukewarm water then firmly wrung.
a
b
Memo
• Unthread the machine to avoid having the
thread slipping out of the needle or getting
caught on the embroidery frame.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that embroidery foot and needle are fully
raised. If scanning is started with the embroidery foot
and needle lowered, the scanning frame may hit the
machine, causing damage.
Note
• Be sure not to attach any embroidery foot
other than the embroidery foot “W”, otherwise
the embroidery foot will be scanned.
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
243
My Design Center
6
Scanning with an Embroidery
Frame
Drawings and illustrations can also be scanned
using an embroidery frame. Place the paper to be
scanned on the fabric, and then secure it with tape.
a Fabric
b Tape
Create patterns by scanning fabric or an
illustration, importing it into the machine, then
displaying it as a background image.
1 Touch .
2 Touch [Image scan].
3 Using the magnets, affix a picture to the
scanning frame and attach the frame to
the machine. (page 241)
When scanning the fabric, attach the
embroidery frame to the machine.
(page 131)
4 Touch [Scan].
5 When the following message appears,
touch [OK].
Scanning begins. When scanning is finished,
scanned image is displayed transparently in the
pattern drawing area.
Scanning the Background Image
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
244
6 Using the included dual purpose stylus,
touch , and then draw lines to trace
the image.
* Touch to magnify the pattern and use
to move the canvas.
* For details on drawing lines, refer to “Drawing
Lines” on page 232.
a Touch or to adjust the transparency of the
background.
7 After editing the pattern, touch [Next] to
specify the settings for pattern.
* For details on editing patterns, refer to “Key
Functions (My Design Center)” on page 230.
8 Touch [Set] to display the embroidery
edit screen.
* Refer to “Specifying Individual Stitch Settings” on
page 238.
Create patterns by importing image data into the
machine, then displaying it as a background
image.
1 Touch .
2 Touch [Image scan].
3 Select the device you saved the data to.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
a The most recently scanned image is automatically
stored in the machine’s memory. Touch this key to
import the scanned image.
b Touch to import the data file saved on a USB
media. Save data as a .jpg, .bmp, or .png file type,
on a USB media. For details on files that can be
imported, refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
c Touch to transfer an image that was saved on the
smart device then sent to the machine. (page 226)
4 Select the data, and then touch [Set].
The selected image is displayed transparently in
the pattern drawing area.
5 Create an embroidery pattern.
Refer to step
6 of “Scanning the
Background Image” on page 243.
Importing the Background Image
a
a
b
c
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
245
My Design Center
6
Custom patterns can be created from drawings.
You can create patterns by scanning your
drawings or importing an image data file.
Recommended line drawings for Line
Conversion
• Line drawings must be drawn clearly using
lines with approximately 1 mm thickness.
• Line drawings should be drawn in a strong
contrast.
• If the lines are too short or gathered too
densely, they will not be converted correctly.
1 Touch .
2 Touch [Line design].
3 When scanning using the scanning frame
or the embroidery frame, touch [Scan].
When importing an image data file, select
the device you saved the data to.
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
a When this key is touched, the message to start
scanning appears. Touch [OK] to start scanning.
b The most recently scanned image is automatically
stored in the machine’s memory. Touch this key to
import the scanned image.
c Touch to import the data file saved on a USB
media. Save data as a .jpg, .bmp, or .png file type,
on a USB media. For details on files that can be
imported, refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
d Touch to transfer an image that was saved on the
smart device then sent to the machine. (page 226)
4 Move to frame the image for the
pattern. And then touch [OK].
a Adjust the image detection level.
b Changes the line color and stitch type. (page 233)
Create a Pattern with Line
Conversion
Memo
• For details on creating patterns using color
illustrations, refer to “Create a Pattern with
Illustration Conversion” on page 247.
Memo
• When converting a scanned/imported
background image to be displayed on the
screen, skip step
3 and proceed to step 4.
b
c
d
a
b
a
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
246
5 Confirm the converted image and then
touch [Set].
* Adjust the [Gray-Scale Detection level], the line
color and stitch type, if necessary. After changes to
the settings have been applied, [Set] changes to
[Retry]. Touch [Retry] to check that the image is as
desired.
* To enlarge the image, touch .
* To display the image before being converted,
touch [Original View].
6 If necessary, edit the design.
* Refer to “Key Functions (My Design Center)” on
page 230.
* After the image is converted to stitching, it appears
as a background in the pattern drawing screen.
Touch or to adjust the transparency of the
background.
Memo
• Small dots or unwanted lines can be erased
with the erase key. (page 235)
• Line drawings are converted without
recognizing the thickness of lines. If you want
to change the thickness of lines, specify in the
settings screen. Refer to “Stitch Settings
Screen” on page 238.
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
247
My Design Center
6
Custom patterns can be created from color
illustrations. You can create patterns by scanning
an illustration or importing an image data file.
Recommended illustrations for Illustration
Conversion
• Illustrations that are clearly drawn, with no
gradation, fading or blurriness.
• Illustrations that are at least a 5 mm square
• Illustrations that are extremely simple images
1 Touch .
2 Touch [Illustration design].
3 When scanning the scanning frame or
the embroidery frame, touch [Scan].
When importing an image data file, select
the device you saved the data to.
For this example, import the image data
file.
a When this key is touched, the message to start
scanning appears. Touch [OK] to start scanning.
b The most recently scanned image is automatically
stored in the machine’s memory. Touch this key to
import the scanned image.
c Touch to import the data file saved on a USB
media. Save data as a .jpg, .bmp, or .png file type,
on a USB media. For details on files that can be
imported, refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
d Touch to transfer an image that was saved on the
smart device then sent to the machine. (page 226)
Create a Pattern with Illustration
Conversion
Memo
• When converting a scanned/imported
background image to be displayed on the
screen, skip step
3 and proceed to step 4.
b
c
d
a
Create the Pattern Using Scanned Images or Image Data Files
248
4 Move to frame the image for the
pattern. And then touch [OK].
* Change the settings to adjust the image so it can
easily be converted to the desired pattern.
a The number of colors in an image will be reduced
less than the number specified here.
b Select whether or not the background will be
removed.
c Touch to convert the outline of the image to
lines. (If this is not selected, the outline of the
image will be converted to regions.) Line thickness
can be specified using .
Touch to select the outline color. Select by
touching the color, or moving icon using
in the color selection screen.
5 Confirm the converted image and then
touch [Set].
* Adjust the image as necessary as in step 4. After
changes to the settings have been applied, [Set]
changes to [Retry]. Touch [Retry] to check that the
image is as desired.
* To enlarge the image, touch .
* To display the image before being converted,
touch [Original View].
6 If necessary, edit the design.
* After the image is converted to stitching, it appears
as a background in the pattern drawing screen.
Touch or to adjust the transparency of the
background.
c
b
a
Various Embroidering with My Design Center
249
My Design Center
6
Saving the Outline of the Pattern
1
Touch [Embroidery] in the home page
screen and select a pattern.
2 Touch [Edit] then .
3 Specify the settings and touch .
a Specify the distance from the outline of the pattern
to the pattern.
b When set to on, lines inside the pattern are also
extracted.
4 Touch [OK].
The pattern outline is saved as a stamp shape in
My Design Center.
Editing Patterns Using Saved
Outline
1
Touch [Add].
2 Touch [My Design Center].
3 Touch then .
4 Select the saved outline.
Various Embroidering with
My Design Center
Decorative Stitching Around a
Pattern
a
b
Various Embroidering with My Design Center
250
5 Touch and select a stamp shape.
6 Touch and change the size.
7 Touch and select the stitch type and
color of the circle.
8 Touch and touch the circle.
9 Touch and select the fill stitch type
and color of the decorative fill pattern.
10 Touch , and then touch the area you
want to add the decorative fill pattern.
11 Touch [Next].
12 Specify the stitch settings, and then
touch [Set].
* For details, refer to “Specifying Individual Stitch
Settings” on page 238.
The embroidery edit screen appears after touching
[OK].
Various Embroidering with My Design Center
251
My Design Center
6
After embroidering the quilt top, use the scanning
feature to align the patterns.
1 Select a pattern. Touch and register
the pattern outline as a stamp. (page 249)
2 Touch [Embroidery] and then embroider
the pattern.
3 Remove the embroidered quilt top from
the embroidery frame. Tear off the
stabilizer. Layer with batting and
backing, then secure the three layers
together in the embroidery frame.
4 Attach the embroidery frame.
5 Touch then [OK]. Touch [My Design
Center] in the home page screen.
6 Touch then [Image scan]. Touch
[Scan] to scan the embroidered fabric.
(page 244)
7 Touch then .
8 Select the saved outline in step 1.
9 Touch and then arrange the stamp
over the scanned pattern.
* To rotate the stamp, touch .
10 Edit the pattern and then touch [Next].
11 Specify the stitch settings, and then
touch [Set].
* For details, refer to “Specifying Individual Stitch
Settings” on page 238.
The embroidery edit screen appears after touching
[OK].
When Embroidering with Batting
Sandwiched Between Two Layers
of Fabric
Memo
• For best results, reduce the embroidery
speed.
• For best results, hoop the stabilizer and quilt
top and embroider the design prior to adding
the batting and backing.
Various Embroidering with My Design Center
252
Saving the Outline of the
Couching Pattern
1
Touch [Embroidery] in the home page
screen and edit the couching patterns.
2 Touch and save the combined
couching pattern on the machine’s
memory for later use.
3 Touch to select all patterns and
then touch .
4 Specify the setting and touch .
5 Touch and then [OK].
Embroidering the Decorative
Patterns
1
Touch [My Design Center] in the home
page screen.
2 Touch then select the saved outline
in step
2 of “Saving the Outline of the
Couching Pattern” on page 252.
3 Touch and select the square shape.
And then touch to change the size.
4 Touch and select the stitch type and
color.
5 Touch and touch the square.
Decorative Stitching Around a
Couching Patterns
Various Embroidering with My Design Center
253
My Design Center
6
6 Touch and select the pattern and
color of the decorative fill pattern.
7 Touch , and then touch the area you
want to add the decorative fill pattern.
8 Touch [Next].
9 Specify the stitch settings, and then
touch [Set].
* For details, refer to “Specifying Individual Stitch
Settings” on page 238.
10 Touch [Embroidery] and then embroider
the pattern.
11 Touch and then [OK].
Embroidering the Couching
Patterns
1
Touch [Embroidery] in the home page
screen and touch .
2 Retrieve the saved couching patten.
3 Prepare the machine for couching.
Attach embroidery couching foot “Y”,
thread it with yarn, and then thread the
machine with the upper thread.
* For details, refer to “Embroidering Couching
Patterns” on page 191.
Various Embroidering with My Design Center
254
Care and Maintenance
255
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it
must not be oiled by the user. This machine was
manufactured with the necessary amount of oil
applied to ensure correct operation, making
periodic oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the
handwheel or an unusual noise, immediately stop
using the machine, and contact your authorized
Brother dealer or the nearest Brother authorized
service center.
Do not store the machine in any of the locations
described below, otherwise damage to the
machine may result, for example, rust caused by
condensation.
• Exposed to extremely high temperatures
• Exposed to extremely low temperatures
• Exposed to extreme temperature changes
• Exposed to high humidity or steam
• Near a flame, heater or air conditioner
• Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight
• Exposed to extremely dusty or oily
environments
Cleaning the LCD Screen
If the surface of the LCD is dirty, lightly wipe it with
a soft dry cloth.
Cleaning the Machine Casing
When wiping dirt off the machine, firmly wring a
soft cloth soaked in (lukewarm) water.
After cleaning the machine, dry it with a soft, dry
cloth.
Cleaning the Race
1
Press (Needle position button) to
raise the needle.
2 Turn the main power to OFF, and then
unplug the machine.
3 Remove the needle and the presser foot.
(page 36, page 48)
4 Remove the flat bed attachment or the
embroidery unit if either is attached.
5 Slide the needle plate lever toward you.
a Slide toward you.
The needle plate opens.
Chapter 7
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Care and Maintenance
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning it.
Otherwise, injury may result.
Restrictions on Oiling
Precautions on Storing the
Machine
Note
• In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this
machine for an extended period of time
without using it may reduce its efficiency.
Cleaning
Memo
• Occasionally, condensation may form on the
LCD screen or it may become fogged up;
however, this is not a malfunction. After a
while, the cloudiness will disappear.
Care and Maintenance
256
6 Slide out the needle plate with your right
hand to remove it.
7 Grasp the bobbin case, and then gently
lift out.
a Bobbin case
8 Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum
cleaner to remove any lint and dust from
the race and bobbin thread sensor and
the surrounding area.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
c Bobbin thread sensor
9 Insert the bobbin case so that the mark
on the bobbin case aligns with the
mark on the machine.
a Bobbin case
b “ ” mark on the bobbin case
c “ ” mark on the machine
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
10 Insert the tabs on the needle plate into
the notches in the machine.
a Tabs
b Notches
11 Press down on the right side of the
needle plate to secure it.
IMPORTANT
• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
Memo
• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread
sensor, the sensor may not operate correctly.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched or has a burr
on it. Otherwise the upper thread may become tangled,
and the needle may break and cause injury. For a new
bobbin case, contact your nearest Brother authorized
service center.
• Make sure that you fit the bobbin case properly,
otherwise the needle may break and cause injury.
a
b
Care and Maintenance
257
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin
Case Area
If dust or lint accumulate on the cutter, it will be
difficult to cut the thread when (Thread cutter
button) is pressed or the automatic thread cutting
function is used. Clean the cutter when the thread
is not easily cut.
1 Follow steps 1 through 7 of “Cleaning
the Race” on page 255 to remove the
needle plate and bobbin case.
2 Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum
cleaner to remove any lint and dust from
the cutter in the bobbin case area.
a Cutter
3 Attach the needle plate.
Setting the camera needle position is essential
when you use camera or projector function. It is
not necessary to perform this operation each
time, but we recommend performing it when the
needle is changed. Use the white calibration
stickers (solid) included with the machine.
1 Touch to display [Needle Calibration
for Camera/Projector] of the settings
screen.
2 Touch .
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the procedure.
a White calibration sticker
The operation is finished when [OK] appears.
4 Touch [OK] to memorize the calibration
data.
5 Remove the sticker.
CAUTION
• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries may result.
Needle Calibration for Camera/
Projector
Note
• Use a new sticker. The camera needle
position cannot be set correctly if there is a
hole in sticker or if it is dirty.
Note
• If [NG] appears, affix a new white sticker, and
then touch [Retry]. If multiple attempts to set
the position are not successful, contact your
nearest authorized Brother dealer.
a
Updating Your Machine’s Software
258
Please be sure to reset the settings of your
machine to delete the following data.
• all saved data
• customized settings
• network information
1 Touch , and then touch [Reset] beside
[Reset to Default].
2 Touch [Reset].
Confirming the Machine Number
There may be circumstances where the machine
number is required.
1 Touch .
2 Display the settings screen below.
a Machine number (internal machine number)
Confirming the Serial Number
Confirm the rating plate on the back of the
machine.
a Serial number
You can update your machine’s software using
one of the two procedures.
When an update program is available on https://
s.brother/cpdae/ , please download the files
following the instructions on the website and
steps below.
1 Insert the USB media into the USB port.
The media device should only contain the
update file.
a USB ports
2 While pressing (Automatic threading
button), turn the main power to ON.
3 Touch .
* If two USB media are connected to the machine,
check the USB media names that are displayed,
and then touch the name of the USB media that
you wish to use.
4 Touch [Load] to update the machine.
Before Lending or Disposing of
the Product
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Deleting...] screen is displayed.
Confirming the Machine Number/
Serial Number
a
Updating Your Machine’s
Software
Update Procedure Using USB
Media
Note
• Check that no data other than the update file is
saved on the USB media being used before
starting to update.
• Some USB media may not be usable with this
machine. For compatible USB media, refer to
“Specifications” on page 271.
IMPORTANT
• Do not turn off the machine during the update. When
updating is finished, the completion message appears.
Updating Your Machine’s Software
259
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
5 Remove the USB media, and turn the
machine off and on again.
If the machine is connected to a wireless network
with a strong, reliable connection, update files
can be downloaded directly to the machine using
this network.
1 Connect the machine to your wireless
network.
* Refer to “Wireless Network Connection Functions”
on page 31.
2 Touch to display [Download the
update program] of the settings screen.
3 Touch [Start].
* The machine starts to download the update file, if
there is a new update file on server.
a When the wireless LAN key appears as ,
touching [Start] causes the machine to check if
there is a new update file. If there is a new file,
downloading begins.
4 When downloading is finished, turn off
the machine, then hold down
(Automatic threading button) while
turning on the machine.
5 Touch .
6 Touch [Load] to update the machine.
7 Turn the machine off and on again.
IMPORTANT
• It will take a while to start up the machine. The screen
may get dark during the start up, do not turn off the
machine and wait until the opening screen appears.
Depending on the machine settings, a different screen
may appear instead of the opening screen.
Update Procedure Using Wireless
LAN Connection
Memo
• The machine periodically checks if there is a
new update file on the server. When there is a
new update file, the wireless LAN key is
displayed as .
Note
• Do not turn off the machine during the
download.
• Touch [Pause] to pause the download. To
restart, touch [Resume].
a
IMPORTANT
• Do not turn off the machine during the update. When
updating is finished, the completion message appears.
IMPORTANT
• It will take a while to start up the machine. The screen
may get dark during the start up, do not turn off the
machine and wait until the opening screen appears.
Depending on the machine settings, a different screen
may appear instead of the opening screen.
Memo
• If there are changes or additions to functions,
manuals available on the machine may be
updated.
Troubleshooting
260
If the machine stops operating correctly, check
the following possible problems before
requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. If you
need additional help, the Brother support website
offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at https://s.brother/cpdae/
.
If the problem persists, contact your authorized
Brother dealer or the nearest Brother authorized
service center.
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics
Detailed causes and remedies for common
troubleshooting topics are described below. Be
sure to refer to this before contacting your
authorized Brother dealer.
• “Upper Thread Is Too Tight” on page 260
• “Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric” on
page 261
• “Incorrect Thread Tension” on page 261
• “Fabric Is Caught in the Machine and Cannot be
Removed” on page 262
• “If the Thread Becomes Tangled Under the
Bobbin Winder Seat” on page 263
Symptom
• The upper thread appears as a single
continuous line.
• The bobbin thread is visible from the right side
of the fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)
• The upper thread has tightened up, and comes
out when pulled.
• The upper thread has tightened up, and
wrinkles appear in the fabric.
• The upper thread tension is tight, and the
results do not change even after the thread
tension is adjusted.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Bobbin thread visible from right side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Right side of fabric
e Bobbin thread
Cause
Incorrect bobbin threading
If the bobbin thread is incorrectly threaded, instead
of the appropriate tension being applied to the
bobbin thread, it is pulled through the fabric when
the upper thread is pulled up. For this reason, the
thread is visible from the right side of the fabric.
Remedy
Correctly install the bobbin thread. (page 40)
Troubleshooting
Memo
• The instructional videos are available online
and can be viewed on any mobile device or
computer.
https://s.brother/cvdae/
• You can also access them using the QR code
that appears in the screen. (page 29)
Upper Thread Is Too Tight
a
b
c
d
e
Troubleshooting
261
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
Symptom
• The thread becomes tangled on the wrong side
of the fabric.
• After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made
and sewing cannot continue.
• Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread
in the bobbin case.
Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread passed through the fabric cannot be
firmly pulled up and the upper thread becomes
tangled in the bobbin case, causing a rattling
noise.
Remedy
Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the
upper threading.
1 Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot
be removed, cut the thread with scissors.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” on page 255.
2 Remove the upper thread from the
machine.
3 Correct the upper threading by following
the instructions of “Upper Threading” on
page 42.
* If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 40 to
correctly install the bobbin.
Symptoms
• Symptom 1: The bobbin thread is visible from
the right side of the fabric.
• Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a
straight line on the right side of the fabric.
• Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the
wrong side of the fabric.
• Symptom 4: The bobbin thread appears as a
straight line on the wrong side of the fabric.
• Symptom 5: The stitching on the wrong side of
the fabric is loose or has slack.
a Wrong side of fabric
b Bobbin thread visible on right side of fabric
c Upper thread
d Right side of fabric
e Bobbin thread
f Upper thread visible from wrong side of fabric
Cause/Remedy
Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The bobbin threading is incorrect.
Return the upper thread tension to the standard
setting, and then refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on
page 40 to correct bobbin threading.
<With symptoms 3 through 5 described above>
The upper threading is incorrect.
Return the upper thread tension to the standard
setting, and then refer to “Upper Threading” on
page 42 to correct the upper threading.
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of
Fabric
Incorrect Thread Tension
Symptom 1 Symptom 3
a
b
c
d
e
a
c
d
e
f
Troubleshooting
262
Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric
are not being used.
The machine needle that should be used depends
on the type of fabric sewn and the thread
thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are
not being used, the thread tension will not be
adjusted correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or
skipped stitches.
* Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on
page 34 to check that a needle and thread
appropriate for the fabric are being used.
Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
Adjust the upper thread tension to select an
appropriate thread tension.
The appropriate thread tension differs according to
the type of fabric and thread being used.
* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used
in your project.
* When the bobbin thread is visible on the right side
of the fabric, set the upper thread tension to a
lower number. (Loosen the thread tension.)
* When the upper thread is visible on the wrong side
of the fabric, set the upper thread tension to a
higher number. (Tighten the thread tension.)
If the fabric is caught in the machine and cannot
be removed, the thread may have become
tangled under the needle plate. Follow the
procedure described below to remove the fabric
from the machine. If the operation could not be
completed according to the procedure, instead of
attempting to complete it forcefully, contact your
authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
Removing the Fabric from the
Machine
1
Immediately stop the machine.
2 Turn the main power to OFF, and then
unplug the machine.
3 Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the
handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.
* Refer to “Changing the Needle” on page 36.
4 Remove the presser foot.
If the thread is entangled on the presser foot, remove
the entangled thread, and then raise the presser foot
lever to remove the presser foot. Otherwise, the
presser foot may be damaged.
* Refer to “Replacing the Presser Foot” on page 48.
5 Lift up the fabric and cut the threads
below it.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with
the following steps to clean the race.
6 Remove the needle plate and bobbin
case.
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” on page 255.
7 Remove any threads in the race and
around the feed dogs.
* Refer to step 8 of “Cleaning the Race” on
page 255.
a Cleaning brush
b Race
Note
• If the upper threading and bobbin threading
are incorrect, the thread tension cannot be
adjusted correctly, even by adjusting the upper
thread tension. Check the upper threading and
bobbin threading first, and then adjust the
thread tension.
Fabric Is Caught in the Machine
and Cannot be Removed
Troubleshooting
263
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
8 Insert the bobbin case and then attach
the needle plate.
* Refer to steps 9 through 11 of “Cleaning the
Race” on page 255.
9 Check the condition of the needle, and
then install it.
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle.
* Refer to “Changing the Needle” on page 36.
Checking Machine Operations
If the needle plate has been removed, check
machine operations to confirm that installation has
been completed correctly.
1 Turn on the machine.
The needle moves to the left and right.
2 Select Straight stitch (Middle).
* Refer to the “Stitch Chart” on page 273.
3 Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and look from all
sides to check that the needle falls at the
center of the hole in the needle plate.
a Hole in the needle plate
b Handwheel
If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the
machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact
your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
4 Turn off the machine, and then install the
bobbin and presser foot.
Never use a scratched or damaged presser foot.
Otherwise, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer.
* Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 40 and
“Changing the Presser Foot” on page 48.
5 Correctly thread the machine.
* For details on the machine, refer to “Upper
Threading” on page 42.
6 Perform trial sewing with normal fabric.
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is
not passed through the pretension disk correctly,
the thread may become tangled beneath the
bobbin winder seat.
Wind off the thread according to the following
procedure.
a Thread
b Bobbin winder seat
1 Touch [Stop] once to stop the bobbin
winding.
Note
• If an error occurs, the machine may be
malfunctioning; therefore, contact your
authorized Brother dealer or the nearest
Brother authorized service center.
Note
• Do not yet install the presser foot and thread.
Note
• The thread may have become tangled as a
result of incorrect upper threading. Make sure
that the machine is correctly threaded.
Note
• Remember when sewing thin fabrics, select a
center stitch that is shorter in length and use
the straight stitch needle plate for straight
sewing stitches. A lightweight paper stabilizer
can also be placed on the underside of the
fabric.
If the Thread Becomes Tangled
Under the Bobbin Winder Seat
CAUTION
• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if the thread
becomes tangled under the bobbin winder seat. The
cutter in the bobbin winder seat may cause injury.
Troubleshooting
264
2 Cut the thread with scissors near the
pretension disk.
a Pretension disk
3 Push the bobbin winder switch to the
right, and then remove the bobbin from
the shaft and cut the thread leading to the
bobbin in order to be able to completely
remove the bobbin from shaft.
4 Hold the thread end with your left hand,
and wind off the thread clockwise from
under the bobbin winder seat with your
right hand as shown below.
Check the following possible problems before
requesting service. If the reference page is “*”,
contact your authorized Brother dealer or the
nearest Brother authorized service center.
Getting Ready
List of Symptoms
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Cannot thread the needle.
Needle is not in the correct position.
• Press (Needle position button) to raise
the needle.
14
Needle is installed incorrectly. 36
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
The needle threader hook is bent and does not
pass through the eye of the needle.
*
The needle threader lever cannot be moved or
returned to its original position.
*
A size 65/9 needle is being used.
• The needle is incompatible with the needle
threader. Manually pass the thread through the
eye of the needle.
42
Cannot lower the presser foot with the presser foot
lever.
Presser foot was raised using (Presser foot
lifter button).
• Press (Presser foot lifter button) to lower
the presser foot.
14
Bobbin thread does not wind neatly on the bobbin.
The thread is not passed through the bobbin
winding thread guide correctly.
37
Bobbin spins slowly. 37
The thread that was pulled out was not wound
onto the bobbin correctly.
37
The empty bobbin was not set on the pin properly. 37
While winding the bobbin, the bobbin thread was
wound below the bobbin winder seat.
You have not wound the bobbin thread properly
when you initially wound thread on the bobbin.
Ensure that the bobbin thread was properly set in
the guides.
37
Troubleshooting
265
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
The bobbin thread cannot be pulled up.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Machine does not operate
All keys and buttons have been locked by .
18
Nothing appears in the LCD.
Main power switch is not turned on. 16
The plug of the power cord is not inserted into an
electrical outlet.
16
The LCD screen does not look very clear.
The brightness of the screen is not adjusted. 23
Nothing happens, even if the LCD display is touched.
The screen has been locked.
• Touch either of the following keys to unlock the
screen.
18
The LCD screen is fogged up.
Condensation has formed on the LCD screen.
• After a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
—
The dual purpose stylus cannot be operated.
Clean the light-emitting part of the dual purpose
stylus.
—
Replace the battery with a new one. 70
Embroidery unit does not operate.
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. 126
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit
was initialized.
126
Pointer of the projector does not indicate the position
correctly.
With thick elastic fabric, the position will be
misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric.
139
With fabric having a very uneven surface, the
position is not correctly aligned.
• The pointer indication should be used only as a
reference.
—
Machine cannot connect to the wireless network.
The wireless network setting is not activated. 32
The security information (SSID/password
(network key)/authentication method) is incorrect.
• Reconfirm the SSID and security information
and re-enter the correct information as
necessary.
32
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
The wireless access point/router cannot be
detected.
• Make sure that the wireless access point/router
is powered on.
• Move your machine to an area where no items
can obstruct the wireless network signal, such
as metal doors or walls, or closer to the
wireless access point/router.
• Temporarily place your machine within about 1
m (3.3 feet) from the wireless access point
when you are configuring the wireless settings.
• If your wireless access point/router is using
MAC address filtering, confirm the MAC
address of this machine is allowed in the filter.
—
This machine does not support the authentication
or encryption method used by the wireless access
point/router.
271
Projection of the needle position by the projector is
misaligned, or the camera is misaligned.
Perform calibration. 257
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Troubleshooting
266
While Operating
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Machine does not operate.
“Start/Stop” button was not pressed. 14
There is no stitch pattern selected. 51
There is no pattern selected. 134
Presser foot is not lowered. 14
“Start/Stop” button was pressed with the foot
controller attached.
53
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the
machine is set for the sewing speed controller to
control the zigzag stitch width.
22, 53
Needle breaks.
Needle is installed incorrectly. 36
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. 36
Needle is turned or bent. 36
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
34
Wrong presser foot was used. 273
Upper thread tension is too tight. 62, 165
Fabric is pulled during sewing. —
Spool cap is set incorrectly. 42
There are scratches around the opening in the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the opening
in the needle plate. This is not a scratch.
a Notch
*
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
*
There are scratches on the bobbin case. *
Needle is defective. 36
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
37
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Presser foot is attached incorrectly. 48
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. 48
Fabric is too thick. 78
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric or
thick seams.
78
Stitch length is too short. 61
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being
embroidered.
127
a
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 37
Upper thread breaks.
Machine is not threaded correctly (used the wrong
spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread did not
catch the needle bar threader, etc.)
42
Knotted or tangled thread is being used. —
The selected needle is not appropriate for the
thread being used.
34
Upper thread tension is too tight. 62, 165
Thread is twisted. —
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Needle is installed incorrectly. 36
There are scratches around the opening of the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the opening
in the needle plate. This is not a scratch.
a Notch
*
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
*
There are scratches on the bobbin case. *
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
34
While sewing, the thread became knotted or
tangled.
40, 42
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
37
The ball point needle for embroidery is not being
used when embroidering patterns with short
stitches, such as small letters.
34
The thread is tangled on the wrong side of the fabric.
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
34
The ball point needle for embroidery is not being
used when embroidering patterns with short
stitches, such as small letters.
34
The upper thread is too tight.
The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. 40
Bobbin thread breaks.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 37
There are scratches on the bobbin or it does not
rotate properly.
40
Thread is twisted. —
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
a
Troubleshooting
267
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
37
Fabric puckers.
There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin
threading.
40, 42
Spool cap is set incorrectly. 42
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
34
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. 61
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 165
Wrong presser foot was used. 273
The stitch is not sewn correctly.
The presser foot that is used is not appropriate for
the type of stitch that you wish to sew.
273
The thread tension is incorrect. 62
The thread is tangled, for example, in the bobbin
case.
255
Skipped stitches
Machine is threaded incorrectly. 42
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
34
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Needle is installed incorrectly. 36
Needle is defective. 36
Dust or lint has collected under the needle plate. 255
Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn. 79
No stitching
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
High-pitched sound while sewing
Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. 255
Pieces of thread are caught in the race. 255
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
37
There are needle holes or friction scratches in the
bobbin case.
255
Fabric does not feed through the machine.
Feed dogs are set in the down position.
• Touch , and then turn the handwheel to
raise the feed dogs.
111
Stitches are too close together. 61
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Wrong presser foot was used. 273
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Thread is entangled. 262
Zigzag foot “J” is slanted on a thick seam at the
beginning of stitching.
79
The embroidery foot catches on seams or the
fabric.
• Increase the setting specified for [Embroidery
Foot Height].
25
The fabric feeds in the opposite direction.
The feed mechanism is damaged. *
The needle contacts the needle plate.
The needle clamp screw is loose. 36
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
Fabric being sewn with the machine cannot be
removed.
Thread is tangled below the needle plate. 261
A broken needle has fallen into the machine.
Turn off the machine, and then remove the needle
plate. If the needle that fell into the machine can
be seen, use tweezers to remove it. After
removing the needle, return the needle plate to its
original position.
Before turning on the machine, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you to check that it turns
smoothly. If the handwheel does not turn smoothly
or the needle that fell into the machine cannot be
removed, consult your authorized Brother dealer.
262
The handwheel feels sluggish when it is turned.
Thread is tangled in the bobbin case. 261
The built-in camera cannot detect the buttonhole foot.
Clean the area of the buttonhole foot to be
detected.
87
Make sure that nothing obstructs the detection of
mark “A+” or the three dots.
87
The machine does not detect the embroidery
positioning sticker.
Block light from the outside. —
Make sure that nothing obstructs the embroidery
positioning sticker.
Adjust the brightness of the lighting.
Set the fabric into the embroidery frame correctly.
The scanned image is too bright or too pale.
Block light from the outside. —
It is difficult to thread the needle or remove the
embroidery frame.
Move the embroidery frame. 164
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Troubleshooting
268
After Sewing/Embroidering
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Thread tension is incorrect.
Upper threading is incorrect. 42
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 40
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
34
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. 48
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 165
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 37
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 36
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not being used.
37
Character or decorative stitch patterns are
misaligned.
Stitch pattern adjustment settings were set
incorrectly.
105
Stitch pattern does not turn out.
Wrong presser foot was used. 273
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics or
stretch fabrics.
80
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 165
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle while
it was being sewn.
• Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands so
that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
51
The thread is tangled, for example, in the bobbin
case.
261
The pattern is not embroidered correctly.
Thread is twisted. —
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 62, 165
Fabric was not inserted into the embroidery frame
correctly (fabric was loose, etc.).
130
Stabilizing material was not attached.
• Always use stabilizing material, especially with
stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, fabrics with a
coarse weave, or fabrics that often cause
pattern shrinkage. See your authorized Brother
dealer for the proper stabilizer.
127
There was an object placed near the machine,
and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the
object during embroidering.
126
The embroidery foot catches on seams or the
fabric.
• Increase the setting specified for [Embroidery
Foot Height].
25
Fabric outside the embroidery frame edges
interferes with the machine, so the embroidery
unit cannot move.
• Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so
that the excess fabric is away from the
machine, and rotate the pattern 180 degrees.
130
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit cannot
move freely.
• Place a large thick book or similar object near
the embroidery unit to lightly lift the heavy side
and keep it level. Ensure that this object will not
interfere with the movement of the embroidery
unit or embroidery frame.
—
Fabric is hanging off the table.
• If the fabric is hanging off the table during
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not move
freely. Place the fabric so that it does not hang
off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
132
Fabric is snagged or caught on something.
• Stop the machine and place the fabric so that it
does not get caught or snagged.
—
Embroidery frame was removed during
embroidering (for example, to reset the bobbin).
The embroidery foot was bumped or moved while
removing or attaching the embroidery frame, or
the embroidery unit was moved.
162
Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it is
smaller than the embroidery frame.
127
When restarting embroidering, for example, after
the thread breaks, it may not be possible to
continue embroidering, depending on the pattern.
• Press (Reinforcement stitch button) to
sew reinforcement stitches at the beginning of
sewing, and then restart embroidering.
163
Loops appear on the surface of the fabric when
embroidering.
The thread tension is incorrectly set. 165
The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly set
for the combination of the fabric, thread and
pattern being used.
• Use the embroidery needle plate cover.
133
The combination of the bobbin case and bobbin
thread is incorrect.
132
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Error Messages
269
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
7
When erroneous operations are performed,
messages and advice will be displayed on the
LCD. If an error message appears, refer to the
table below and take the appropriate action. If the
displayed message is not listed, follow the on-
screen instructions. If you touch [OK] or do the
operation correctly while the error message is
displayed, the message disappears. If the
problem persists, contact your authorized Brother
dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service
center.
Error Messages
No. Error messages, Cause/solution
1
Attach buttonhole foot “A+”. The built-in camera
detects buttonhole foot “A+” by the mark “A+”
and the three dots.
This message appears when start sewing buttonhole
stitches without attaching buttonhole foot “A+”.
2
Cannot change the configuration of the
characters.
This message is displayed when there are too many
characters and the curved character configuration is
impossible.
3
Cannot recognize the embroidery positioning
mark.
This message is displayed when the machine failed to
recognize the embroidery positioning mark.
• Confirm that the embroidery positioning mark is in the
selected area. Refer to steps
3 through 4 of “Using the
Embroidery Positioning Sticker” on page 159.
• Machine failed to recognize printed positioning mark.
Change the settings to print at actual size (no scaling),
and try printing the embroidery positioning mark again.
(page 176)
• Refer to “The machine does not detect the embroidery
positioning sticker.” of “While Operating” on page 266.
4
Change to a larger embroidery frame.
This message is displayed when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the selected pattern is too large to fit
in the attached embroidery frame.
This message may also appear while aligning an embroidery
pattern using the built-in camera and the repositioned
pattern does not fit in the attached embroidery frame.
5
Important Update Available. Update your machine
by downloading the update file from the
[Download the update program] in the “Machine
settings”.
There is a new update file on the server. Update the
machine. (page 259)
6
Includes a special pattern that cannot be saved to
external memory. Save the pattern in the
machine’s memory.
This message is displayed when you try to save a copyright
protected pattern to USB media or computer. According to
copyright laws, patterns that are illegal to reproduce or edit
cannot be saved to USB media or computer. If this message
displays, save the pattern in the machine’s memory.
7
Lower the presser foot lever.
This message is displayed when (Presser foot lifter
button) is pressed while the presser foot lever is raised and
the needle is lowered.
8
Not enough available memory to save the data.
Delete some patterns or use a different media.
This message is displayed when the memory is full and the
stitch pattern or embroidery pattern cannot be saved. To
save the stitch pattern, delete a previously saved stitch
pattern or embroidery pattern. (page 64, page 168)
9
Not enough available memory to save the data.
This message is displayed when either the maximum
number of patterns have been saved or the pattern you want
to save takes a lot of memory, and the machine cannot save
it. Either delete patterns from the machine’s memory or save
the pattern to USB media. (page 64, page 168)
10
OK to recall and resume previous memory?
This message appears if the machine is turned off while
embroidering, then turned on again. Touch [OK] to return the
machine to the condition (pattern position and number of
stitches) when it was turned off. (page 164)
11
OK to recall and resume previous memory? (My
Design Center)
This message is displayed when the machine is turned off
while a pattern is being edited in My Design Center, then
turned on again, and then My Design Center is started.
Touch [OK] to return to the screen before the machine was
turned off.
12
OK to separate the combined border pattern?
This message is displayed when rotating a combined border
pattern in the embroidery screen.
13
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery
frame. Add no additional characters.
This message is displayed when the machine is in
embroidery mode, and the character pattern combination is
too large to fit in the embroidery frame.
14
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery
frame. If you plan to add more patterns, rotate the
pattern combination.
This message is displayed when the machine is in
embroidery mode and the combined character pattern is too
large for the embroidery frame. You can rotate the pattern 90
degrees and continue combining characters.
15
Preventive maintenance is recommended.
This message is displayed when the machine needs to be
maintained.
Once this message appears, it is recommended to take your
machine to an authorized Brother dealer or the nearest
Brother authorized service center for a regular maintenance
check. Although this message will disappear and the
machine will continue to function once you touch [OK], the
message will display several more times until the
appropriate maintenance is performed.
16
Remove Dual Feed module from the machine.
This message appears when you try to start embroidering
with the dual feed foot attached to the machine. Remove the
dual feed foot before entering the embroidery mode.
17
Remove the embroidery frame and replace the
bobbin. Next, attach the frame and touch OK to
move it to the previous position.
This message is displayed when replacing the embroidering
bobbin thread. (page 162)
No. Error messages, Cause/solution
Error Messages
270
18
Remove the embroidery positioning mark.
This message is displayed when the machine has
recognized the embroidery position mark. Remove the
embroidery positioning sticker and touch [OK] to continue.
To remove the embroidery positioning sticker more easily,
touch . (page 159)
19
The “Start/Stop” button does not operate with the
foot controller attached. Remove the foot
controller.
This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed to sew utility stitches or character/decorative
stitches while the foot controller is connected.
20
The bobbin thread is almost empty.
This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is
running out. Although a few stitches can be sewn when the
“Start/Stop” button is pressed, replace with a wound bobbin
immediately. (page 40)
21
The bobbin thread is almost empty.
* Use the “Reinforcement Stitch” button to sew a
single stitch repeatedly and tie off the stitching.
* Use the move frame key to move the embroidery
carriage so the embroidery frame can be removed
or installed. Afterward, the carriage moves back
to its previous position.
This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is
running out. Although a few stitches can be sewn when the
“Start/Stop” button is pressed, replace with a wound bobbin
immediately. (page 162)
22
The bobbin winder safety device has activated. Is
the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the bobbin is being wound,
and the motor locks because the thread is tangled, etc.
23
The pattern extends out of the pattern area.
Change position of the pattern and scan the new
area.
This message appears when the built-in camera is being
used to align the embroidery position, but the embroidery
positioning sticker is too near an edge or the pattern extends
from the embroidery frame.
Rehoop the fabric so that the pattern is within the
embroidery field, and then try aligning the position again.
24
The pockets are full.
This message is displayed when no more settings for utility
stitches can be saved. In this case, erase settings that have
previously been saved in order to save the new settings.
(page 63)
25
The safety device has been activated. Is the
thread tangled? Is the needle bent?
This message is displayed when the motor locks due to
tangled thread or for other reasons related to thread delivery.
26
This file cannot be used.
This message appears if the file size or format is
incompatible with this machine. Confirm the file size and
format. (page 271)
27
This file exceeds the data capacity and cannot be
used. Use a suitable size file.
This message is displayed if file dimension is incompatible
with machine. Confirm the file dimension and format.
(page 271)
No. Error messages, Cause/solution
28
This key cannot be used at this time.
This message is displayed when you touch [Sewing Guide]
in the screen other than the utility stitch, or touch [Pattern
Explanation] in the screen other than the utility stitch or
character/decorative stitch.
29
This pattern cannot be used.
This message appears when you try to retrieve a pattern
that cannot be used with this machine, such as when the
data is corrupted.
30
This USB media cannot be used.
This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible
media. Use another USB media. For compatible USB media,
refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
31
Turn off the machine before attaching or
removing the needle plate.
This message is displayed when you try to sew with a stitch
other than a middle needle position stitch while the straight
stitch needle plate is installed.
This message may also appear when the needle plate is
removed with the machine on or when the machine is turned
on and embroidery mode is selected.
32
Update failed. Please download and install the
update program again.
Refer to “Updating Your Machine’s Software” on page 258.
33
Update failed. Please try again installing the
update program.
* If the problem persists, please redownload and
install the program.
Refer to “Updating Your Machine’s Software” on page 258.
34
USB media error
This message is displayed when an error occurs with the
USB media. Use another USB media. For compatible USB
media, refer to “Specifications” on page 271.
35
When the speed controller is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, the “Start/Stop” button does
not operate.
This message is displayed when the speed control slide is
set to control the stitch width, and the “Start/ Stop” button is
pressed. Set [Width Control] to off in the settings screen to
use the “Start/Stop” button (page 22), or use the foot
controller to operate the machine (page 73).
36
F**
If error message [F**] appears in the LCD while the machine
is being used, the machine may be malfunctioning. Contact
your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
No. Error messages, Cause/solution
Specifications
271
Appendix
8
* Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.
Chapter 8
Appendix
Specifications
Item Specification
Dimensions of machine 751 mm (W) × 337 mm (D) × 350 mm (H)
(approx. 29-9/16 inches (W) × 13-17/64 inches (D) × 13-25/32 inches (H))
Weight of machine Approx. 19.7 kg (approx. 43 lb)
Dimensions of machine with
embroidery unit attached
Approx. 1090 mm (W) × 671 mm (D) × 350 mm (H)
(approx. 42-29/32 inches (W) × 26-27/64 inches (D) × 13-25/32 inches (H))
Weight of machine with embroidery
unit attached
Approx. 27.0 kg (approx. 59 lb)
Sewing speed 70 to 1050 stitches per minute
Maximum embroidery speed 1050 stitches per minute
Interfaces
Wireless LAN
*1
None, Enhanced Open, WEP, WPA/WPA2-Personal, WPA3-
Personal
• A wireless network cannot be set up with WPA/WPA2/WPA3
Enterprise.
Memory Stitch patterns 1 MB
Embroidery patterns 10 MB
My Design Center 100 MB
Data types
*2
Sewing stitch patterns
*3
.pmz, .pmp, .pmv, .pmx, .pmu
Embroidery patterns
*4
.pes .phc .phx .dst .pen
Data that can be retrieved/
imported when using My
Design Center
• Pattern editing data (.pm9)
• Motif stitch pattern data (.pmf)
• Decorative fill pattern data (.plf)
Image data can be used for the
My Design Center and Picture
Play embroidery function
.jpg, .png, .bmp
• Less than 6 MB and 16 million pixels or less
Number of decorative stitch pattern
combinations
Up to 70
Maximum embroidering area 465 mm (H) × 297 mm (W) (approx.18-1/4 inches (H) × 11-5/8 inches (W))
Types of USB Devices/ Media that
can be used
• USB Flash drive (Type A)
Supported formats: FAT32 and NTFS
Recommended size: 8 to 32 GB
• Some USB media may not be usable with this machine.
Condition of the [Eco Mode] and
[Shutoff Support Mode]
[Eco Mode] Available time OFF, 10 - 120 (minute)
“Start/Stop” button Green flashing
Suspended function Machine light, Screen display
After recovering The machine starts from the
previous operation.
[Shutoff Support Mode] Available time OFF, 1 - 12 (hour)
“Start/Stop” button Green slow flashing
Suspended function All functions
After recovering An error message appears.
You need to turn off and on the
machine to restart.
Compatible image files of the Screen
Saver Image
Format .jpg
File size Max. 2 MB for each image
File dimension 800 × 1280 pixels or less (If the width is more than 800 pixels, the
image imported will be reduced to a width of 800 pixels.)
Number allowed 5 or less
Specifications
272
*1
The wireless network connection complies with IEEE 802.11b/g/n standards and uses the 2.4 GHz frequency.
Use Design Database Transfer or PE-DESIGN version 11 or later to transfer data from your computer to the machine. For the operating
systems compatible with the software, visit our website https://s.brother/cndkb/
.
*2
When recalling data saved with a different machine model, it may not appear as it was saved. Check the recalled data.
*3
“.pmp”, “.pmv”, “.pmu” or “.pmx” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is saved as a
“.pmz” stitch data file. Using data other than what was created using this machine or the machine which create “.pmp”, “.pmv”, “.pmx” or
“.pmu” data file, may cause the machine to malfunction.
*4
Using data other than that saved using our data design systems or this machine may cause this machine to malfunction. When the
machine is used to save a file with any extension, it is saved as a .phx data file.
Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default thread color sequence. Check
the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
Note
• We recommend using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through
9, “-”, and “_” for the name of the file/folder.
IMPORTANT
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread may break or the needle may bend or break
when embroidering with a stitch density that is too fine or when embroidering three or more overlapping stitches. In that
case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.
Stitch Chart
273
Appendix
8
Utility stitches with “*” under “Presser foot” in the
following table can be used with a twin needle if
zigzag foot “J” is attached.
Stitch Chart
Memo
• For details on automatic reverse/
reinforcement stitching for each stitch, refer to
“Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement Stitching”
on page 56.
• The presser foot that is displayed on each
screen when Free motion mode is (off) or
(on) is shown in the table under “Presser
foot”.
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J*/O
Straight stitch (Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
—
2.5
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
Straight stitch (Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
—
2.5
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
Straight stitch (Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
—
2.5
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
Straight stitch (Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
—
2.5
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
Triple stretch stitch
General sewing for
reinforcement and
decorative topstitching
—
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching,
sewing and decorative
applications
1.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching, top
stitching
—
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Basting stitch
Basting
—
5.0
5.0
J*/O
Zigzag stitch
For overcasting, mending.
3.5
0.0 - 7.0
1.4
0.0 - 5.0
J*/O
Zigzag stitch
For overcasting, mending.
3.5
0.0 - 7.0
1.4
0.0 - 5.0
J*/O
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at
left.
3.5
2.5 - 5.0
1.4
0.3 - 5.0
J*/O
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Start from left needle
position, zigzag sew at
right.
3.5
2.5 - 5.0
1.4
0.3 - 5.0
J*/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
3 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of light and
medium weight fabrics
3.5
2.5 - 5.0
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of
heavyweight fabric
5.0
2.5 - 5.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily
friable fabrics or
decorative stitching.
5.0
3.5 - 5.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforced seaming of
stretch fabric
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of medium
stretch fabric and
heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative
stitching
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
4.0
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
4.0
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and
seaming stretch fabric
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.0
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.8
0.4 - 5.0
S
With side cutter
Straight stitch while cutting
fabrics
—
2.5
0.2 - 5.0
S
With side cutter
Zigzag stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5
3.5 - 5.0
1.4
0.0 - 5.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Chart
274
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
3.5
3.5 - 5.0
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0
3.5 - 5.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0
3.5 - 5.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
right seam allowance
—
2.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/C
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
* Be sure to use the
straight stitch needle
plate when using free
motion quilting foot “C”.
—
2.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Piecing stitch (Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
—
2.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
—
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Quilting appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting
and sewing on appliqué
quilt pieces
3.5
0.0 - 7.0
1.4
0.0 - 5.0
J/O
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching
binding
1.5
0.0 - 7.0
1.8
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Quilting stippling
Background quilting
7.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
R
Blind hem stitch
Hemming woven fabrics
* The stitch width setting
is in neither millimeters
nor inches.
00
3 - 3
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
R
Blind hem stitch stretch
Hemming stretch fabric
* The stitch width setting
is in neither millimeters
nor inches.
00
3 - 3
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
3.5
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
2.5
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Shell tuck edge
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.2 - 5.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
N+*/O
Satin scallop stitch
Decorating collar of
blouse, edge of
handkerchief
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
0.5
0.1 - 5.0
N+/O
Scallop stitch
Decorating collar of
blouse, edge of
handkerchief
7.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.4
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Patchwork join stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.2
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching,
attaching cord and
couching
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.2
0.2 - 5.0
J*/O
Smocking stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative
stitching
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Fagoting cross stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Tape attaching
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
N+/O
Ladder stitch
Decorative stitching
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.0
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative top stitching
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
1.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
5.5
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Serpentine stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
N+*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
N+/O
Decorative stippling
stitch
Decorative stitching
7.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Chart
275
Appendix
8
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at left
—
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at center
—
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching zigzag
Decorative hems, top
stitching
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, lace
attaching pin stitch
3.5
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems
3.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems daisy
stitch
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
4.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Honeycomb stitch
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Honeycomb stitch
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
4.0
0.4 - 5.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
N+/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
4.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems and
bridging stitch
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems.
Fagoting, attaching ribbon
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
3.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
6.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems
5.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Ladder stitch
Decorative hems.
Fagoting, attaching ribbon
7.0
0.0 - 7.0
1.6
0.4 - 2.5
A+
Narrow rounded
buttonhole
Buttonhole on light to
medium weight fabrics
5.0
3.0 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Wide round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra
space for larger buttons
5.5
3.5 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Tapered round ended
buttonhole
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
5.0
3.0 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical
bar tack in heavyweight
fabrics
5.0
3.0 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with bar tack
5.0
3.0 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Round double ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes for fine,
medium to heavyweight
fabrics
5.0
3.0 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Narrow squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes for light to
medium weight fabrics
5.0
3.0 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Chart
276
A+
Wide squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra
space for larger
decorative buttons
5.5
3.5 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Squared buttonhole
Heavy-duty buttonholes
with vertical bar tacks
5.0
3.0 - 6.5
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Stretch buttonhole
Buttonholes for stretch or
woven fabrics
6.0
3.0 - 6.5
1.0
0.5 - 2.0
A+
Heirloom buttonhole
Buttonholes for heirloom
and stretch fabrics
6.0
3.0 - 6.5
1.5
1.0 - 3.0
A+
Bound buttonhole
The first step in making
bound buttonholes
5.0
0.0 - 6.5
2.0
0.2 - 4.0
A+
Keyhole buttonhole
Buttonholes in
heavyweight or thick
fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0
3.0 - 7.0
0.5
0.3 - 1.0
A+
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in medium to
heavy weight fabrics for
larger flat buttons
7.0
3.0 - 7.0
0.5
0.3 - 1.0
A+
Keyhole buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical
bar tack for reinforcement
in heavyweight or thick
fabrics
7.0
3.0 - 7.0
0.5
0.3 - 1.0
N+/O
4 steps buttonhole 1
Left side of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0
1.5 - 7.0
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
N+/O
4 steps buttonhole 2
Bar tack of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0
1.5 - 7.0
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
N+/O
4 steps buttonhole 3
Right side of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0
1.5 - 7.0
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
N+/O
4 steps buttonhole 4
Bar tack of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0
1.5 - 7.0
0.4
0.2 - 1.0
A+
Darning
Darning of medium weight
fabric
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
2.0
0.4 - 2.5
A+
Darning
Darning of heavyweight
fabric
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
2.0
0.4 - 2.5
A+
Bar tack
Reinforcement at opening
of pocket, etc.
2.0
1.0 - 3.0
0.4
0.3 - 1.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
M
Button sewing
Attaching buttons
3.5
2.5 - 4.5
—
N+/O
Eyelet
For making eyelets, holes
on belts, etc.
7.0
5.0 6.0 7.0
7.0
5.0 6.0 7.0
N+/O
Star eyelet
For making star-shaped
eyelets on holes.
——
N+/O
Diagonally left up
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N+/O
Reverse (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N+/O
Diagonally right up
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N+/O
Sideways to left
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N+/O
Sideways to right
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N+/O
Diagonally left down
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N+/O
Forward (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N+/O
Diagonally right down
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N+/O
Sideways to left (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N+/O
Sideways to right
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N+/O
Forward (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N+/O
Reverse (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Chart
277
Appendix
8
J/C
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
—
2.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
right seam allowance
—
2.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Piecing stitch (Left)
Piecework/patchwork
6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
left seam allowance
—
2.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
—
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Basting stitch
Basting
—
5.0
5.0
J/O
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching,
sewing and decorative
applications
1.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Quilting appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting
and sewing on appliqué
quilt pieces
3.50
0.00 - 7.00
1.6
0.0 - 5.0
J/O
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left
3.50
2.50 - 5.00
1.6
0.3 - 5.0
J/O
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Start from left needle
position, zigzag sew at
right
3.50
2.50 - 5.00
1.6
0.3 - 5.0
J/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
3 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching
binding
2.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Shell tuck edge
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
3.50
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Quilting stippling
Background quilting
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
4.0
0.4 - 5.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J/O
Tape attaching
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
5.50
0.00 - 7.00
1.4
0.2 - 5.0
N+/O
Serpentine stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative
stitching
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Fagoting cross stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching,
attaching cord and
couching
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
1.2
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Smocking stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative top stitching
4.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.00
0.00 - 7.00
1.0
0.2 - 5.0
J/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
5.50
0.00 - 7.00
1.6
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems and
bridging stitch
6.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Single diamond
overcast
Reinforcement and
seaming stretch fabric
6.00
0.00 - 7.00
3.0
0.4 - 5.0
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative
stitching
4.00
0.00 - 7.00
4.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Appliqué stitch
Appliqués, decorative
stitch
3.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqué, decorative
blanket stitch
4.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Chart
278
N+/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
2.5
0.4 - 5.0
N+*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00
0.00 - 7.00
0.4
0.1 - 5.0
X
Free motion couching
stitch
Free motion couching
stitch
——
N+
Free-motion basting
Free motion basting stitch
——
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
——
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
——
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
——
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
1.0
0.1 - 5.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
5.0
2.5 - 7.0
2.5
1.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
5.0
2.5 - 7.0
2.5
1.4 - 4.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
2.0
1.0 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
3.5
2.5 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
3.0
2.0 - 5.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
3.0 - 7.0
3.0
2.5 - 5.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
3.0 - 7.0
2.5
2.5 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
2.5
1.4 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
3.0 - 7.0
2.5
2.0 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
4.0 - 7.0
3.0
2.5 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
1.0
0.4 - 5.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
6.0
4.0 - 7.0
0.3
0.2 - 2.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
6.0
4.0 - 7.0
0.3
0.2 - 2.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
3.5 - 7.0
0.3
0.1 - 2.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
4.0 - 7.0
3.5
2.5 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
4.0 - 7.0
2.5
2.0 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
4.5 - 7.0
2.5
2.0 - 4.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Chart
279
Appendix
8
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
2.5 - 7.0
2.5
1.6 - 4.0
N+/O
Tapering stitch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0
4.0 - 7.0
2.5
2.0 - 4.0
SR
Straight stitch (Middle)
Straight stitch for the stitch
regulator mode
—
2.5
1.0 - 4.5
SR
Zigzag stitch
Zigzag stitch for the stitch
regulator mode
2.5
0.0 - 3.0
1.6
1.0 - 3.0
SR
Free-motion basting
Basting stitch for the stitch
regulator mode
—
20.0
10.0 - 30.0
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm)
Stitch
length
(mm)
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
INDEX
280
A
Accessory case ........................................................................... 14
Accessory compartment
............................................................. 15
Adapter
....................................................................................... 48
Advanced multi-function foot controller
....................................... 53
Aligning the position
.............................................. 157, 159, 161
Alphabet characters
.......................................................... 59, 137
Appliqué
.......................................................................... 107, 184
Appliqué piece
.......................................................................... 184
Apps
.......................................................................................... 225
Automatic fabric sensor system
.................................................. 73
Automatic reinforcement stitching
............................................... 56
Automatic thread cutting
................................................... 58, 141
Automatic threading button
................................................. 14, 42
B
Ball point needle ......................................................................... 34
Bar tack
....................................................................................... 93
Basting
.................................................................... 95, 114, 173
Blind hem stitches
....................................................................... 85
Bobbin
pulling up the bobbin thread
.................................................... 41
runs out of thread
.................................................................. 162
setting
..................................................................................... 40
winding
.................................................................................... 37
Bobbin case
.............................................................................. 132
cleaning
................................................................................. 255
Bobbin cover
....................................................... 13, 40, 82, 83
Bobbin thread
........................................................................... 132
Border function (designing repeated patterns)
......................... 150
Button sewing
............................................................................. 92
Buttonholes
embroidery
............................................................................ 136
four-step
.................................................................................. 91
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate
...... 89
one-step
.................................................................................. 87
C
Camera ............................................................................. 74, 161
Character spacing
............................................................. 21, 144
Character/Decorative stitches
adjustments
........................................................................... 105
retrieving
................................................................................. 64
saving
...................................................................................... 64
Cleaning
.................................................................................... 255
Clock
........................................................................................... 16
Color shuffling function
............................................................. 169
Combining patterns
................................................................... 147
Combining stitch patterns
........................................................... 59
Compact dual feed foot
..................................................... 49, 111
Connecting patterns
.................................................................. 212
Cord guide bobbin cover
............................................................. 83
Couching
......................................................................... 101, 191
Cylindrical pieces
........................................................................ 78
D
Darning ....................................................................................... 93
Decorative fill pattern
............................................ 194, 234, 236
Denim
................................................................................. 34, 79
Dual purpose stylus
.................................................. 15, 70, 155
E
Echo quilting ................................................................... 113, 194
Eco mode
.................................................................................... 27
Edge-to-edge quilt function
....................................................... 195
Embroidery
adjusting the speed .............................................................. 133
aligning the position
.............................................................. 157
appliqué
............................................................ 184, 187, 189
automatic thread cutting function (end color trim)
................ 141
changing the thread color
..................................................... 169
checking the position
............................................................ 139
combined patterns
................................................................ 147
combining
............................................................................. 147
editing
................................................................................... 142
key functions
........................................................................ 142
linked characters
.................................................................. 174
repeated patterns
................................................................. 150
retrieving
............................................................................... 168
saving
................................................................................... 167
thread trimming function (jump stitch trim)
........................... 141
Embroidery foot “W”
................................................................. 125
Embroidery frames
attaching/removing
............................................................... 131
inserting fabric
...................................................................... 130
using the embroidery sheet
.................................................. 131
Embroidery needle plate cover
................................................ 133
Embroidery positioning sticker
....................................... 159, 212
Embroidery sheet
..................................................................... 131
Embroidery unit
.......................................................................... 14
carriage
.................................................................................. 14
End point setting
........................................................................ 75
Error messages
........................................................................ 269
Eyelet
............................................................................... 94, 136
F
Fabrics
fabric/thread/needle combinations
......................................... 34
sewing heavyweight fabrics
.................................................... 78
sewing lightweight fabrics
....................................................... 79
sewing stretch fabrics
..................................................... 79, 90
Feed dogs
........................................................................ 13, 111
File format
................................................................................ 271
Flat bed attachment
......................................................... 13, 126
Font
.......................................................................................... 137
Foot controller
............................................................................ 53
Forward/Back key
.................................................................... 163
Free motion quilting
free motion echo quilting foot “E”
......................................... 113
free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
................................... 113
free motion quilting foot “C”
.................................................. 112
Free motion sewing mode
........................................................ 111
G
Gathering ................................................................................. 108
Guidelines
.................................................................................. 65
H
Handle ........................................................................................ 13
Hand-look quilting
.................................................................... 119
Handwheel
................................................................................. 13
Home page screen
..................................................................... 18
I
Importing decorative fill pattern data ........................................ 236
Importing motif stitch pattern data
............................................ 236
Included accessories
.................................................................. 14
INDEX
INDEX
281
Appendix
8
K
Key functions
embroidery
............................................................................ 142
MY CUSTOM STITCH
.......................................................... 121
My Design Center
................................................................. 230
utility stitches
.......................................................................... 19
Knee lifter
........................................................................... 13, 72
L
L/R Shift ...................................................................................... 61
Language
................................................................................... 23
Large-size split embroidery patterns
........................................ 212
LCD screen
......................................................................... 13, 17
Leather
....................................................................................... 79
Light
............................................................................................ 23
M
Machine help key ........................................................................ 29
Machine number
....................................................................... 258
Main power switch
.............................................................. 13, 16
Memory
............................................................................. 64, 167
Metallic thread
.................................................................... 35, 42
Motif stitch pattern
.......................................................... 233, 236
Multi-directional sewing
............................................................ 103
Multi-purpose screwdriver
.......................................................... 15
MY CUSTOM STITCH
.............................................................. 120
My Design Center
..................................................................... 227
create a pattern
.................................................................... 241
key functions
......................................................................... 230
line and region settings
......................................................... 239
My Design Snap App
................................................................ 225
My Stitch Monitor App
.............................................................. 225
N
Needle
ball point needle
..................................................................... 34
changing the needle
............................................................... 36
changing the needle position
.................................................. 81
checking the needle location
.................................................. 74
fabric/thread/needle combinations
.......................................... 34
twin needle
........................................................................... 106
Needle bar thread guide
................................................... 13, 106
Needle calibration
..................................................................... 257
Needle clamp screw
................................................................... 13
Needle plate
..................................................................... 13, 255
Needle position
................................................................... 75, 81
Needle position button
................................................................ 14
No sew setting
.......................................................................... 171
O
Operation buttons ....................................................................... 14
Overcasting
................................................................................ 84
P
Picture Play embroidery function .............................................. 177
Piecing
...................................................................................... 110
Pivoting
....................................................................................... 72
Power cord
................................................................................. 16
Presser foot
pressure
.................................................................................. 73
removing
................................................................................. 48
types
..................................................................................... 273
Presser foot holder
............................................................. 13, 48
Presser foot holder screw
........................................................... 13
Presser foot lever
....................................................................... 13
Presser foot lifter button
............................................................. 14
Presser foot/Needle exchange key
........................... 36, 48, 106
Pretension disk
........................................................... 13, 37, 39
Preview key
.................................................................... 121, 153
Print and stitch
.......................................................................... 175
Projector
embroidery pattern
................................................................ 154
guidelines
................................................................................ 65
needle drop point
.................................................................. 139
projector edit with stylus
........................................................ 155
stitch pattern
........................................................................... 70
Q
Quilting ...................................................................................... 110
compact dual feed foot
.......................................................... 111
embroidery
............................................................................ 194
free motion
............................................................................ 111
stitch regulator
...................................................................... 114
Quilting border patterns
........................................ 201, 203, 208
R
Race ......................................................................................... 255
Reinforcement stitch
................................................................... 55
Reinforcement stitch button
................................................ 14, 56
Repeated patterns
.................................................................... 150
Retrieving
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. 64
embroidery patterns
.............................................................. 168
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................. 123
utility stitch settings
................................................................. 63
Reverse stitch button
.......................................................... 14, 56
Reverse/Reinforcement stitches
................................................. 55
S
Saving
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. 64
embroidery patterns
.............................................................. 167
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................. 123
utility stitch settings
................................................................. 63
Scallop stitches
......................................................................... 109
Scan
background image
...................................................... 157, 243
using the scanning frame
...................................................... 241
Screen saver
............................................................................... 27
Settings
automatic thread cutting
................................................ 58, 141
embroidery settings
................................................................. 25
general settings
....................................................................... 23
machine settings key
.............................................................. 22
sewing settings
....................................................................... 22
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide)
.................... 14, 51
Shell tuck stitches
..................................................................... 109
Shutoff support mode
................................................................. 27
Specifications
............................................................................ 271
Speed
............................................................................... 14, 133
Spool cap
.................................................................................... 13
Spool net
..................................................................................... 35
Spool pin
..................................................................................... 13
Spool stand
................................................................................. 45
Stabilizer
................................................................................... 127
Start/Stop button
......................................................................... 14
Step stitch patterns
................................................................... 104
Stippling
.......................................................................... 194, 227
Stitch chart
................................................................................ 273
Stitch regulator
.......................................................................... 114
Stitch tapering function
............................................................... 98
Stitch types
................................................................................. 51
Straight stitch foot
....................................................................... 82
Straight stitch needle plate
......................................................... 82
Straight stitches
.......................................................................... 81
Stretch fabrics
............................................................................. 79
Supplemental spool pin
...................................................... 13, 37
Support table
............................................................................ 126
INDEX
282
T
Tape or elastic attaching ........................................................... 108
Thick fabrics
................................................................................ 78
Thin fabrics
................................................................................. 79
Thread
fabric/thread/needle combinations
.......................................... 34
thread tension
............................................................... 62, 165
Thread color sorting
.................................................................. 170
Thread cutter
...................................................................... 13, 51
Thread cutter button
................................................................... 14
Thread density
.................................................................. 21, 143
Thread guide
............................................................... 13, 37, 39
Thread guide plate
...................................................... 13, 39, 42
Thread marks
............................................................................ 152
Tooltip
......................................................................................... 17
Top cover
.................................................................................... 13
Trace area key
.......................................................................... 139
Transparent nylon thread
............................................................ 34
Troubleshooting
........................................................................ 260
Twin needle
.............................................................................. 106
U
Uninterrupted embroidering ...................................................... 171
Updating
................................................................................... 258
Upper threading
.......................................................................... 42
USB media
........................................................................ 64, 167
USB mouse
................................................................................. 17
Utility stitches
key functions
........................................................................... 19
retrieving
................................................................................. 63
saving
...................................................................................... 63
stitch chart
............................................................................. 273
V
Video ........................................................................................... 30
Vinyl fabrics
................................................................................ 79
Voice Guidance
.......................................................................... 28
Volume
........................................................................................ 23
W
Width Control .............................................................................. 73
Wireless network connection
...................................................... 31
Z
Zigzag stitches ............................................................................ 83
Zipper insertion
........................................................................... 95
D031KG-001
Please visit us at https://s.brother/cpdae/ where you
can get product support and answers to frequently asked
questions (FAQs).
English
882-W40/W42
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or
their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
Be sure to install the latest software.
A variety of functional improvements are being performed in the latest version.
Various optional accessories are available to be
purchased separately.
Visit our website https://s.brother/codkb/ .
